patch 7.4.1237

Problem:    Can't translate message without adding a line break.
Solution:   Join the two parts of the message.

.gitignore

@@ -3,6 +3,8 @@
 src/vim
 src/xxd/xxd
 src/auto/if_perl.c
+src/auto/gui_gtk_gresources.c
+src/auto/gui_gtk_gresources.h
 src/tags
 
 # We do need src/auto/configure.
@@ -35,6 +37,7 @@ src/pathdef.c
 src/Obj*/pathdef.c
 gvimext.dll
 gvimext.lib
+runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt
 
 # Borland C++
 bcc.cfg
@@ -72,4 +75,6 @@ src/testdir/test*.out
 src/testdir/test*.failed
 src/testdir/test.log
 src/testdir/dostmp/*
+src/testdir/messages
+src/testdir/viminfo
 src/memfile_test

.travis.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+language: c
+
+compiler:
+  - clang
+  - gcc
+
+env:
+  - COVERAGE=yes CFLAGS=--coverage LDFLAGS=--coverage FEATURES=huge SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src
+    "CONFOPT='--enable-perlinterp --enable-pythoninterp --enable-python3interp --enable-rubyinterp --enable-luainterp'"
+    CHECK_AUTOCONF=yes
+  - COVERAGE=no FEATURES=normal CONFOPT= SHADOWOPT="-C src/shadow" SRCDIR=./src/shadow CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+  - COVERAGE=no FEATURES=small CONFOPT= SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+  - COVERAGE=no FEATURES=tiny  CONFOPT= SHADOWOPT= SRCDIR=./src CHECK_AUTOCONF=no
+
+sudo: false
+
+branches:
+  except:
+    - /^v[0-9]/
+
+addons:
+  apt:
+    packages:
+      - autoconf
+      - lcov
+      - libperl-dev
+      - python-dev
+      - python3-dev
+      - liblua5.1-0-dev
+      - lua5.1
+
+before_install:
+  - pip install --user cpp-coveralls
+
+script:
+  - NPROC=$(getconf _NPROCESSORS_ONLN)
+  - if [ "$CHECK_AUTOCONF" = "yes" -a "$CC" = "gcc" ]; then make -C src autoconf; fi
+  - if [ "x$SHADOWOPT" != x ]; then make -C src shadow; fi && (cd ${SRCDIR} && ./configure --with-features=$FEATURES $CONFOPT --enable-fail-if-missing && make -j$NPROC)
+  - ${SRCDIR}/vim --version
+  - make $SHADOWOPT test
+
+after_success:
+  - if [ x"$COVERAGE" = "xyes" ]; then ~/.local/bin/coveralls -b $SRCDIR -x .xs -e ${SRCDIR}/xxd -e ${SRCDIR}/if_perl.c --encodings utf-8 latin-1 EUC-KR; fi
+
+# vim:set sts=2 sw=2 tw=0 et:

CONTRIBUTING.md

@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+# Contributing to Vim
+
+Patches are welcome in whatever form.
+Discussions about patches happen on the vim-dev maillist.
+If you create a pull request on GitHub it will be
+forwarded to the vim-dev maillist.  You can also send your patch there
+directly.  An attachment with a unified diff format is preferred.
+Information about the maillist can be found [on the Vim website].
+
+[on the Vim website]: http://www.vim.org/maillist.php#vim-dev
+
+Please consider adding a test.  Test coverage isn't very good yet, this needs
+to improve.  Look through recent patches for examples.  The tests are located
+under "src/testdir".
+
+
+# Reporting issues
+
+We use GitHub issues, but that is not a requirement.  Writing to the Vim
+maillist is also fine.
+
+Please use the GitHub issues only for actual issues. If you are not 100% sure
+that your problem is a Vim issue, please first discuss this on the Vim user
+maillist.  Try reproducing the problem without any plugins or settings:
+
+    vim -N -u NONE
+
+If you report an issue, please describe exactly how to reproduce it.
+For example, don't say "insert some text" but say what you did exactly:
+"ahere is some text<Esc>".
+Ideally, the steps you list can be used to write a test to verify the problem
+is fixed.
+
+Feel free to report even the smallest problem, also typos in the documentation.
+
+You can find known issues in the todo file: ":help todo".
+Or open [the todo file] on GitHub to see the latest version.
+
+[the todo file]: https://github.com/vim/vim/blob/master/runtime/doc/todo.txt
+
+
+# Syntax, indent and other runtime files
+
+The latest version of these files can be obtained from the repository.
+They are usually not updated with numbered patches.
+
+If you find a problem with one of these files or have a suggestion for
+improvement, please first try to contact the maintainer directly.
+Look in the header of the file for the name and email address.
+
+The maintainer will take care of issues and send updates to Bram for 
+distribution with Vim.
+
+If the maintainer does not react, contact the vim-dev maillist.

Filelist

@@ -4,12 +4,16 @@
 # source files for all source archives
 SRC_ALL =	\
 		.hgignore \
+		.travis.yml \
+		appveyor.yml \
 		src/README.txt \
+		src/alloc.h \
 		src/arabic.c \
 		src/arabic.h \
 		src/ascii.h \
 		src/blowfish.c \
 		src/buffer.c \
+		src/channel.c \
 		src/charset.c \
 		src/crypt.c \
 		src/crypt_zip.c \
@@ -36,6 +40,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/gui_beval.h \
 		src/hardcopy.c \
 		src/hashtab.c \
+		src/json.c \
 		src/keymap.h \
 		src/macros.h \
 		src/main.c \
@@ -83,8 +88,10 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/main.aap \
 		src/testdir/main.aap \
 		src/testdir/README.txt \
+		src/testdir/Make_all.mak \
 		src/testdir/*.in \
 		src/testdir/sautest/autoload/*.vim \
+		src/testdir/runtest.vim \
 		src/testdir/test[0-9]*.ok \
 		src/testdir/test[0-9]*a.ok \
 		src/testdir/test_[a-z]*.ok \
@@ -108,6 +115,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto.h \
 		src/proto/blowfish.pro \
 		src/proto/buffer.pro \
+		src/proto/channel.pro \
 		src/proto/charset.pro \
 		src/proto/crypt.pro \
 		src/proto/crypt_zip.pro \
@@ -127,6 +135,7 @@ SRC_ALL =	\
 		src/proto/gui_beval.pro \
 		src/proto/hardcopy.pro \
 		src/proto/hashtab.pro \
+		src/proto/json.pro \
 		src/proto/main.pro \
 		src/proto/mark.pro \
 		src/proto/mbyte.pro \
@@ -166,6 +175,7 @@ SRC_UNIX =	\
 		README_src.txt \
 		configure \
 		pixmaps/*.xpm \
+		pixmaps/*.png \
 		pixmaps/gen-inline-pixbufs.sh \
 		pixmaps/stock_icons.h \
 		src/INSTALL \
@@ -186,6 +196,7 @@ SRC_UNIX =	\
 		src/gui_gtk_f.c \
 		src/gui_gtk_f.h \
 		src/gui_gtk_x11.c \
+		src/gui_gtk_res.xml \
 		src/gui_motif.c \
 		src/gui_xmdlg.c \
 		src/gui_xmebw.c \
@@ -211,6 +222,7 @@ SRC_UNIX =	\
 		src/proto/gui_athena.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_gtk.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_gtk_x11.pro \
+		src/proto/gui_gtk_gresources.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_motif.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_xmdlg.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_x11.pro \
@@ -308,6 +320,7 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/if_ole.cpp \
 		src/if_ole.h \
 		src/if_ole.idl \
+		src/if_perl_msvc/stdbool.h \
 		src/iid_ole.c \
 		src/os_dos.h \
 		src/os_msdos.c \
@@ -342,11 +355,11 @@ SRC_DOS =	\
 		src/xpm_w32.h \
 		src/xxd/Make_bc3.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_bc5.mak \
-		src/xxd/Make_cyg.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_djg.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_ming.mak \
 		src/xxd/Make_mvc.mak \
 		nsis/gvim.nsi \
+		nsis/gvim_version.nsh \
 		nsis/README.txt \
 		uninstal.txt \
 		src/VisVim/Commands.cpp \
@@ -437,15 +450,6 @@ SRC_VMS =	\
 		src/xxd/Make_vms.mms \
 		vimtutor.com \
 
-# source files for OS/2 (in the extra archive)
-SRC_OS2 =	\
-		src/Make_os2.mak \
-		src/os_os2_cfg.h \
-		src/testdir/Make_os2.mak \
-		src/testdir/todos.vim \
-		src/testdir/os2.vim \
-		src/xxd/Make_os2.mak \
-
 # source files for QNX (in the extra archive)
 SRC_QNX =	\
 		src/os_qnx.c \
@@ -462,7 +466,6 @@ SRC_EXTRA =	\
 		$(SRC_DOS) \
 		$(SRC_DOS_BIN) \
 		$(SRC_MAC) \
-		$(SRC_OS2) \
 		$(SRC_QNX) \
 		$(SRC_VMS) \
 		README_os390.txt \
@@ -481,6 +484,8 @@ SRC_EXTRA =	\
 # runtime files for all distributions
 RT_ALL =	\
 		README.txt \
+		README.md \
+		CONTRIBUTING.md \
 		runtime/bugreport.vim \
 		runtime/doc/*.awk \
 		runtime/doc/*.pl \
@@ -580,6 +585,8 @@ RT_UNIX =	\
 		runtime/vim32x32.xpm \
 		runtime/vim48x48.png \
 		runtime/vim48x48.xpm \
+		runtime/gvim.desktop \
+		runtime/vim.desktop \
 
 # Unix and DOS runtime without CR-LF translation
 RT_UNIX_DOS_BIN =	\
@@ -700,6 +707,7 @@ EXTRA =		\
 		runtime/vimlogo.xpm \
 		src/swis.s \
 		src/tee/Makefile \
+		src/tee/Make_mvc.mak \
 		src/tee/tee.c \
 		csdpmi4b.zip \
 

Makefile

@@ -63,9 +63,6 @@ all install uninstall tools config configure reconfig proto depend lint tags typ
 # amirt		vim##rt.tgz		runtime for Amiga
 # amibin	vim##bin.tgz		binary for Amiga
 #
-# os2bin	vim##os2.zip		binary for OS/2
-#					(use RT from dosrt)
-#
 # farsi		farsi##.zip		Farsi fonts
 #
 #    All output files are created in the "dist" directory.  Existing files are
@@ -89,9 +86,9 @@ MINOR = 4
 #
 # - Update Vim version number.  For a test version in: src/version.h, Contents,
 #   MAJOR/MINOR above, VIMMAJOR and VIMMINOR in src/Makefile, README*.txt,
-#   runtime/doc/*.txt and nsis/gvim.nsi. Other things in README_os2.txt.  For a
-#   minor/major version: src/GvimExt/GvimExt.reg, src/vim.def, src/vim16.def,
-#   src/gvim.exe.mnf.
+#   runtime/doc/*.txt and nsis/gvim.nsi.
+#   For a minor/major version: src/GvimExt/GvimExt.reg, src/vim.def,
+#   src/vim16.def, src/gvim.exe.mnf.
 # - Compile Vim with GTK, Perl, Python, Python3, TCL, Ruby, MZscheme, Lua (if
 #   you can make it all work), Cscope and "huge" features.  Exclude workshop
 #   and SNiFF.
@@ -132,36 +129,61 @@ MINOR = 4
 #   flag).
 # - "make amirt", "make amibin".
 #
-# PC:
+# MS-Windows:
 # - Run make on Unix to update the ".mo" files.
-# - "make dossrc" and "make dosrt".  Unpack the archives on a PC.
-# Win32 console version:
-# - Set environment for Visual C++ 2008, e.g.: "msvc2008.bat"  Or:
-#   "C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Visual Studio 9.0\VC\bin\vcvars32.bat".
+# - Get libintl-8.dll and libiconv-2.dll. E.g. from
+#   https://mlocati.github.io/gettext-iconv-windows/ .
+#   Put them in the top directory, "make dosrt" uses them.
+# - > make dossrc
+#   > make dosrt
+#   Unpack dist/vim##rt.zip and dist/vim##src.zip on an MS-Windows PC.
+# Win32 console version build:
+# - Set environment for Visual C++ 2008, e.g.:
+#   > src/msvc2008.bat
+#   Or: 
+#   > C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Visual Studio 9.0\VC\bin\vcvars32.bat
 #   Or, when using the Visual C++ Toolkit 2003: "msvcsetup.bat" (adjust the
 #   paths when necessary).
 #   For Windows 98/ME the 2003 version is required, but then the executable
 #   won't work on Windows 7 and 64 bit systems.
-# - "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak"  (use the same path as for vcvars32.bat)
-# - "rm testdir/*.out", "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak test" and check the output.
+# - > cd src
+#   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak
+# - Run the tests:
+#   > rm testdir/*.out testdir/*.res
+#   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak test
+#   - check the output.
 # - Rename vim.exe to vimw32.exe, xxd/xxd.exe to xxdw32.exe.
 # - Rename vim.pdb to vimw32.pdb.
 # - Rename install.exe to installw32.exe and uninstal.exe to uninstalw32.exe.
-# Win32 GUI version:
-# - "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak GUI=yes"
+# Win32 GUI version build:
+# - > cd src
+#   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak GUI=yes
+# - Run the tests:
+#   > rm testdir/*.out testdir/*.res
+#   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak testgvim
+#   - check the output.
 # - move "gvim.exe" to here (otherwise the OLE version will overwrite it).
 # - Move gvim.pdb to here.
-# - Delete vimrun.exe, install.exe and uninstal.exe.
 # - Copy "GvimExt/gvimext.dll" to here.
+# - Delete vimrun.exe, install.exe and uninstal.exe.
 # Win32 GUI version with OLE, PERL, TCL, PYTHON and dynamic IME:
-# - Run src/bigvim.bat ("nmake -f Make_mvc.mak GUI=yes OLE=yes IME=yes ...)
+# - Install the interfaces you want, see src/INSTALLpc.txt
+# - Build:
+#   > cd src
+#   Adjust bigvim.bat to match the version of each interface you want.
+#   > bigvim.bat
+# - Run the tests:
+#   > rm testdir/*.out testdir/*.res
+#   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak testgvim
+#   - check the output.
 # - Rename "gvim.exe" to "gvim_ole.exe".
 # - Rename gvim.pdb to "gvim_ole.pdb".
 # - Delete install.exe and uninstal.exe.
 # Create the archives:
 # - Copy all the "*.exe" files to where this Makefile is.
 # - Copy all the "*.pdb" files to where this Makefile is.
-# - "make dosbin".
+# - in this directory:
+#   > make dosbin
 # NSIS self installing exe:
 # - To get NSIS see http://nsis.sourceforge.net
 # - Make sure gvim_ole.exe, vimw32.exe, installw32.exe,
@@ -173,17 +195,23 @@ MINOR = 4
 #   Note: VisVim needs to be build with MSVC 5, newer versions don't work.
 #   gvimext64.dll can be obtained from http://code.google.com/p/vim-win3264/
 #	It is part of vim72.zip as vim72/gvimext.dll.
-# - make sure there is a diff.exe two levels up
-# - go to ../nsis and do "makensis gvim.nsi" (takes a few minutes).
+# - Make sure there is a diff.exe two levels up (get it from a previous Vim
+#   version).
+# - go to ../nsis and do:
+#   > makensis gvim.nsi  (takes a few minutes).
 # - Copy gvim##.exe to the dist directory.
 #
 # 64 bit builds (these are not in the normal distribution, the 32 bit build
 # works just fine on 64 bit systems).
 # Like the console and GUI version, but first run vcvars64.bat or
 #   "..\VC\vcvarsall.bat x86_amd64".
-# - "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak"
-# - "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak GUI=yes"
-# Or run src/bigvim64.bat for an OLE version.
+# - Build the console version:
+#   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak
+# - Build the GUI version:
+#   > nmake -f Make_mvc.mak GUI=yes
+# - Build the OLE version with interfaces:
+#   > bigvim64.bat
+#
 #
 # OBSOLETE systems: You can build this if you have an appropriate system.
 #
@@ -204,7 +232,7 @@ MINOR = 4
 # - Rename the executables to "vimd32.exe", "xxdd32.exe", "installd32.exe" and
 #   "uninstald32.exe".
 #
-# Win32s GUI version: (requires very old compiler)
+# Win32s GUI version: (requires a very old compiler)
 # - Set environment for Visual C++ 4.1 (requires a new console window):
 #   "vcvars32.bat" (use the path for VC 4.1 e:\msdev\bin)
 # - "nmake -f Make_mvc.mak GUI=yes INTL=no clean" (use the path for VC 4.1)
@@ -257,7 +285,6 @@ COMMENT_GVIM = comment/$(VERSION)-bin-gvim
 COMMENT_OLE = comment/$(VERSION)-bin-ole
 COMMENT_W32S = comment/$(VERSION)-bin-w32s
 COMMENT_SRC = comment/$(VERSION)-src
-COMMENT_OS2 = comment/$(VERSION)-bin-os2
 COMMENT_HTML = comment/$(VERSION)-html
 COMMENT_FARSI = comment/$(VERSION)-farsi
 
@@ -285,9 +312,6 @@ dist/$(COMMENT_W32S): dist/comment
 dist/$(COMMENT_SRC): dist/comment
 	echo "Vim - Vi IMproved - v$(VDOT) sources for MS-DOS and MS-Windows" > dist/$(COMMENT_SRC)
 
-dist/$(COMMENT_OS2): dist/comment
-	echo "Vim - Vi IMproved - v$(VDOT) binaries + runtime files for OS/2" > dist/$(COMMENT_OS2)
-
 dist/$(COMMENT_HTML): dist/comment
 	echo "Vim - Vi IMproved - v$(VDOT) documentation in HTML" > dist/$(COMMENT_HTML)
 
@@ -396,7 +420,9 @@ no_title.vim: Makefile
 	echo "set notitle noicon nocp nomodeline viminfo=" >no_title.vim
 
 # MS-DOS sources
-dossrc: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_SRC) runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt
+dossrc: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_SRC) \
+	runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt \
+	nsis/gvim_version.nsh
 	-rm -rf dist/vim$(VERSION)src.zip
 	-rm -rf dist/vim
 	mkdir dist/vim
@@ -407,10 +433,12 @@ dossrc: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_SRC) runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt
 		$(SRC_AMI_DOS) \
 		$(SRC_DOS_UNIX) \
 		runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt \
+		nsis/gvim_version.nsh \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
 	mv dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime/* dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
 	rmdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/runtime
-	find dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR) -type f -exec $(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" {} \;
+	# This file needs to be in dos fileformat for NSIS.
+	$(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/doc/uganda.nsis.txt
 	tar cf - \
 		$(SRC_DOS_BIN) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
@@ -419,12 +447,21 @@ dossrc: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_SRC) runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt
 runtime/doc/uganda.nsis.txt: runtime/doc/uganda.txt
 	cd runtime/doc && $(MAKE) uganda.nsis.txt
 
-dosrt: dist dist/$(COMMENT_RT) dosrt_unix2dos
+nsis/gvim_version.nsh: Makefile
+	echo "# Generated from Makefile: define the version numbers" > $@
+	echo "!ifndef __GVIM_VER__NSH__"  >> $@
+	echo "!define __GVIM_VER__NSH__"  >> $@
+	echo "!define VER_MAJOR $(MAJOR)" >> $@
+	echo "!define VER_MINOR $(MINOR)" >> $@
+	echo "!endif" >> $@
+
+dosrt: dist dist/$(COMMENT_RT) dosrt_files
 	-rm -rf dist/vim$(VERSION)rt.zip
 	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z vim$(VERSION)rt.zip vim <$(COMMENT_RT)
 
 # Split in two parts to avoid an "argument list too long" error.
-dosrt_unix2dos: dist prepare no_title.vim
+# We no longer convert the files from unix to dos fileformat.
+dosrt_files: dist prepare no_title.vim
 	-rm -rf dist/vim
 	mkdir dist/vim
 	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
@@ -440,7 +477,6 @@ dosrt_unix2dos: dist prepare no_title.vim
 		$(RT_AMI_DOS) \
 		$(LANG_GEN) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
-	find dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR) -type f -exec $(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" {} \;
 	tar cf - \
 		$(RT_UNIX_DOS_BIN) \
 		$(RT_ALL_BIN) \
@@ -460,12 +496,12 @@ dosrt_unix2dos: dist prepare no_title.vim
 		cp $$i dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/lang/$$n/LC_MESSAGES/vim.mo; \
 	      fi \
 	    done
-	cp libintl.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/
+	cp libintl-8.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/
+	cp libiconv-2.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/
 
 
-# Convert runtime files from Unix fileformat to dos fileformat.
 # Used before uploading.  Don't delete the AAPDIR/sign files!
-runtime_unix2dos: dosrt_unix2dos
+runtime_unix2dos: dosrt_files
 	-rm -rf `find runtime/dos -type f -print | sed -e /AAPDIR/d`
 	cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar cf - * \
 		| (cd ../../../runtime/dos; tar xf -)
@@ -481,7 +517,6 @@ dosbin_gvim: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_GVIM)
 	tar cf - \
 		$(BIN_DOS) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
-	find dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR) -type f -exec $(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" {} \;
 	cp gvim.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gvim.exe
 	cp xxdw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/xxd.exe
 	cp vimrun.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vimrun.exe
@@ -500,7 +535,6 @@ dosbin_w32: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_W32)
 	tar cf - \
 		$(BIN_DOS) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
-	find dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR) -type f -exec $(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" {} \;
 	cp vimw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vim.exe
 	cp xxdw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/xxd.exe
 	cp installw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/install.exe
@@ -517,7 +551,6 @@ dosbin_d32: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_D32)
 	tar cf - \
 		$(BIN_DOS) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
-	find dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR) -type f -exec $(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" {} \;
 	cp vimd32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vim.exe
 	cp xxdd32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/xxd.exe
 	cp installd32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/install.exe
@@ -534,7 +567,6 @@ dosbin_d16: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_D16)
 	tar cf - \
 		$(BIN_DOS) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
-	find dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR) -type f -exec $(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" {} \;
 	cp vimd16.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vim.exe
 	cp xxdd16.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/xxd.exe
 	cp installd16.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/install.exe
@@ -550,7 +582,6 @@ dosbin_ole: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_OLE)
 	tar cf - \
 		$(BIN_DOS) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
-	find dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR) -type f -exec $(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" {} \;
 	cp gvim_ole.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gvim.exe
 	cp xxdw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/xxd.exe
 	cp vimrun.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vimrun.exe
@@ -572,7 +603,6 @@ dosbin_s: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_W32S)
 	tar cf - \
 		$(BIN_DOS) \
 		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
-	find dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR) -type f -exec $(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" {} \;
 	cp gvim_w32s.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/gvim.exe
 	cp xxdd32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/xxd.exe
 	cp README_w32s.txt dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
@@ -580,21 +610,6 @@ dosbin_s: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_W32S)
 	cp uninstalw32.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/uninstal.exe
 	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z gvim$(VERSION)_s.zip vim <$(COMMENT_W32S)
 
-os2bin: dist no_title.vim dist/$(COMMENT_OS2)
-	-rm -rf dist/vim$(VERSION)os2.zip
-	-rm -rf dist/vim
-	mkdir dist/vim
-	mkdir dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
-	tar cf - \
-		$(BIN_OS2) \
-		| (cd dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR); tar xf -)
-	find dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR) -type f -exec $(VIM) -e -X -u no_title.vim -c ":set tx|wq" {} \;
-	cp vimos2.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/vim.exe
-	cp xxdos2.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/xxd.exe
-	cp teeos2.exe dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)/tee.exe
-	cp emx.dll emxlibcs.dll dist/vim/$(VIMRTDIR)
-	cd dist && zip -9 -rD -z vim$(VERSION)os2.zip vim <$(COMMENT_OS2)
-
 html: dist dist/$(COMMENT_HTML)
 	-rm -rf dist/vim$(VERSION)html.zip
 	cd runtime/doc && zip -9 -z ../../dist/vim$(VERSION)html.zip *.html <../../dist/$(COMMENT_HTML)

README.md

@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+`README.md` for version 7.4 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
+[![Build Status](https://travis-ci.org/vim/vim.svg?branch=master)](https://travis-ci.org/vim/vim)
+[![Coverage Status](https://coveralls.io/repos/vim/vim/badge.svg?branch=master&service=github)](https://coveralls.io/github/vim/vim?branch=master)
+[![Appveyor Build status](https://ci.appveyor.com/api/projects/status/o2qht2kjm02sgghk?svg=true)](https://ci.appveyor.com/project/chrisbra/vim)
+
+
+## What is Vim? ##
+
+Vim is an almost compatible version of the UNIX editor Vi.  Many new features
+have been added: multi-level undo, syntax highlighting, command line history,
+on-line help, spell checking, filename completion, block operations, etc.
+There is also a Graphical User Interface (GUI) available.  See
+`runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt` for differences with Vi.
+
+This editor is very useful for editing programs and other plain text files.
+All commands are given with normal keyboard characters, so those who can type
+with ten fingers can work very fast.  Additionally, function keys can be
+defined by the user, and the mouse can be used.
+
+Vim runs under MS-DOS, MS-Windows (NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10), Macintosh,
+VMS and almost all flavours of UNIX.  Porting to other systems should not be
+very difficult.  Older versions of Vim run on MS-Windows 95/98/Me, Amiga DOS,
+Atari MiNT, BeOS, RISC OS and OS/2.  These are no longer maintained.
+
+
+## Distribution ##
+
+You can often use your favorite package manager to install Vim.  On Mac and
+Linux a small version of Vim is pre-installed, you still need to install Vim
+if you want more features.
+
+There are separate distributions for Unix, PC, Amiga and some other systems.
+This `README.md` file comes with the runtime archive.  It includes the
+documentation, syntax files and other files that are used at runtime.  To run
+Vim you must get either one of the binary archives or a source archive.
+Which one you need depends on the system you want to run it on and whether you
+want or must compile it yourself.  Check http://www.vim.org/download.php for
+an overview of currently available distributions.
+
+
+## Documentation ##
+
+The vim tutor is a one hour training course for beginners.  Mostly it can be
+started as `vimtutor`.  See `:help tutor` for more information.
+
+The best is to use `:help` in Vim.  If you don't have an executable yet, read
+`runtime/doc/help.txt`.  It contains pointers to the other documentation
+files.  The User Manual reads like a book and is recommended to learn to use
+Vim.  See `:help user-manual`.
+
+
+## Copying ##
+
+Vim is Charityware.  You can use and copy it as much as you like, but you are
+encouraged to make a donation to help orphans in Uganda.  Please read the file
+`runtime/doc/uganda.txt` for details (do `:help uganda` inside Vim).
+
+Summary of the license: There are no restrictions on using or distributing an
+unmodified copy of Vim.  Parts of Vim may also be distributed, but the license
+text must always be included.  For modified versions a few restrictions apply.
+The license is GPL compatible, you may compile Vim with GPL libraries and
+distribute it.
+
+
+## Sponsoring ##
+
+Fixing bugs and adding new features takes a lot of time and effort.  To show
+your appreciation for the work and motivate Bram and others to continue
+working on Vim please send a donation.
+
+Since Bram is back to a paid job the money will now be used to help children
+in Uganda.  See `runtime/doc/uganda.txt`.  But at the same time donations
+increase Bram's motivation to keep working on Vim!
+
+For the most recent information about sponsoring look on the Vim web site:
+	http://www.vim.org/sponsor/
+
+
+## Compiling ##
+
+If you obtained a binary distribution you don't need to compile Vim.  If you
+obtained a source distribution, all the stuff for compiling Vim is in the
+`src` directory.  See `src/INSTALL` for instructions.
+
+
+## Installation ##
+
+See one of these files for system-specific instructions:
+
+	README_ami.txt		Amiga
+	README_unix.txt		Unix
+	README_dos.txt		MS-DOS and MS-Windows
+	README_mac.txt		Macintosh
+	README_vms.txt		VMS
+
+There are more `README_*.txt` files, depending on the distribution you used.
+
+
+## Contributing ##
+
+If you would like to help making Vim better, see the [CONTRIBUTING.md](https://github.com/vim/vim/blob/master/CONTRIBUTING.md) file.
+
+
+## Information ##
+
+The latest news about Vim can be found on the Vim home page:
+	http://www.vim.org/
+
+If you have problems, have a look at the Vim documentation or tips:
+	http://www.vim.org/docs.php
+	http://vim.wikia.com/wiki/Vim_Tips_Wiki
+
+If you still have problems or any other questions, use one of the mailing
+lists to discuss them with Vim users and developers:
+	http://www.vim.org/maillist.php
+
+If nothing else works, report bugs directly:
+	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
+
+
+## Main author ##
+
+Send any other comments, patches, flowers and suggestions to:
+	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>

README.txt

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 README.txt for version 7.4 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
 
-WHAT IS VIM
+WHAT IS VIM?
 
 Vim is an almost compatible version of the UNIX editor Vi.  Many new features
 have been added: multi-level undo, syntax highlighting, command line history,
@@ -14,13 +14,18 @@ All commands are given with normal keyboard characters, so those who can type
 with ten fingers can work very fast.  Additionally, function keys can be
 defined by the user, and the mouse can be used.
 
-Vim runs under Amiga DOS, MS-DOS, MS-Windows (95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, Vista,
-7), Atari MiNT, Macintosh, BeOS, VMS, RISC OS, OS/2 and almost all flavours of
-UNIX.  Porting to other systems should not be very difficult.
+Vim runs under MS-DOS, MS-Windows (NT, 2000, XP, Vista, 7, 8, 10), Macintosh,
+VMS and almost all flavours of UNIX.  Porting to other systems should not be
+very difficult.  Older versions of Vim run on MS-Windows 95/98/Me, Amiga DOS,
+Atari MiNT, BeOS, RISC OS and OS/2.  These are no longer maintained.
 
 
 DISTRIBUTION
 
+You can often use your favorite package manager to install Vim.  On Mac and
+Linux a small version of Vim is pre-installed, you still need to install Vim
+if you want more features.
+
 There are separate distributions for Unix, PC, Amiga and some other systems.
 This README.txt file comes with the runtime archive.  It includes the
 documentation, syntax files and other files that are used at runtime.  To run
@@ -82,7 +87,6 @@ See one of these files for system-specific instructions:
 README_ami.txt		Amiga
 README_unix.txt		Unix
 README_dos.txt		MS-DOS and MS-Windows
-README_os2.txt		OS/2
 README_mac.txt		Macintosh
 README_vms.txt		VMS
 
@@ -94,8 +98,9 @@ INFORMATION
 The latest news about Vim can be found on the Vim home page:
 	http://www.vim.org/
 
-If you have problems, have a look at the Vim FAQ:
-	http://vimdoc.sf.net/vimfaq.html
+If you have problems, have a look at the Vim documentation or tips:
+	http://www.vim.org/docs.php
+	http://vim.wikia.com/wiki/Vim_Tips_Wiki
 
 If you still have problems or any other questions, use one of the mailing
 lists to discuss them with Vim users and developers:
@@ -110,6 +115,3 @@ MAIN AUTHOR
 Send any other comments, patches, flowers and suggestions to:
 
 	Bram Moolenaar		E-mail:	Bram@vim.org
-	Finsterruetihof 1
-	8134 Adliswil
-	Switzerland

README_os2.txt

@@ -1,58 +1,5 @@
 README_os2.txt for version 7.4 of Vim: Vi IMproved.
 
-This file explains the installation of Vim on OS/2 systems.
+This file used to explain the installation of Vim on OS/2 systems.
+However, support for OS/2 has been removed in patch 7.4.1008.
 See "README.txt" for general information about Vim.
-
-
-NOTE: You will need two archives:
-  vim74rt.zip	contains the runtime files (same as for the PC version)
-  vim74os2.zip	contains the OS/2 executables
-
-1. Go to the directory where you want to put the Vim files.  Examples:
-	cd C:\
-	cd D:\editors
-
-2. Unpack the zip archives.  This will create a new directory "vim/vim74",
-   in which all the distributed Vim files are placed.  Since the directory
-   name includes the version number, it is unlikely that you overwrite
-   existing files.
-   Examples:
-	pkunzip -d vim74os2.zip
-	unzip vim74os2.zip
-
-   After you unpacked the files, you can still move the whole directory tree
-   to another location.
-
-3. Add the directory where vim.exe is to your path.  The simplest is to add a
-   line to your autoexec.bat.  Examples:
-	set path=%path%;C:\vim\vim74
-	set path=%path%;D:\editors\vim\vim74
-
-That's it!
-
-
-Extra remarks:
-
-- To avoid confusion between distributed files of different versions and your
-  own modified vim scripts, it is recommended to use this directory layout:
-  ("C:\vim" is used here as the root, replace with the path you use)
-  Your own files:
-	C:\vim\_vimrc			Your personal vimrc.
-	C:\vim\_viminfo			Dynamic info for 'viminfo'.
-	C:\vim\...			Other files you made.
-  Distributed files:
-	C:\vim\vim74\vim.exe		The Vim version 7.4 executable.
-	C:\vim\vim74\doc\*.txt		The version 7.4 documentation files.
-	C:\vim\vim74\bugreport.vim	A Vim version 7.4 script.
-	C:\vim\vim74\...		Other version 7.4 distributed files.
-  In this case the $VIM environment variable would be set like this:
-	set VIM=C:\vim
-
-- You can put your Vim executable anywhere else.  If the executable is not
-  with the other distributed Vim files, you should set $VIM.  The simplest is
-  to add a line to your autoexec.bat.  Examples:
-	set VIM=c:\vim
-	set VIM=d:\editors\vim
-
-For further information, type this inside Vim:
-	:help os2

appveyor.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+version: "{build}"
+
+skip_tags: true
+
+before_build:
+  - '"C:\Program Files\Microsoft SDKs\Windows\v7.1\Bin\SetEnv.cmd" /x64 /release'
+  # Work around for Python 2.7.11's bug
+  - reg copy HKLM\SOFTWARE\Python\PythonCore\2.7 HKLM\SOFTWARE\Python\PythonCore\2.7-32 /s /reg:32
+  - reg copy HKLM\SOFTWARE\Python\PythonCore\2.7 HKLM\SOFTWARE\Python\PythonCore\2.7-32 /s /reg:64
+
+build_script:
+  - cd src
+  - sed -e "s/\$(LINKARGS2)/\$(LINKARGS2) | sed -e 's#.*\\\\r.*##'/" Make_mvc.mak > Make_mvc2.mak
+  - nmake -f Make_mvc2.mak CPU=AMD64 GUI=yes IME=yes MBYTE=yes ICONV=yes DEBUG=no PYTHON_VER=27 DYNAMIC_PYTHON=yes PYTHON=C:\Python27-x64 PYTHON3_VER=34 DYNAMIC_PYTHON3=yes PYTHON3=C:\Python34-x64
+  - .\gvim -u NONE -c "redir @a | ver | 0put a | wq!" ver.txt
+  - type ver.txt
+
+test_script:
+  - cd testdir
+  - nmake -f Make_dos.mak VIMPROG=..\gvim

nsis/gvim.nsi

@@ -6,13 +6,19 @@
 # because uninstall deletes most files in $0.
 
 # Location of gvim_ole.exe, vimw32.exe, GvimExt/*, etc.
-!define VIMSRC "..\src"
+!ifndef VIMSRC
+  !define VIMSRC "..\src"
+!endif
 
 # Location of runtime files
-!define VIMRT ".."
+!ifndef VIMRT
+  !define VIMRT ".."
+!endif
 
 # Location of extra tools: diff.exe
-!define VIMTOOLS ..\..
+!ifndef VIMTOOLS
+  !define VIMTOOLS ..\..
+!endif
 
 # Comment the next line if you don't have UPX.
 # Get it at http://upx.sourceforge.net
@@ -21,8 +27,7 @@
 # comment the next line if you do not want to add Native Language Support
 !define HAVE_NLS
 
-!define VER_MAJOR 7
-!define VER_MINOR 4
+!include gvim_version.nsh	# for version number
 
 # ----------- No configurable settings below this line -----------
 
@@ -33,9 +38,10 @@
 Name "Vim ${VER_MAJOR}.${VER_MINOR}"
 OutFile gvim${VER_MAJOR}${VER_MINOR}.exe
 CRCCheck force
-SetCompressor lzma
+SetCompressor /SOLID lzma
 SetDatablockOptimize on
 RequestExecutionLevel highest
+XPStyle on
 
 ComponentText "This will install Vim ${VER_MAJOR}.${VER_MINOR} on your computer."
 DirText "Choose a directory to install Vim (should contain 'vim')"
@@ -56,9 +62,6 @@ LicenseData ${VIMRT}\doc\uganda.nsis.txt
   !packhdr temp.dat "upx --best --compress-icons=1 temp.dat"
 !endif
 
-SetCompressor /SOLID lzma
-XPStyle on
-
 # This adds '\vim' to the user choice automagically.  The actual value is
 # obtained below with ReadINIStr.
 InstallDir "$PROGRAMFILES\Vim"
@@ -356,7 +359,9 @@ SectionEnd
 		File ${VIMRT}\keymap\README.txt
 		File ${VIMRT}\keymap\*.vim
 		SetOutPath $0
-		File ${VIMRT}\libintl.dll
+		File ${VIMRT}\libintl-8.dll
+		File ${VIMRT}\libiconv-2.dll
+		File /nonfatal ${VIMRT}\libwinpthread-1.dll
 	SectionEnd
 !endif
 

nsis/gvim_version.nsh

@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+# Generated from Makefile: define the version numbers
+!ifndef __GVIM_VER__NSH__
+!define __GVIM_VER__NSH__
+!define VER_MAJOR 7
+!define VER_MINOR 4
+!endif

runtime/autoload/phpcomplete.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Maintainer:	Dávid Szabó ( complex857 AT gmail DOT com )
 " Previous Maintainer:	Mikolaj Machowski ( mikmach AT wp DOT pl )
 " URL: https://github.com/shawncplus/phpcomplete.vim
-" Last Change:  2015 Feb 28
+" Last Change:  2015 Jul 13
 "
 "	OPTIONS:
 "
@@ -141,71 +141,80 @@ function! phpcomplete#CompletePHP(findstart, base) " {{{
 		if a:base != ""
 			let context = substitute(context, '\s*[$a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff]*$', '', '')
 		end
+	else
+		let context = ''
 	end
 
-	let [current_namespace, imports] = phpcomplete#GetCurrentNameSpace(getline(0, line('.')))
+	try
+		let winheight = winheight(0)
+		let winnr = winnr()
 
-	if context =~? '^use\s' || context ==? 'use'
-		return phpcomplete#CompleteUse(a:base)
-	endif
+		let [current_namespace, imports] = phpcomplete#GetCurrentNameSpace(getline(0, line('.')))
 
-	if context =~ '\(->\|::\)$'
-		" {{{
-		" Get name of the class
-		let classname = phpcomplete#GetClassName(line('.'), context, current_namespace, imports)
+		if context =~? '^use\s' || context ==? 'use'
+			return phpcomplete#CompleteUse(a:base)
+		endif
 
-		" Get location of class definition, we have to iterate through all
-		if classname != ''
-			if classname =~ '\'
-				" split the last \ segment as a classname, everything else is the namespace
-				let classname_parts = split(classname, '\')
-				let namespace = join(classname_parts[0:-2], '\')
-				let classname = classname_parts[-1]
+		if context =~ '\(->\|::\)$'
+			" {{{
+			" Get name of the class
+			let classname = phpcomplete#GetClassName(line('.'), context, current_namespace, imports)
+
+			" Get location of class definition, we have to iterate through all
+			if classname != ''
+				if classname =~ '\'
+					" split the last \ segment as a classname, everything else is the namespace
+					let classname_parts = split(classname, '\')
+					let namespace = join(classname_parts[0:-2], '\')
+					let classname = classname_parts[-1]
+				else
+					let namespace = '\'
+				endif
+				let classlocation = phpcomplete#GetClassLocation(classname, namespace)
 			else
-				let namespace = '\'
+				let classlocation = ''
 			endif
-			let classlocation = phpcomplete#GetClassLocation(classname, namespace)
+
+			if classlocation != ''
+				if classlocation == 'VIMPHP_BUILTINOBJECT' && has_key(g:php_builtin_classes, tolower(classname))
+					return phpcomplete#CompleteBuiltInClass(context, classname, a:base)
+				endif
+
+				if filereadable(classlocation)
+					let classfile = readfile(classlocation)
+					let classcontent = ''
+					let classcontent .= "\n".phpcomplete#GetClassContents(classlocation, classname)
+					let sccontent = split(classcontent, "\n")
+					let visibility = expand('%:p') == fnamemodify(classlocation, ':p') ? 'private' : 'public'
+
+					return phpcomplete#CompleteUserClass(context, a:base, sccontent, visibility)
+				endif
+			endif
+
+			return phpcomplete#CompleteUnknownClass(a:base, context)
+			" }}}
+		elseif context =~? 'implements'
+			return phpcomplete#CompleteClassName(a:base, ['i'], current_namespace, imports)
+		elseif context =~? 'extends\s\+.\+$' && a:base == ''
+			return ['implements']
+		elseif context =~? 'extends'
+			let kinds = context =~? 'class\s' ? ['c'] : ['i']
+			return phpcomplete#CompleteClassName(a:base, kinds, current_namespace, imports)
+		elseif context =~? 'class [a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff\\][a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff\\]*'
+			" special case when you've typed the class keyword and the name too, only extends and implements allowed there
+			return filter(['extends', 'implements'], 'stridx(v:val, a:base) == 0')
+		elseif context =~? 'new'
+			return phpcomplete#CompleteClassName(a:base, ['c'], current_namespace, imports)
+		endif
+
+		if a:base =~ '^\$'
+			return phpcomplete#CompleteVariable(a:base)
 		else
-			let classlocation = ''
+			return phpcomplete#CompleteGeneral(a:base, current_namespace, imports)
 		endif
-
-		if classlocation != ''
-			if classlocation == 'VIMPHP_BUILTINOBJECT' && has_key(g:php_builtin_classes, tolower(classname))
-				return phpcomplete#CompleteBuiltInClass(context, classname, a:base)
-			endif
-
-			if filereadable(classlocation)
-				let classfile = readfile(classlocation)
-				let classcontent = ''
-				let classcontent .= "\n".phpcomplete#GetClassContents(classlocation, classname)
-				let sccontent = split(classcontent, "\n")
-				let visibility = expand('%:p') == fnamemodify(classlocation, ':p') ? 'private' : 'public'
-
-				return phpcomplete#CompleteUserClass(context, a:base, sccontent, visibility)
-			endif
-		endif
-
-		return phpcomplete#CompleteUnknownClass(a:base, context)
-		" }}}
-	elseif context =~? 'implements'
-		return phpcomplete#CompleteClassName(a:base, ['i'], current_namespace, imports)
-	elseif context =~? 'extends\s\+.\+$' && a:base == ''
-		return ['implements']
-	elseif context =~? 'extends'
-		let kinds = context =~? 'class\s' ? ['c'] : ['i']
-		return phpcomplete#CompleteClassName(a:base, kinds, current_namespace, imports)
-	elseif context =~? 'class [a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff\\][a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff\\]*'
-		" special case when you've typed the class keyword and the name too, only extends and implements allowed there
-		return filter(['extends', 'implements'], 'stridx(v:val, a:base) == 0')
-	elseif context =~? 'new'
-		return phpcomplete#CompleteClassName(a:base, ['c'], current_namespace, imports)
-	endif
-
-	if a:base =~ '^\$'
-		return phpcomplete#CompleteVariable(a:base)
-	else
-		return phpcomplete#CompleteGeneral(a:base, current_namespace, imports)
-	endif
+	finally
+		silent! exec winnr.'resize '.winheight
+	endtry
 endfunction
 " }}}
 
@@ -309,7 +318,7 @@ function! phpcomplete#CompleteGeneral(base, current_namespace, imports) " {{{
 					\ '^&\?\zs[a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff][a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff]*\ze')
 		if f_name =~? '^'.substitute(a:base, '\\', '\\\\', 'g')
 			let f_args = matchstr(i,
-						\ '^&\?[a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff][a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff]*\s*(\zs.\{-}\ze)\_s*\({\|$\)')
+						\ '^&\?[a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff][a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff]*\s*(\zs.\{-}\ze)\_s*\(;\|{\|$\)')
 			let int_functions[f_name.'('] = f_args.')'
 		endif
 	endfor
@@ -637,7 +646,7 @@ function! phpcomplete#CompleteUnknownClass(base, context) " {{{
 		let f_name = matchstr(i,
 				\ '^&\?\zs[a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff][a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff]*\ze')
 		let f_args = matchstr(i,
-				\ '^&\?[a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff][a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff]*\s*(\zs.\{-}\ze)\_s*\({\|$\)')
+				\ '^&\?[a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff][a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff]*\s*(\zs.\{-}\ze)\_s*\(;\|{\|$\)')
 
 		let int_functions[f_name.'('] = f_args.')'
 	endfor
@@ -972,7 +981,7 @@ function! phpcomplete#CompleteUserClass(context, base, sccontent, visibility) "
 		let f_name = matchstr(i,
 					\ 'function\s*&\?\zs[a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff][a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff]*\ze')
 		let f_args = matchstr(i,
-					\ 'function\s*&\?[a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff][a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff]*\s*(\zs.\{-}\ze)\_s*\({\|\_$\)')
+					\ 'function\s*&\?[a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff][a-zA-Z_0-9\x7f-\xff]*\s*(\zs.\{-}\ze)\_s*\(;\|{\|\_$\)')
 		if f_name != '' && stridx(f_name, '__') != 0
 			let c_functions[f_name.'('] = f_args
 			if g:phpcomplete_parse_docblock_comments
@@ -1370,8 +1379,8 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetCallChainReturnType(classname_candidate, class_candidat
 			" Get Structured information of all classes and subclasses including namespace and includes
 			" try to find the method's return type in docblock comment
 			for classstructure in classcontents
-				let doclock_target_pattern = 'function\s\+&\?'.method.'\|\(public\|private\|protected\|var\).\+\$'.method
-				let doc_str = phpcomplete#GetDocBlock(split(classstructure.content, '\n'), doclock_target_pattern)
+				let docblock_target_pattern = 'function\s\+&\?'.method.'\|\(public\|private\|protected\|var\).\+\$'.method
+				let doc_str = phpcomplete#GetDocBlock(split(classstructure.content, '\n'), docblock_target_pattern)
 				if doc_str != ''
 					break
 				endif
@@ -1523,21 +1532,19 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassName(start_line, context, current_namespace, impor
 				return ''
 			endif
 
-			if line =~? '\v^\s*(abstract\s+|final\s+)*\s*class'
-				let class_name = matchstr(line, '\c\s*class\s*\zs'.class_name_pattern.'\ze')
+			if line =~? '\v^\s*(abstract\s+|final\s+)*\s*class\s'
+				let class_name = matchstr(line, '\cclass\s\+\zs'.class_name_pattern.'\ze')
 				let extended_class = matchstr(line, '\cclass\s\+'.class_name_pattern.'\s\+extends\s\+\zs'.class_name_pattern.'\ze')
 
 				let classname_candidate = a:context =~? 'parent::' ? extended_class : class_name
-			else
-				let i += 1
-				continue
+				if classname_candidate != ''
+					let [classname_candidate, class_candidate_namespace] = phpcomplete#GetCallChainReturnType(classname_candidate, class_candidate_namespace, class_candidate_imports, methodstack)
+					" return absolute classname, without leading \
+					return (class_candidate_namespace == '\' || class_candidate_namespace == '') ? classname_candidate : class_candidate_namespace.'\'.classname_candidate
+				endif
 			endif
 
-			if classname_candidate != ''
-				let [classname_candidate, class_candidate_namespace] = phpcomplete#GetCallChainReturnType(classname_candidate, class_candidate_namespace, class_candidate_imports, methodstack)
-				" return absolute classname, without leading \
-				return (class_candidate_namespace == '\' || class_candidate_namespace == '') ? classname_candidate : class_candidate_namespace.'\'.classname_candidate
-			endif
+			let i += 1
 		endwhile
 	elseif a:context =~? '(\s*new\s\+'.class_name_pattern.'\s*)->'
 		let classname_candidate = matchstr(a:context, '\cnew\s\+\zs'.class_name_pattern.'\ze')
@@ -1652,7 +1659,7 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassName(start_line, context, current_namespace, impor
 
 			" function declaration line
 			if line =~? 'function\(\s\+'.function_name_pattern.'\)\?\s*('
-				let function_lines = join(reverse(lines), " ")
+				let function_lines = join(reverse(copy(lines)), " ")
 				" search for type hinted arguments
 				if function_lines =~? 'function\(\s\+'.function_name_pattern.'\)\?\s*(.\{-}'.class_name_pattern.'\s\+'.object && !object_is_array
 					let f_args = matchstr(function_lines, '\cfunction\(\s\+'.function_name_pattern.'\)\?\s*(\zs.\{-}\ze)')
@@ -1693,10 +1700,12 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassName(start_line, context, current_namespace, impor
 
 				" try to find the next non-comment or string ";" char
 				let start_col = match(line, '^\s*'.object.'\C\s*=\zs&\?\s\+\(clone\)\?\s*'.variable_name_pattern)
-				let filelines = reverse(lines)
-				let [pos, char] = s:getNextCharWithPos(filelines, [a:start_line - i - 1, start_col])
+				let filelines = reverse(copy(lines))
+				let [pos, char] = s:getNextCharWithPos(filelines, [len(filelines) - i, start_col])
 				let chars_read = 1
 				let last_pos = pos
+				" function_boundary == 0 if we are not in a function
+				let real_lines_offset = len(function_boundary) == 1 ? 1 : function_boundary[0][0]
 				" read while end of the file
 				while char != 'EOF' && chars_read < 1000
 					let last_pos = pos
@@ -1704,7 +1713,11 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassName(start_line, context, current_namespace, impor
 					let chars_read += 1
 					" we got a candidate
 					if char == ';'
-						let synIDName = synIDattr(synID(pos[0] + 1, pos[1] + 1, 0), 'name')
+						" pos values is relative to the function's lines,
+						" line 0 need to be offsetted with the line number
+						" where te function was started to get the line number
+						" in real buffer terms
+						let synIDName = synIDattr(synID(real_lines_offset + pos[0], pos[1] + 1, 0), 'name')
 						" it's not a comment or string, end search
 						if synIDName !~? 'comment\|string'
 							break
@@ -1712,7 +1725,7 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassName(start_line, context, current_namespace, impor
 					endif
 				endwhile
 
-				let prev_context = phpcomplete#GetCurrentInstruction(last_pos[0] + 1, last_pos[1], b:phpbegin)
+				let prev_context = phpcomplete#GetCurrentInstruction(real_lines_offset + last_pos[0], last_pos[1], b:phpbegin)
 				if prev_context == ''
 					" cannot get previous context give up
 					return
@@ -1732,13 +1745,14 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassName(start_line, context, current_namespace, impor
 
 			" assignment for the variable in question with a function on the right hand side
 			if line =~# '^\s*'.object.'\s*=&\?\s*'.function_invocation_pattern
-
 				" try to find the next non-comment or string ";" char
 				let start_col = match(line, '\C^\s*'.object.'\s*=\zs&\?\s*'.function_invocation_pattern)
-				let filelines = reverse(lines)
-				let [pos, char] = s:getNextCharWithPos(filelines, [a:start_line - i - 1, start_col])
+				let filelines = reverse(copy(lines))
+				let [pos, char] = s:getNextCharWithPos(filelines, [len(filelines) - i, start_col])
 				let chars_read = 1
 				let last_pos = pos
+				" function_boundary == 0 if we are not in a function
+				let real_lines_offset = len(function_boundary) == 1 ? 1 : function_boundary[0][0]
 				" read while end of the file
 				while char != 'EOF' && chars_read < 1000
 					let last_pos = pos
@@ -1746,7 +1760,11 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassName(start_line, context, current_namespace, impor
 					let chars_read += 1
 					" we got a candidate
 					if char == ';'
-						let synIDName = synIDattr(synID(pos[0] + 1, pos[1] + 1, 0), 'name')
+						" pos values is relative to the function's lines,
+						" line 0 need to be offsetted with the line number
+						" where te function was started to get the line number
+						" in real buffer terms
+						let synIDName = synIDattr(synID(real_lines_offset + pos[0], pos[1] + 1, 0), 'name')
 						" it's not a comment or string, end search
 						if synIDName !~? 'comment\|string'
 							break
@@ -1754,7 +1772,7 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassName(start_line, context, current_namespace, impor
 					endif
 				endwhile
 
-				let prev_context = phpcomplete#GetCurrentInstruction(last_pos[0] + 1, last_pos[1], b:phpbegin)
+				let prev_context = phpcomplete#GetCurrentInstruction(real_lines_offset + last_pos[0], last_pos[1], b:phpbegin)
 				if prev_context == ''
 					" cannot get previous context give up
 					return
@@ -1857,6 +1875,9 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassLocation(classname, namespace) " {{{
 	if has_key(g:php_builtin_classes, tolower(a:classname)) && (a:namespace == '' || a:namespace == '\')
 		return 'VIMPHP_BUILTINOBJECT'
 	endif
+	if has_key(g:php_builtin_interfaces, tolower(a:classname)) && (a:namespace == '' || a:namespace == '\')
+		return 'VIMPHP_BUILTINOBJECT'
+	endif
 
 	if a:namespace == '' || a:namespace == '\'
 		let search_namespace = '\'
@@ -1869,7 +1890,7 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassLocation(classname, namespace) " {{{
 	let i = 1
 	while i < line('.')
 		let line = getline(line('.')-i)
-		if line =~? '^\s*\(abstract\s\+\|final\s\+\)*\s*\(class\|interface\|trait\)\s*'.a:classname.'\(\s\+\|$\)' && tolower(current_namespace) == search_namespace
+		if line =~? '^\s*\(abstract\s\+\|final\s\+\)*\s*\(class\|interface\|trait\)\s*'.a:classname.'\(\s\+\|$\|{\)' && tolower(current_namespace) == search_namespace
 			return expand('%:p')
 		else
 			let i += 1
@@ -2031,7 +2052,7 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassContentsStructure(file_path, file_lines, class_nam
 	" remember the window we started at
 	let phpcomplete_original_window = winnr()
 
-	silent! tab 1new
+	silent! below 1new
 	silent! 0put =cfile
 	call search('\c\(class\|interface\|trait\)\_s\+'.a:class_name.'\(\>\|$\)')
 	let cfline = line('.')
@@ -2041,9 +2062,18 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassContentsStructure(file_path, file_lines, class_nam
 	let content = join(getline(cfline, endline), "\n")
 	" Catch extends
 	if content =~? 'extends'
-		let extends_class = matchstr(content, 'class\_s\+'.a:class_name.'\_s\+extends\_s\+\zs'.class_name_pattern.'\ze')
+		let extends_string = matchstr(content, '\(class\|interface\)\_s\+'.a:class_name.'\_.\+extends\_s\+\zs\('.class_name_pattern.'\(,\|\_s\)*\)\+\ze\(extends\|{\)')
+		let extended_classes = map(split(extends_string, '\(,\|\_s\)\+'), 'substitute(v:val, "\\_s\\+", "", "g")')
 	else
-		let extends_class = ''
+		let extended_classes = ''
+	endif
+
+	" Catch implements
+	if content =~? 'implements'
+		let implements_string = matchstr(content, 'class\_s\+'.a:class_name.'\_.\+implements\_s\+\zs\('.class_name_pattern.'\(,\|\_s\)*\)\+\ze')
+		let implemented_interfaces = map(split(implements_string, '\(,\|\_s\)\+'), 'substitute(v:val, "\\_s\\+", "", "g")')
+	else
+		let implemented_interfaces = []
 	endif
 	call searchpair('{', '', '}', 'W')
 	let class_closing_bracket_line = line('.')
@@ -2101,8 +2131,11 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassContentsStructure(file_path, file_lines, class_nam
 				\ })
 
 	let all_extends = used_traits
-	if extends_class != ''
-		call add(all_extends, extends_class)
+	if len(extended_classes) > 0
+		call extend(all_extends, extended_classes)
+	endif
+	if len(implemented_interfaces) > 0
+		call extend(all_extends, implemented_interfaces)
 	endif
 	if len(all_extends) > 0
 		for class in all_extends
@@ -2112,11 +2145,16 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassContentsStructure(file_path, file_lines, class_nam
 			endif
 			let classlocation = phpcomplete#GetClassLocation(class, namespace)
 			if classlocation == "VIMPHP_BUILTINOBJECT"
-				let result += [phpcomplete#GenerateBuiltinClassStub(g:php_builtin_classes[tolower(class)])]
+				if has_key(g:php_builtin_classes, tolower(class))
+					let result += [phpcomplete#GenerateBuiltinClassStub('class', g:php_builtin_classes[tolower(class)])]
+				endif
+				if has_key(g:php_builtin_interfaces, tolower(class))
+					let result += [phpcomplete#GenerateBuiltinClassStub('interface', g:php_builtin_interfaces[tolower(class)])]
+				endif
 			elseif classlocation != '' && filereadable(classlocation)
 				let full_file_path = fnamemodify(classlocation, ':p')
 				let result += phpcomplete#GetClassContentsStructure(full_file_path, readfile(full_file_path), class)
-			elseif tolower(current_namespace) == tolower(namespace)
+			elseif tolower(current_namespace) == tolower(namespace) && match(join(a:file_lines, "\n"), '\c\(class\|interface\|trait\)\_s\+'.class.'\(\>\|$\)') != -1
 				" try to find the declaration in the same file.
 				let result += phpcomplete#GetClassContentsStructure(full_file_path, a:file_lines, class)
 			endif
@@ -2137,43 +2175,53 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetClassContents(classlocation, class_name) " {{{
 endfunction
 " }}}
 
-function! phpcomplete#GenerateBuiltinClassStub(class_info) " {{{
-	let re = 'class '.a:class_info['name']." {"
-	for [name, initializer] in items(a:class_info.constants)
-		let re .= "\n\tconst ".name." = ".initializer.";"
-	endfor
-	for [name, info] in items(a:class_info.properties)
-		let re .= "\n\t// @var $".name." ".info.type
-		let re .= "\n\tpublic $".name.";"
-	endfor
-	for [name, info] in items(a:class_info.static_properties)
-		let re .= "\n\t// @var ".name." ".info.type
-		let re .= "\n\tpublic static ".name." = ".info.initializer.";"
-	endfor
-	for [name, info] in items(a:class_info.methods)
-		if name =~ '^__'
-			continue
-		endif
-		let re .= "\n\t/**"
-		let re .= "\n\t * ".name
-		let re .= "\n\t *"
-		let re .= "\n\t * @return ".info.return_type
-		let re .= "\n\t */"
-		let re .= "\n\tpublic function ".name."(".info.signature."){"
-		let re .= "\n\t}"
-	endfor
-	for [name, info] in items(a:class_info.static_methods)
-		let re .= "\n\t/**"
-		let re .= "\n\t * ".name
-		let re .= "\n\t *"
-		let re .= "\n\t * @return ".info.return_type
-		let re .= "\n\t */"
-		let re .= "\n\tpublic static function ".name."(".info.signature."){"
-		let re .= "\n\t}"
-	endfor
+function! phpcomplete#GenerateBuiltinClassStub(type, class_info) " {{{
+	let re = a:type.' '.a:class_info['name']." {"
+	if has_key(a:class_info, 'constants')
+		for [name, initializer] in items(a:class_info.constants)
+			let re .= "\n\tconst ".name." = ".initializer.";"
+		endfor
+	endif
+	if has_key(a:class_info, 'properties')
+		for [name, info] in items(a:class_info.properties)
+			let re .= "\n\t// @var $".name." ".info.type
+			let re .= "\n\tpublic $".name.";"
+		endfor
+	endif
+	if has_key(a:class_info, 'static_properties')
+		for [name, info] in items(a:class_info.static_properties)
+			let re .= "\n\t// @var ".name." ".info.type
+			let re .= "\n\tpublic static ".name." = ".info.initializer.";"
+		endfor
+	endif
+	if has_key(a:class_info, 'methods')
+		for [name, info] in items(a:class_info.methods)
+			if name =~ '^__'
+				continue
+			endif
+			let re .= "\n\t/**"
+			let re .= "\n\t * ".name
+			let re .= "\n\t *"
+			let re .= "\n\t * @return ".info.return_type
+			let re .= "\n\t */"
+			let re .= "\n\tpublic function ".name."(".info.signature."){"
+			let re .= "\n\t}"
+		endfor
+	endif
+	if has_key(a:class_info, 'static_methods')
+		for [name, info] in items(a:class_info.static_methods)
+			let re .= "\n\t/**"
+			let re .= "\n\t * ".name
+			let re .= "\n\t *"
+			let re .= "\n\t * @return ".info.return_type
+			let re .= "\n\t */"
+			let re .= "\n\tpublic static function ".name."(".info.signature."){"
+			let re .= "\n\t}"
+		endfor
+	endif
 	let re .= "\n}"
 
-	return { 'class': a:class_info['name'],
+	return { a:type : a:class_info['name'],
 				\ 'content': re,
 				\ 'namespace': '',
 				\ 'imports': {},
@@ -2197,8 +2245,11 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetDocBlock(sccontent, search) " {{{
 			" start backward serch for the comment block
 			while l != 0
 				let line = a:sccontent[l]
-				" if comment end found save line position and end search
-				if line =~? '^\s*\*/'
+				" if it's a one line docblock like comment and we can just return it right away
+				if line =~? '^\s*\/\*\*.\+\*\/\s*$'
+					return substitute(line, '\v^\s*(\/\*\*\s*)|(\s*\*\/)\s*$', '', 'g')
+				"... or if comment end found save line position and end search
+				elseif line =~? '^\s*\*/'
 					let comment_end = l
 					break
 				" ... or the line doesn't blank (only whitespace or nothing) end search
@@ -2220,6 +2271,7 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetDocBlock(sccontent, search) " {{{
 				endif
 				let l -= 1
 			endwhile
+
 			" no docblock comment start found
 			if comment_start == -1
 				return ''
@@ -2370,7 +2422,7 @@ endfunction!
 function! phpcomplete#GetCurrentNameSpace(file_lines) " {{{
 	let original_window = winnr()
 
-	silent! tab 1new
+	silent! below 1new
 	silent! 0put =a:file_lines
 	normal! G
 
@@ -2381,7 +2433,15 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetCurrentNameSpace(file_lines) " {{{
 			break
 		endif
 		let block_end_pos = searchpairpos('{', '', '}\|\%$', 'W', 'synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") =~? "string\\|comment"')
-		silent! exec block_start_pos[0].','.block_end_pos[0].'d'
+
+		if block_end_pos != [0, 0]
+			" end of the block found, just delete it
+			silent! exec block_start_pos[0].','.block_end_pos[0].'d _'
+		else
+			" block pair not found, use block start as beginning and the end
+			" of the buffer instead
+			silent! exec block_start_pos[0].',$d _'
+		endif
 	endwhile
 	normal! G
 
@@ -2400,8 +2460,8 @@ function! phpcomplete#GetCurrentNameSpace(file_lines) " {{{
 	while i < file_length
 		let line = file_lines[i]
 
-		if line =~? '^\s*namespace\s*'.namespace_name_pattern
-			let current_namespace = matchstr(line, '\c^\s*namespace\s*\zs'.namespace_name_pattern.'\ze')
+		if line =~? '^\(<?php\)\?\s*namespace\s*'.namespace_name_pattern
+			let current_namespace = matchstr(line, '\c^\(<?php\)\?\s*namespace\s*\zs'.namespace_name_pattern.'\ze')
 			break
 		endif
 
@@ -2564,7 +2624,7 @@ endfunction
 
 function! phpcomplete#ExpandClassName(classname, current_namespace, imports) " {{{
 	" if there's an imported class, just use that class's information
-	if has_key(a:imports, a:classname) && (a:imports[a:classname].kind == 'c' || a:imports[a:classname].kind == 'i')
+	if has_key(a:imports, a:classname) && (a:imports[a:classname].kind == 'c' || a:imports[a:classname].kind == 'i' || a:imports[a:classname].kind == 't')
 		let namespace = has_key(a:imports[a:classname], 'namespace') ? a:imports[a:classname].namespace : ''
 		return [a:imports[a:classname].name, namespace]
 	endif

runtime/autoload/python3complete.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 "python3complete.vim - Omni Completion for python
 " Maintainer: Aaron Griffin <aaronmgriffin@gmail.com>
 " Version: 0.9
-" Last Updated: 18 Jun 2009
+" Last Updated: 18 Jun 2009 (small fix 2015 Sep 14 from Debian)
 "
 " Roland Puntaier: this file contains adaptations for python3 and is parallel to pythoncomplete.vim
 "
@@ -359,6 +359,7 @@ class PyParser:
     def __init__(self):
         self.top = Scope('global',0)
         self.scope = self.top
+        self.parserline = 0
 
     def _parsedotname(self,pre=None):
         #returns (dottedname, nexttoken)

runtime/autoload/pythoncomplete.vim

@@ -377,6 +377,7 @@ class PyParser:
     def __init__(self):
         self.top = Scope('global',0)
         self.scope = self.top
+        self.parserline = 0
 
     def _parsedotname(self,pre=None):
         #returns (dottedname, nexttoken)

runtime/autoload/sqlcomplete.vim

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 " Vim OMNI completion script for SQL
 " Language:    SQL
 " Maintainer:  David Fishburn <dfishburn dot vim at gmail dot com>
-" Version:     15.0
-" Last Change: 2013 May 13
+" Version:     16.0
+" Last Change: 2015 Dec 29
 " Homepage:    http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=1572
 " Usage:       For detailed help
 "              ":help sql.txt"
@@ -16,6 +16,12 @@
 "       look backwards to a FROM clause and find the first table
 "       and complete it.
 "
+" Version 16.0 (Dec 2015)
+"     - NF: If reseting the cache and table, procedure or view completion
+"           had been used via dbext, have dbext delete or recreate the 
+"           dictionary so that new objects are picked up for the 
+"           next completion.
+"
 " Version 15.0 (May 2013)
 "     - NF: Changed the SQL precached syntax items, omni_sql_precache_syntax_groups,
 "           to use regular expressions to pick up extended syntax group names.
@@ -103,7 +109,7 @@ endif
 if exists('g:loaded_sql_completion')
     finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_sql_completion = 150
+let g:loaded_sql_completion = 160
 let s:keepcpo= &cpo
 set cpo&vim
 
@@ -459,6 +465,29 @@ function! sqlcomplete#Complete(findstart, base)
         let s:tbl_cols           = []
         let s:syn_list           = []
         let s:syn_value          = []
+
+        if s:sql_file_table != ""
+            if g:loaded_dbext >= 2300
+                call DB_DictionaryDelete("table")
+            else
+                DBCompleteTables!
+            endif
+        endif
+        if s:sql_file_procedure != ""
+            if g:loaded_dbext >= 2300
+                call DB_DictionaryDelete("procedure")
+            else
+                DBCompleteProcedures!
+            endif
+        endif
+        if s:sql_file_view != ""
+            if g:loaded_dbext >= 2300
+                call DB_DictionaryDelete("view")
+            else
+                DBCompleteViews!
+            endif
+        endif
+
         let s:sql_file_table     = ""
         let s:sql_file_procedure = ""
         let s:sql_file_view      = ""

runtime/autoload/tohtml.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Vim autoload file for the tohtml plugin.
 " Maintainer: Ben Fritz <fritzophrenic@gmail.com>
-" Last Change: 2013 Jun 19
+" Last Change: 2013 Sep 03
 "
 " Additional contributors:
 "
@@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ func! tohtml#Convert2HTML(line1, line2) "{{{
   else "{{{
     let win_list = []
     let buf_list = []
-    windo | if &diff | call add(win_list, winbufnr(0)) | endif
+    windo if &diff | call add(win_list, winbufnr(0)) | endif
     let s:settings.whole_filler = 1
     let g:html_diff_win_num = 0
     for window in win_list

runtime/doc/Makefile

@@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ DOCS = \
 	arabic.txt \
 	autocmd.txt \
 	change.txt \
+	channel.txt \
 	cmdline.txt \
 	debug.txt \
 	debugger.txt \
@@ -75,6 +76,7 @@ DOCS = \
 	pattern.txt \
 	pi_getscript.txt \
 	pi_gzip.txt \
+	pi_logipat.txt \
 	pi_netrw.txt \
 	pi_paren.txt \
 	pi_spec.txt \
@@ -150,6 +152,7 @@ HTMLS = \
 	arabic.html \
 	autocmd.html \
 	change.html \
+	channel.html \
 	cmdline.html \
 	debug.html \
 	debugger.html \
@@ -207,6 +210,7 @@ HTMLS = \
 	pattern.html \
 	pi_getscript.html \
 	pi_gzip.html \
+	pi_logipat.html \
 	pi_netrw.html \
 	pi_paren.html \
 	pi_spec.html \

runtime/doc/autocmd.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Sep 23
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Dec 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -259,6 +259,7 @@ Name			triggered by ~
 |Syntax|		when the 'syntax' option has been set
 |EncodingChanged|	after the 'encoding' option has been changed
 |TermChanged|		after the value of 'term' has changed
+|OptionSet|		after setting any option
 
 	Startup and exit
 |VimEnter|		after doing all the startup stuff
@@ -505,6 +506,8 @@ ColorScheme			After loading a color scheme. |:colorscheme|
 CompleteDone			After Insert mode completion is done.  Either
 				when something was completed or abandoning
 				completion. |ins-completion|
+				The |v:completed_item| variable contains
+				information about the completed item.
 
 							*CursorHold*
 CursorHold			When the user doesn't press a key for the time
@@ -742,6 +745,29 @@ MenuPopup			Just before showing the popup menu (under the
 					o	Operator-pending
 					i	Insert
 					c	Command line
+							*OptionSet*
+OptionSet			After setting an option.  The pattern is
+				matched against the long option name.
+				The |v:option_old| variable indicates the
+				old option value, |v:option_new| variable
+				indicates the newly set value, the
+				|v:option_type| variable indicates whether
+				it's global or local scoped and |<amatch>|
+				indicates what option has been set.
+
+				Is not triggered on startup and for the 'key'
+				option for obvious reasons.
+
+				Usage example: Check for the existence of the
+				directory in the 'backupdir' and 'undodir'
+				options, create the directory if it doesn't
+				exist yet.
+
+				Note: It's a bad idea to reset an option
+				during this autocommand, this may break a
+				plugin. You can always use `:noa` to prevent
+				triggering this autocommand.
+
 							*QuickFixCmdPre*
 QuickFixCmdPre			Before a quickfix command is run (|:make|,
 				|:lmake|, |:grep|, |:lgrep|, |:grepadd|,
@@ -933,6 +959,13 @@ WinLeave			Before leaving a window.  If the window to be
 ==============================================================================
 6. Patterns					*autocmd-patterns* *{pat}*
 
+The {pat} argument can be a comma separated list.  This works as if the
+command was given with each pattern separately.  Thus this command: >
+	:autocmd BufRead *.txt,*.info set et
+Is equivalent to: >
+	:autocmd BufRead *.txt set et
+	:autocmd BufRead *.info set et
+
 The file pattern {pat} is tested for a match against the file name in one of
 two ways:
 1. When there is no '/' in the pattern, Vim checks for a match against only
@@ -1039,7 +1072,7 @@ Instead of a pattern buffer-local autocommands use one of these forms:
 Examples: >
     :au CursorHold <buffer>  echo 'hold'
     :au CursorHold <buffer=33>  echo 'hold'
-    :au CursorHold <buffer=abuf>  echo 'hold'
+    :au BufNewFile * au CursorHold <buffer=abuf>  echo 'hold'
 
 All the commands for autocommands also work with buffer-local autocommands,
 simply use the special string instead of the pattern.  Examples: >
@@ -1098,6 +1131,9 @@ name!
 :aug[roup] {name}		Define the autocmd group name for the
 				following ":autocmd" commands.  The name "end"
 				or "END" selects the default group.
+				To avoid confusion, the name should be
+				different from existing {event} names, as this
+				most likely will not do what you intended.
 
 						*:augroup-delete* *E367*
 :aug[roup]! {name}		Delete the autocmd group {name}.  Don't use

runtime/doc/change.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Feb 10
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 31
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -379,13 +379,51 @@ Adding and subtracting ~
 CTRL-A			Add [count] to the number or alphabetic character at
 			or after the cursor.  {not in Vi}
 
+							*v_CTRL-A*
+{Visual}CTRL-A		Add [count] to the number or alphabetic character in
+			the highlighted text.  {not in Vi}
+
+							*v_g_CTRL-A*
+{Visual}g CTRL-A	Add [count] to the number or alphabetic character in
+			the highlighted text. If several lines are
+		        highlighted, each one will be incremented by an
+			additional [count] (so effectively creating a
+			[count] incrementing sequence).  {not in Vi}
+			For Example, if you have this list of numbers:
+				1. ~
+				1. ~
+				1. ~
+				1. ~
+			Move to the second "1." and Visually select three
+			lines, pressing g CTRL-A results in:
+				1. ~
+				2. ~
+				3. ~
+				4. ~
+
 							*CTRL-X*
 CTRL-X			Subtract [count] from the number or alphabetic
 			character at or after the cursor.  {not in Vi}
 
-The CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands work for (signed) decimal numbers, unsigned
-octal and hexadecimal numbers and alphabetic characters.  This depends on the
-'nrformats' option.
+							*v_CTRL-X*
+{Visual}CTRL-X		Subtract [count] from the number or alphabetic
+			character in the highlighted text.  {not in Vi}
+
+							*v_g_CTRL-X*
+{Visual}g CTRL-X	Subtract [count] from the number or alphabetic
+			character in the highlighted text. If several lines
+			are highlighted, each value will be decremented by an
+			additional [count] (so effectively creating a [count]
+			decrementing sequence).  {not in Vi}
+
+The CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands can work for:
+- signed and unsigned decimal numbers
+- unsigned binary, octal and hexadecimal numbers
+- alphabetic characters
+
+This depends on the 'nrformats' option:
+- When 'nrformats' includes "bin", Vim assumes numbers starting with '0b' or
+  '0B' are binary.
 - When 'nrformats' includes "octal", Vim considers numbers starting with a '0'
   to be octal, unless the number includes a '8' or '9'.  Other numbers are
   decimal and may have a preceding minus sign.
@@ -399,6 +437,10 @@ octal and hexadecimal numbers and alphabetic characters.  This depends on the
   under or after the cursor.  This is useful to make lists with an alphabetic
   index.
 
+For decimals a leading negative sign is considered for incrementing/
+decrementing, for binary, octal and hex values, it won't be considered.  To
+ignore the sign Visually select the number before using CTRL-A or CTRL-X. 
+
 For numbers with leading zeros (including all octal and hexadecimal numbers),
 Vim preserves the number of characters in the number when possible.  CTRL-A on
 "0077" results in "0100", CTRL-X on "0x100" results in "0x0ff".
@@ -410,6 +452,10 @@ octal number.
 Note that when 'nrformats' includes "octal", decimal numbers with leading
 zeros cause mistakes, because they can be confused with octal numbers.
 
+Note similarly, when 'nrformats' includes "bin", binary numbers with a leading
+'0x' or '0X' can be interpreted as hexadecimal rather than binary since '0b'
+are valid hexadecimal digits.
+
 The CTRL-A command is very useful in a macro.  Example: Use the following
 steps to make a numbered list.
 
@@ -597,9 +643,9 @@ For other systems the tmpnam() library function is used.
 			may add [flags], see |:s_flags|.
 			Note that after `:substitute` the '&' flag can't be
 			used, it's recognized as a pattern separator.
-			The space between `:substitute` and the 'c', 'g' and
-			'r' flags isn't required, but in scripts it's a good
-			idea to keep it to avoid confusion.
+			The space between `:substitute` and the 'c', 'g',
+			'i', 'I' and 'r' flags isn't required, but in scripts
+			it's a good idea to keep it to avoid confusion.
 
 :[range]~[&][flags] [count]					*:~*
 			Repeat last substitute with same substitute string
@@ -826,6 +872,36 @@ either the first or second pattern in parentheses did not match, so either
   :s/\([ab]\)\|\([cd]\)/\1x/g   modifies "a b c d"  to "ax bx x x"
 <
 
+		*:sc* *:sce* *:scg* *:sci* *:scI* *:scl* *:scp* *:sg* *:sgc*
+		*:sge* *:sgi* *:sgI* *:sgl* *:sgn* *:sgp* *:sgr* *:sI* *:si*
+		*:sic* *:sIc* *:sie* *:sIe* *:sIg* *:sIl* *:sin* *:sIn* *:sIp*
+		*:sip* *:sIr* *:sir* *:sr* *:src* *:srg* *:sri* *:srI* *:srl*
+		*:srn* *:srp*
+2-letter and 3-letter :substitute commands ~
+
+     List of :substitute commands
+     |      c    e    g    i    I    n    p    l    r
+     | c  :sc  :sce :scg :sci :scI :scn :scp :scl  ---
+     | e
+     | g  :sgc :sge :sg  :sgi :sgI :sgn :sgp :sgl :sgr
+     | i  :sic :sie  --- :si  :siI :sin :sip  --- :sir
+     | I  :sIc :sIe :sIg :sIi :sI  :sIn :sIp :sIl :sIr
+     | n
+     | p
+     | l
+     | r  :src  --- :srg :sri :srI :srn :srp :srl :sr
+
+Exceptions:
+     :scr  is  `:scriptnames`
+     :se   is  `:set`
+     :sig  is  `:sign`
+     :sil  is  `:silent`
+     :sn   is  `:snext`
+     :sp   is  `:split`
+     :sl   is  `:sleep`
+     :sre  is  `:srewind`
+
+
 Substitute with an expression			*sub-replace-expression*
 						*sub-replace-\=* *s/\=*
 When the substitute string starts with "\=" the remainder is interpreted as an
@@ -901,8 +977,6 @@ This replaces each 'E' character with a euro sign.  Read more in |<Char->|.
 			`:retab!` may also change a sequence of spaces by
 			<Tab> characters, which can mess up a printf().
 			{not in Vi}
-			Not available when |+ex_extra| feature was disabled at
-			compile time.
 
 							*retab-example*
 Example for using autocommands and ":retab" to edit a file which is stored
@@ -931,7 +1005,7 @@ inside of strings can change!  Also see 'softtabstop' option. >
 
 :reg[isters] {arg}	Display the contents of the numbered and named
 			registers that are mentioned in {arg}.  For example: >
-				:dis 1a
+				:reg 1a
 <			to display registers '1' and 'a'.  Spaces are allowed
 			in {arg}.  {not in Vi}
 
@@ -1098,7 +1172,7 @@ Rationale:	In Vi the "y" command followed by a backwards motion would
 With a linewise yank command the cursor is put in the first line, but the
 column is unmodified, thus it may not be on the first yanked character.
 
-There are nine types of registers:			*registers* *E354*
+There are ten types of registers:			*registers* *E354*
 1. The unnamed register ""
 2. 10 numbered registers "0 to "9
 3. The small delete register "-
@@ -1278,22 +1352,16 @@ The next three commands always work on whole lines.
 			Center lines in [range] between [width] columns
 			(default 'textwidth' or 80 when 'textwidth' is 0).
 			{not in Vi}
-			Not available when |+ex_extra| feature was disabled at
-			compile time.
 
 :[range]ri[ght] [width]					*:ri* *:right*
 			Right-align lines in [range] at [width] columns
 			(default 'textwidth' or 80 when 'textwidth' is 0).
 			{not in Vi}
-			Not available when |+ex_extra| feature was disabled at
-			compile time.
 
 							*:le* *:left*
 :[range]le[ft] [indent]
 			Left-align lines in [range].  Sets the indent in the
 			lines to [indent] (default 0).  {not in Vi}
-			Not available when |+ex_extra| feature was disabled at
-			compile time.
 
 							*gq*
 gq{motion}		Format the lines that {motion} moves over.
@@ -1669,7 +1737,7 @@ Vim has a sorting function and a sorting command.  The sorting function can be
 found here: |sort()|, |uniq()|.
 
 							*:sor* *:sort*
-:[range]sor[t][!] [i][u][r][n][x][o] [/{pattern}/]
+:[range]sor[t][!] [b][f][i][n][o][r][u][x] [/{pattern}/]
 			Sort lines in [range].  When no range is given all
 			lines are sorted.
 
@@ -1677,10 +1745,18 @@ found here: |sort()|, |uniq()|.
 
 			With [i] case is ignored.
 
+			Options [n][f][x][o][b] are mutually exclusive.
+
 			With [n] sorting is done on the first decimal number
 			in the line (after or inside a {pattern} match).
 			One leading '-' is included in the number.
 
+			With [f] sorting is done on the Float in the line.
+			The value of Float is determined similar to passing
+			the text (after or inside a {pattern} match) to
+			str2float() function. This option is available only
+			if Vim was compiled with Floating point support.
+
 			With [x] sorting is done on the first hexadecimal
 			number in the line (after or inside a {pattern}
 			match).  A leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored.
@@ -1689,10 +1765,13 @@ found here: |sort()|, |uniq()|.
 			With [o] sorting is done on the first octal number in
 			the line (after or inside a {pattern} match).
 
-			With [u] only keep the first of a sequence of
-			identical lines (ignoring case when [i] is used).
-			Without this flag, a sequence of identical lines
-			will be kept in their original order.
+			With [b] sorting is done on the first binary number in
+			the line (after or inside a {pattern} match).
+
+			With [u] (u stands for unique) only keep the first of
+			a sequence of identical lines (ignoring case when [i]
+			is used).  Without this flag, a sequence of identical
+			lines will be kept in their original order.
 			Note that leading and trailing white space may cause
 			lines to be different.
 

runtime/doc/channel.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+*channel.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 31
+
+
+		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
+
+
+		      Inter-process communication		*channel*
+
+DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT  DRAFT
+
+Vim uses channels to communicate with other processes.
+A channel uses a socket.				*socket-interface*
+
+Vim current supports up to 10 simultanious channels.
+The Netbeans interface also uses a channel. |netbeans|
+
+1. Demo					|channel-demo|
+2. Opening a channel			|channel-open|
+3. Using a JSON channel			|channel-use|
+4. Vim commands				|channel-commands|
+5. Using a raw channel			|channel-use|
+6. Job control				|job-control|
+
+{Vi does not have any of these features}
+{only available when compiled with the |+channel| feature}
+
+==============================================================================
+1. Demo							*channel-demo*
+
+This requires Python.  The demo program can be found in
+$VIMRUNTIME/tools/demoserver.py
+Run it in one terminal.  We will call this T1.
+
+Run Vim in another terminal.  Connect to the demo server with: >
+	let handle = connect('localhost:8765', 'json')
+
+In T1 you should see:
+	=== socket opened === ~
+
+You can now send a message to the server: >
+	echo sendexpr(handle, 'hello!')
+
+The message is received in T1 and a response is sent back to Vim.
+You can see the raw messages in T1.  What Vim sends is:
+	[1,"hello!"] ~
+And the response is:
+	[1,"got it"] ~
+The number will increase every time you send a message.
+
+The server can send a command to Vim.  Type this on T1 (literally, including
+the quotes):
+	["ex","echo 'hi there'"] ~
+And you should see the message in Vim. You can move the cursor a word forward:
+	["normal","w"] ~
+
+To handle asynchronous communication a callback needs to be used: >
+	func MyHandler(handle, msg)
+	  echo "from the handler: " . a:msg
+	endfunc
+	call sendexpr(handle, 'hello!', "MyHandler")
+
+Instead of giving a callback with every send call, it can also be specified
+when opening the channel: >
+	call disconnect(handle)
+	let handle = connect('localhost:8765', 'json', "MyHandler")
+	call sendexpr(handle, 'hello!', 0)
+
+==============================================================================
+2. Opening a channel					*channel-open*
+
+To open a channel:
+    let handle = connect({address}, {mode}, {callback})
+
+{address} has the form "hostname:port".  E.g., "localhost:8765".
+
+{mode} can be:						*channel-mode*
+	"json" - Use JSON, see below; most convenient way
+	"raw"  - Use raw messages
+
+							*channel-callback*
+{callback} is a function that is called when a message is received that is not
+handled otherwise.  It gets two arguments: the channel handle and the received
+message. Example: >
+	func Handle(handle, msg)
+	  echo 'Received: ' . a:msg
+	endfunc
+	let handle = connect("localhost:8765", 'json', "Handle")
+
+When {mode} is "json" the "msg" argument is the body of the received message,
+converted to Vim types.
+When {mode} is "raw" the "msg" argument is the whole message as a string.
+
+When {mode} is "json" the {callback} is optional.  When omitted it is only
+possible to receive a message after sending one.
+
+The handler can be added or changed later: >
+    call sethandler(handle, {callback})
+When {callback} is empty (zero or an empty string) the handler is removed.
+
+Once done with the channel, disconnect it like this: >
+    call disconnect(handle)
+
+Currently up to 10 channels can be in use at the same time. *E897*
+
+When the channel can't be opened you will get an error message.
+*E898* *E899* *E900* *E901* *E902*
+
+If there is an error reading or writing a channel it will be closed.
+*E896* *E630* *E631* 
+
+==============================================================================
+3. Using a JSON channel					*channel-use*
+
+If {mode} is "json" then a message can be sent synchronously like this: >
+    let response = sendexpr(handle, {expr})
+This awaits a response from the other side.
+
+To send a message, without handling a response: >
+    call sendexpr(handle, {expr}, 0)
+
+To send a message and letting the response handled by a specific function,
+asynchronously: >
+    call sendexpr(handle, {expr}, {callback})
+
+The {expr} is converted to JSON and wrapped in an array.  An example of the
+message that the receiver will get when {expr} is the string "hello":
+	[12,"hello"] ~
+
+The format of the JSON sent is:
+    [{number},{expr}]
+
+In which {number} is different every time.  It must be used in the response
+(if any):
+
+    [{number},{response}]
+
+This way Vim knows which sent message matches with which received message and
+can call the right handler.  Also when the messages arrive out of order.
+
+The sender must always send valid JSON to Vim.  Vim can check for the end of
+the message by parsing the JSON.  It will only accept the message if the end
+was received.
+
+When the process wants to send a message to Vim without first receiving a
+message, it must use the number zero:
+    [0,{response}]
+
+Then channel handler will then get {response} converted to Vim types.  If the
+channel does not have a handler the message is dropped.
+
+On read error or disconnect() the string "DETACH" is sent, if still possible.
+The channel will then be inactive.
+
+==============================================================================
+4. Vim commands						*channel-commands*
+
+PARTLY IMPLEMENTED: only "ex" and "normal" work
+
+With a "json" channel the process can send commands to Vim that will be
+handled by Vim internally, it does not require a handler for the channel.
+
+Possible commands are:				*E903* *E904* *E905*
+    ["redraw"  {forced}]
+    ["ex",     {Ex command}]
+    ["normal", {Normal mode command}]
+    ["eval",   {expression}, {number}]
+    ["expr",   {expression}]
+
+With all of these: Be careful what these commands do!  You can easily
+interfere with what the user is doing.  To avoid trouble use |mode()| to check
+that the editor is in the expected state.  E.g., to send keys that must be
+inserted as text, not executed as a command:
+    ["ex","if mode() == 'i' | call feedkeys('ClassName') | endif"] ~
+
+Errors in these commands are normally not reported to avoid them messing up
+the display.  If you do want to see them, set the 'verbose' option to 3 or
+higher.
+
+
+Command "redraw" ~
+
+The other commands do not update the screen, so that you can send a sequence
+of commands without the cursor moving around.  You must end with the "redraw"
+command to show any changed text and show the cursor where it belongs.
+
+The argument is normally an empty string:
+	["redraw", ""] ~
+To first clear the screen pass "force":
+	["redraw", "force"] ~
+
+
+Command "ex" ~
+
+The "ex" command is executed as any Ex command.  There is no response for
+completion or error.  You could use functions in an |autoload| script:
+	["ex","call myscript#MyFunc(arg)"]
+
+You can also use "call |feedkeys()|" to insert any key sequence.
+
+
+Command "normal" ~
+
+The "normal" command is executed like with |:normal!|, commands are not
+mapped.  Example to open the folds under the cursor:
+	["normal" "zO"]
+
+
+Command "eval" ~
+
+The "eval" command an be used to get the result of an expression.  For
+example, to get the number of lines in the current buffer:
+	["eval","line('$')"] ~
+
+it will send back the result of the expression:
+	[{number}, {result}]
+Here {number} is the same as what was in the request.  Use a negative number
+to avoid confusion with message that Vim sends.
+
+{result} is the result of the evaluation and is JSON encoded.  If the
+evaluation fails it is the string "ERROR".
+
+
+Command "expr" ~
+
+The "expr" command is similar to "eval", but does not send back any response.
+Example:
+	["expr","setline('$', ['one', 'two', 'three'])"] ~
+
+==============================================================================
+5. Using a raw channel					*channel-raw*
+
+If {mode} is "raw" then a message can be send like this: >
+    let response = sendraw(handle, {string})
+The {string} is sent as-is.  The response will be what can be read from the
+channel right away.  Since Vim doesn't know how to recognize the end of the
+message you need to take care of it yourself.
+
+To send a message, without expecting a response: >
+    call sendraw(handle, {string}, 0)
+The process can send back a response, the channel handler will be called with
+it.
+
+To send a message and letting the response handled by a specific function,
+asynchronously: >
+    call sendraw(handle, {string}, {callback})
+
+This {string} can also be JSON, use |jsonencode()| to create it and
+|jsondecode()| to handle a received JSON message.
+
+==============================================================================
+6. Job control						*job-control*
+
+NOT IMPLEMENTED YET
+
+To start another process: >
+    call startjob({command})
+
+This does not wait for {command} to exit.
+
+TODO:
+
+    let handle = startjob({command}, 's')            # uses stdin/stdout
+    let handle = startjob({command}, '', {address})  # uses socket
+    let handle = startjob({command}, 'd', {address}) # start if connect fails
+
+
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/cmdline.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Sep 06
+*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Dec 17
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -101,6 +101,11 @@ CTRL-E or <End>					*c_CTRL-E* *c_<End>* *c_End*
 							*c_<LeftMouse>*
 <LeftMouse>	Move the cursor to the position of the mouse click.
 
+							*c_<MiddleMouse>*
+<MiddleMouse>	Paste the contents of the clipboard (for X11 the primary
+		selection).  This is similar to using CTRL-R *, but no CR
+		characters are inserted between lines.
+
 CTRL-H						*c_<BS>* *c_CTRL-H* *c_BS*
 <BS>		Delete the character in front of the cursor (see |:fixdel| if
 		your <BS> key does not do what you want).
@@ -511,6 +516,8 @@ followed by another Vim command:
     :argdo
     :autocmd
     :bufdo
+    :cdo
+    :cfdo
     :command
     :cscope
     :debug
@@ -521,6 +528,8 @@ followed by another Vim command:
     :help
     :helpfind
     :lcscope
+    :ldo
+    :lfdo
     :make
     :normal
     :perl
@@ -597,6 +606,7 @@ starts editing the three files "foo bar", "goes to" and "school ".
 When you want to use the special characters '"' or '|' in a command, or want
 to use '%' or '#' in a file name, precede them with a backslash.  The
 backslash is not required in a range and in the ":substitute" command.
+See also |`=|.
 
 							*:_!*
 The '!' (bang) character after an Ex command makes the command behave in a
@@ -749,13 +759,13 @@ to insert special things while typing you can use the CTRL-R command.  For
 example, "%" stands for the current file name, while CTRL-R % inserts the
 current file name right away.  See |c_CTRL-R|.
 
-Note: If you want to avoid the special characters in a Vim script you may want
-to use |fnameescape()|.
+Note:  If you want to avoid the effects of special characters in a Vim script
+you may want to use |fnameescape()|.  Also see |`=|.
 
 
 In Ex commands, at places where a file name can be used, the following
 characters have a special meaning.  These can also be used in the expression
-function expand() |expand()|.
+function |expand()|.
 	%	Is replaced with the current file name.		  *:_%* *c_%*
 	#	Is replaced with the alternate file name.	  *:_#* *c_#*
 		This is remembered for every window.
@@ -790,6 +800,7 @@ it, no matter how many backslashes.
 	   #			alternate.file
 	   \#			#
 	   \\#			\#
+Also see |`=|.
 
 			       *:<cword>* *:<cWORD>* *:<cfile>* *<cfile>*
 			       *:<sfile>* *<sfile>* *:<afile>* *<afile>*
@@ -811,13 +822,13 @@ Note: these are typed literally, they are not special keys!
 		   <afile> only when the file name isn't used to match with
 		   (for FileType, Syntax and SpellFileMissing events).
 	<sfile>    When executing a ":source" command, is replaced with the
-		   file name of the sourced file.  *E498* 
-		   When executing a function, is replaced with
-		   "function {function-name}"; function call nesting is
-		   indicated like this:
-		   "function {function-name1}..{function-name2}".  Note that
-		   filename-modifiers are useless when <sfile> is used inside
-		   a function.
+		   file name of the sourced file.  *E498*
+		   When executing a function, is replaced with:
+		   "function {function-name}[{lnum}]"
+		   function call nesting is indicated like this:
+		   "function {function-name1}[{lnum}]..{function-name2}[{lnum}]"
+		   Note that filename-modifiers are useless when <sfile> is
+		   used inside a function.
 	<slnum>	   When executing a ":source" command, is replaced with the
 	           line number.  *E842*
 		   When executing a function it's the line number relative to
@@ -880,7 +891,7 @@ These modifiers can be given, in this order:
 	:gs?pat?sub?
 		Substitute all occurrences of "pat" with "sub".  Otherwise
 		this works like ":s".
-	:S	Escape special characters for use with a shell command (see 
+	:S	Escape special characters for use with a shell command (see
 		|shellescape()|). Must be the last one. Examples: >
 		    :!dir <cfile>:S
 		    :call system('chmod +w -- ' . expand('%:S'))
@@ -933,9 +944,8 @@ name).  This is included for backwards compatibility with version 3.0, the
 
 Note: Where a file name is expected wildcards expansion is done.  On Unix the
 shell is used for this, unless it can be done internally (for speed).
-Backticks also work, like in >
+Unless in |restricted-mode|, backticks work also, like in >
 	:n `echo *.c`
-(backtick expansion is not possible in |restricted-mode|)
 But expansion is only done if there are any wildcards before expanding the
 '%', '#', etc..  This avoids expanding wildcards inside a file name.  If you
 want to expand the result of <cfile>, add a wildcard character to it.
@@ -946,6 +956,7 @@ Examples: (alternate file name is "?readme?")
 	:e #.*		:e {files matching "?readme?.*"}
 	:cd <cfile>	:cd {file name under cursor}
 	:cd <cfile>*	:cd {file name under cursor plus "*" and then expanded}
+Also see |`=|.
 
 When the expanded argument contains a "!" and it is used for a shell command
 (":!cmd", ":r !cmd" or ":w !cmd"), the "!" is escaped with a backslash to
@@ -972,6 +983,8 @@ for the file "$home" in the root directory.  A few examples:
 	/\$home		file "$home" in root directory
 	\\$home		file "\\", followed by expanded $home
 
+Also see |`=|.
+
 ==============================================================================
 7. Command-line window				*cmdline-window* *cmdwin*
 							*command-line-window*

runtime/doc/develop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Mar 27
+*develop.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 31
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -166,12 +166,27 @@ This list is not complete.  Look in the source code for more examples.
 MAKING CHANGES						*style-changes*
 
 The basic steps to make changes to the code:
-1. Adjust the documentation.  Doing this first gives you an impression of how
+1. Get the code from github.  That makes it easier to keep your changed
+   version in sync with the main code base (it may be a while before your
+   changes will be included).  You do need to spend some time learning git,
+   it's not the most user friendly tool.
+2. Adjust the documentation.  Doing this first gives you an impression of how
    your changes affect the user.
-2. Make the source code changes.
-3. Check ../doc/todo.txt if the change affects any listed item.
-4. Make a patch with "diff -c" against the unmodified code and docs.
-5. Make a note about what changed and include it with the patch.
+3. Make the source code changes.
+4. Check ../doc/todo.txt if the change affects any listed item.
+5. Make a patch with "git diff".  You can also create a pull request on
+   github, but it's the diff that matters.
+6. Make a note about what changed, preferably mentioning the problem and the
+   solution.  Send an email to the vim-dev maillist with an explanation and
+   include the diff. Or create a pull request on github.
+
+
+C COMPILER						*style-compiler*
+
+The minimal C compiler version supported is C89, also known as ANSI C.
+Later standards don't add much and C89 is the widest supported.
+
+One restriction that this implies: no // comments, only /* comments */.
 
 
 USE OF COMMON FUNCTIONS					*style-functions*
@@ -197,7 +212,7 @@ NAMES							*style-names*
 
 Function names can not be more than 31 characters long (because of VMS).
 
-Don't use "delete" as a variable name, C++ doesn't like it.
+Don't use "delete" or "this" as a variable name, C++ doesn't like it.
 
 Because of the requirement that Vim runs on as many systems as possible, we
 need to avoid using names that are already defined by the system.  This is a
@@ -288,8 +303,27 @@ OK:	    do
 		a = 1;
 	    while (cond);
 
+Wrong:	    if (cond) {
+               cmd;
+               cmd;
+	    } else {
+               cmd;
+               cmd;
+	    }
 
-Functions start with:
+OK:	    if (cond)
+            {
+               cmd;
+               cmd;
+	    }
+	    else
+	    {
+               cmd;
+               cmd;
+	    }
+
+Use ANSI (new style) function declarations with the return type on a separate
+indented line.
 
 Wrong:	int function_name(int arg1, int arg2)
 
@@ -299,16 +333,14 @@ OK:	/*
 	 * Return value explanation.
 	 */
 	    int
-	function_name(arg1, arg2)
-	    int		arg1;		/* short comment about arg1 */
-	    int		arg2;		/* short comment about arg2 */
+	function_name(
+	    int		arg1,		/* short comment about arg1 */
+	    int		arg2)		/* short comment about arg2 */
 	{
 	    int		local;		/* comment about local */
 
 	    local = arg1 * arg2;
 
-NOTE: Don't use ANSI style function declarations.  A few people still have to
-use a compiler that doesn't support it.
 
 
 SPACES AND PUNCTUATION					*style-spaces*

runtime/doc/diff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Feb 03
+*diff.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Nov 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -132,8 +132,9 @@ file for a moment and come back to the same file and be in diff mode again.
 		if the current window does not have 'diff' set then no options
 		in it are changed.
 
-The ":diffoff" command resets the relevant options to the values they had when
-using |:diffsplit|, |:diffpatch| , |:diffthis|. or starting Vim in diff mode.
+The `:diffoff` command resets the relevant options to the values they had when
+using `:diffsplit`, `:diffpatch` , `:diffthis`. or starting Vim in diff mode.
+When using `:diffoff` twice the last saved values are restored.
 Otherwise they are set to their default value:
 
 	'diff'		off
@@ -181,8 +182,8 @@ hidden buffers.  You can use ":hide" to close a window without unloading the
 buffer.  If you don't want a buffer to remain used for the diff do ":set
 nodiff" before hiding it.
 
-							*:diffu* *:diffupdate*
-:diffu[pdate][!]		Update the diff highlighting and folds.
+							*:dif* *:diffupdate*
+:dif[fupdate][!]		Update the diff highlighting and folds.
 
 Vim attempts to keep the differences updated when you make changes to the
 text.  This mostly takes care of inserted and deleted lines.  Changes within a

runtime/doc/doctags.c

@@ -14,9 +14,7 @@
 #define LINELEN 200
 
 	int
-main(argc, argv)
-	int		argc;
-	char	**argv;
+main(int argc, char **argv)
 {
 	char	line[LINELEN];
 	char	*p1, *p2;

runtime/doc/editing.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Feb 27
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -78,7 +78,9 @@ g CTRL-G		Prints the current position of the cursor in five
 			than one position on the screen (<Tab> or special
 			character), both the "real" column and the screen
 			column are shown, separated with a dash.
-			See also 'ruler' option.  {not in Vi}
+			Also see the 'ruler' option and the |wordcount()|
+			function.
+			{not in Vi}
 
 							*v_g_CTRL-G*
 {Visual}g CTRL-G	Similar to "g CTRL-G", but Word, Character, Line, and
@@ -412,25 +414,38 @@ Finds files:
 	/usr/include/sys/types.h
 	/usr/inc_old/types.h
 					*backtick-expansion* *`-expansion*
-On Unix and a few other systems you can also use backticks in the file name,
-for example: >
-	:e `find . -name ver\\*.c -print`
-The backslashes before the star are required to prevent "ver*.c" to be
-expanded by the shell before executing the find program.
+On Unix and a few other systems you can also use backticks for the file name
+argument, for example: >
+	:next `find . -name ver\\*.c -print`
+	:view `ls -t *.patch  \| head -n1`
+The backslashes before the star are required to prevent the shell from
+expanding "ver*.c" prior to execution of the find program.  The backslash
+before the shell pipe symbol "|" prevents Vim from parsing it as command
+termination.
 This also works for most other systems, with the restriction that the
 backticks must be around the whole item.  It is not possible to have text
 directly before the first or just after the last backtick.
 
 							*`=*
-You can have the backticks expanded as a Vim expression, instead of an
-external command, by using the syntax `={expr}` e.g.: >
+You can have the backticks expanded as a Vim expression, instead of as an
+external command, by putting an equal sign right after the first backtick,
+e.g.: >
 	:e `=tempname()`
 The expression can contain just about anything, thus this can also be used to
 avoid the special meaning of '"', '|', '%' and '#'.  However, 'wildignore'
 does apply like to other wildcards.
+
+Environment variables in the expression are expanded when evaluating the
+expression, thus this works: >
+	:e `=$HOME . '/.vimrc'`
+This does not work, $HOME is inside a string and used literally: >
+	:e `='$HOME' . '/.vimrc'`
+
 If the expression returns a string then names are to be separated with line
 breaks.  When the result is a |List| then each item is used as a name.  Line
 breaks also separate names.
+Note that such expressions are only supported in places where a filename is
+expected as an argument to an Ex-command.
 
 							*++opt* *[++opt]*
 The [++opt] argument can be used to force the value of 'fileformat',
@@ -624,6 +639,7 @@ list of the current window.
 				:0argadd x	x a b c
 				:1argadd x	a x b c
 				:$argadd x	a b c x
+			And after the last one:
 				:+2argadd y	a b c x y
 			There is no check for duplicates, it is possible to
 			add a file to the argument list twice.
@@ -855,7 +871,8 @@ USING THE ARGUMENT LIST
 			each file.
 			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
 			|+listcmds| feature}
-			Also see |:windo|, |:tabdo| and |:bufdo|.
+			Also see |:windo|, |:tabdo|, |:bufdo|, |:cdo|, |:ldo|,
+			|:cfdo| and |:lfdo|
 
 Example: >
 	:args *.c
@@ -1091,10 +1108,10 @@ The names can be in upper- or lowercase.
 			the last file in the argument list has not been
 			edited.  See |:confirm| and 'confirm'.  {not in Vi}
 
-:q[uit]!		Quit without writing, also when currently visible
-			buffers have changes.  Does not exit when this is the
-			last window and there is a changed hidden buffer.
-			In this case, the first changed hidden buffer becomes
+:q[uit]!		Quit without writing, also when the current buffer has
+			changes.  If this is the last window and there is a
+			modified hidden buffer, the current buffer is
+			abandoned and the first changed hidden buffer becomes
 			the current buffer.
 			Use ":qall!" to exit always.
 
@@ -1363,7 +1380,7 @@ There are a few things to remember when editing binary files:
 - <Nul> characters are shown on the screen as ^@.  You can enter them with
   "CTRL-V CTRL-@" or "CTRL-V 000" {Vi cannot handle <Nul> characters in the
   file}
-- To insert a <NL> character in the file split up a line.  When writing the
+- To insert a <NL> character in the file split a line.  When writing the
   buffer to a file a <NL> will be written for the <EOL>.
 - Vim normally appends an <EOL> at the end of the file if there is none.
   Setting the 'binary' option prevents this.  If you want to add the final
@@ -1393,7 +1410,8 @@ reveal it to others.  The 'viminfo' file is not encrypted.
 You could do this to edit very secret text: >
 	:set noundofile viminfo=
 	:noswapfile edit secrets.txt
-Keep in mind that without a swap file you risk losing your work in a crash.
+Keep in mind that without a swap file you risk losing your work in the event
+of a crash or a power failure.
 
 WARNING: If you make a typo when entering the key and then write the file and
 exit, the text will be lost!
@@ -1441,6 +1459,18 @@ using zip, "[blowfish]" when using blowfish, etc.
 When writing an undo file, the same key and method will be used for the text
 in the undo file. |persistent-undo|.
 
+To test for blowfish support you can use these conditions: >
+	has('crypt-blowfish')
+	has('crypt-blowfish2')
+This works since Vim 7.4.1099 while blowfish support was added earlier.
+Thus the condition failing doesn't mean blowfish is not supported. You can
+test for blowfish with: >
+	v:version >= 703
+And for blowfish2 with: >
+	v:version > 704 || (v:version == 704 && has('patch401'))
+If you are sure Vim includes patch 7.4.237 a simpler check is: >
+	has('patch-7.4.401')
+<
 						*E817* *E818* *E819* *E820*
 When encryption does not work properly, you would be able to write your text
 to a file and never be able to read it back.  Therefore a test is performed to

runtime/doc/eval.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*eval.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Mar 21
+*eval.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -68,14 +68,16 @@ the Number.  Examples:
 	Number 0	-->	String "0" ~
 	Number -1	-->	String "-1" ~
 							*octal*
-Conversion from a String to a Number is done by converting the first digits
-to a number.  Hexadecimal "0xf9" and Octal "017" numbers are recognized.  If
-the String doesn't start with digits, the result is zero.  Examples:
+Conversion from a String to a Number is done by converting the first digits to
+a number.  Hexadecimal "0xf9", Octal "017", and Binary "0b10" numbers are
+recognized.  If the String doesn't start with digits, the result is zero.
+Examples:
 	String "456"	-->	Number 456 ~
 	String "6bar"	-->	Number 6 ~
 	String "foo"	-->	Number 0 ~
 	String "0xf1"	-->	Number 241 ~
 	String "0100"	-->	Number 64 ~
+	String "0b101"	-->	Number 5 ~
 	String "-8"	-->	Number -8 ~
 	String "+8"	-->	Number 0 ~
 
@@ -101,6 +103,9 @@ When mixing Number and Float the Number is converted to Float.	Otherwise
 there is no automatic conversion of Float.  You can use str2float() for String
 to Float, printf() for Float to String and float2nr() for Float to Number.
 
+						*E891* *E892* *E893* *E894*
+When expecting a Float a Number can also be used, but nothing else.
+
 						*E706* *sticky-type-checking*
 You will get an error if you try to change the type of a variable.  You need
 to |:unlet| it first to avoid this error.  String and Number are considered
@@ -525,7 +530,7 @@ Funcref to a Dictionary, but the "self" variable is not available then.
 To avoid the extra name for the function it can be defined and directly
 assigned to a Dictionary in this way: >
 	:let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3]}
-	:function mydict.len() dict
+	:function mydict.len()
 	:   return len(self.data)
 	:endfunction
 	:echo mydict.len()
@@ -865,13 +870,13 @@ expr1'th single byte from expr8.  expr8 is used as a String, expr1 as a
 Number.  This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see |byteidx()| for
 an alternative.
 
-Index zero gives the first character.  This is like it works in C.  Careful:
-text column numbers start with one!  Example, to get the character under the
+Index zero gives the first byte.  This is like it works in C.  Careful:
+text column numbers start with one!  Example, to get the byte under the
 cursor: >
 	:let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
 
 If the length of the String is less than the index, the result is an empty
-String.  A negative index always results in an empty string (reason: backwards
+String.  A negative index always results in an empty string (reason: backward
 compatibility).  Use [-1:] to get the last byte.
 
 If expr8 is a |List| then it results the item at index expr1.  See |list-index|
@@ -917,6 +922,11 @@ just above, except that indexes out of range cause an error.  Examples: >
 Using expr8[expr1] or expr8[expr1a : expr1b] on a |Funcref| results in an
 error.
 
+Watch out for confusion between a namespace and a variable followed by a colon
+for a sublist: >
+	mylist[n:]     " uses variable n
+	mylist[s:]     " uses namespace s:, error!
+
 
 expr8.name		entry in a |Dictionary|		*expr-entry*
 
@@ -1005,7 +1015,7 @@ function.  Example: >
 
 
 
-string						*string* *expr-string* *E114*
+string					*string* *String* *expr-string* *E114*
 ------
 "string"		string constant		*expr-quote*
 
@@ -1021,7 +1031,7 @@ A string constant accepts these special characters:
 \X.	same as \x.
 \u....	character specified with up to 4 hex numbers, stored according to the
 	current value of 'encoding' (e.g., "\u02a4")
-\U....	same as \u....
+\U....	same as \u but allows up to 8 hex numbers.
 \b	backspace <BS>
 \e	escape <Esc>
 \f	formfeed <FF>
@@ -1330,6 +1340,12 @@ v:cmdbang	Set like v:cmdarg for a file read/write command.  When a "!"
 		can only be used in autocommands.  For user commands |<bang>|
 		can be used.
 
+				*v:completed_item* *completed_item-variable*
+v:completed_item
+		|Dictionary| containing the |complete-items| for the most
+		recently completed word after |CompleteDone|.  The
+		|Dictionary| is empty if the completion failed.
+
 					*v:count* *count-variable*
 v:count		The count given for the last Normal mode command.  Can be used
 		to get the count before a mapping.  Read-only.	Example: >
@@ -1373,6 +1389,15 @@ v:errmsg	Last given error message.  It's allowed to set this variable.
 	:  ... handle error
 <		"errmsg" also works, for backwards compatibility.
 
+					*v:errors* *errors-variable*
+v:errors	Errors found by assert functions, such as |assert_true()|.
+		This is a list of strings.
+		The assert functions append an item when an assert fails.
+		To remove old results make it empty: >
+	:let v:errors = []
+<		If v:errors is set to anything but a list it is made an empty
+		list by the assert function.
+
 					*v:exception* *exception-variable*
 v:exception	The value of the exception most recently caught and not
 		finished.  See also |v:throwpoint| and |throw-variables|.
@@ -1384,6 +1409,13 @@ v:exception	The value of the exception most recently caught and not
 	:endtry
 <		Output: "caught oops".
 
+					*v:false* *false-variable*
+v:false		A Number with value zero. Used to put "false" in JSON.  See
+		|jsonencode()|.
+		When used as a string this evaluates to "false". >
+			echo v:false
+<			false ~
+
 					*v:fcs_reason* *fcs_reason-variable*
 v:fcs_reason	The reason why the |FileChangedShell| event was triggered.
 		Can be used in an autocommand to decide what to do and/or what
@@ -1460,9 +1492,11 @@ v:foldstart	Used for 'foldtext': first line of closed fold.
 v:hlsearch	Variable that indicates whether search highlighting is on. 
 		Setting it makes sense only if 'hlsearch' is enabled which
 		requires |+extra_search|. Setting this variable to zero acts
-		the like |:nohlsearch| command, setting it to one acts like >
+		like the |:nohlsearch| command, setting it to one acts like >
 			let &hlsearch = &hlsearch
-<
+<		Note that the value is restored when returning from a
+		function. |function-search-undo|.
+
 					*v:insertmode* *insertmode-variable*
 v:insertmode	Used for the |InsertEnter| and |InsertChange| autocommand
 		events.  Values:
@@ -1515,6 +1549,22 @@ v:mouse_col	Column number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|.
 		This is the screen column number, like with |virtcol()|.  The
 		value is zero when there was no mouse button click.
 
+					*v:none* *none-variable*
+v:none		An empty String. Used to put an empty item in JSON.  See
+		|jsonencode()|.
+		When used as a number this evaluates to zero.
+		When used as a string this evaluates to "none". >
+			echo v:none
+<			none ~
+
+					*v:null* *null-variable*
+v:null		An empty String. Used to put "null" in JSON.  See
+		|jsonencode()|.
+		When used as a number this evaluates to zero.
+		When used as a string this evaluates to "null". >
+			echo v:null
+<			null ~
+
 					*v:oldfiles* *oldfiles-variable*
 v:oldfiles	List of file names that is loaded from the |viminfo| file on
 		startup.  These are the files that Vim remembers marks for.
@@ -1527,6 +1577,15 @@ v:oldfiles	List of file names that is loaded from the |viminfo| file on
 		than String this will cause trouble.
 		{only when compiled with the |+viminfo| feature}
 
+						    *v:option_new*
+v:option_new    New value of the option. Valid while executing an |OptionSet|
+		autocommand.
+						    *v:option_old*
+v:option_old    Old value of the option. Valid while executing an |OptionSet|
+		autocommand.
+						    *v:option_type*
+v:option_type   Scope of the set command. Valid while executing an
+		|OptionSet| autocommand. Can be either "global" or "local"
 					*v:operator* *operator-variable*
 v:operator	The last operator given in Normal mode.  This is a single
 		character except for commands starting with <g> or <z>,
@@ -1671,6 +1730,12 @@ v:throwpoint	The point where the exception most recently caught and not
 	:endtry
 <		Output: "Exception from test.vim, line 2"
 
+						*v:true* *true-variable*
+v:true		A Number with value one. Used to put "true" in JSON.  See
+		|jsonencode()|.
+		When used as a string this evaluates to "true". >
+			echo v:true
+<			true ~
 						*v:val* *val-variable*
 v:val		Value of the current item of a |List| or |Dictionary|.	Only
 		valid while evaluating the expression used with |map()| and
@@ -1711,15 +1776,22 @@ USAGE				RESULT	DESCRIPTION	~
 abs( {expr})			Float or Number  absolute value of {expr}
 acos( {expr})			Float	arc cosine of {expr}
 add( {list}, {item})		List	append {item} to |List| {list}
+alloc_fail( {id}, {countdown}, {repeat})
+				none	make memory allocation fail
 and( {expr}, {expr})		Number  bitwise AND
 append( {lnum}, {string})	Number	append {string} below line {lnum}
 append( {lnum}, {list})		Number	append lines {list} below line {lnum}
 argc()				Number	number of files in the argument list
 argidx()			Number	current index in the argument list
-arglistid( [{winnr}, [ {tabnr}]])
+arglistid( [{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
 				Number	argument list id
 argv( {nr})			String	{nr} entry of the argument list
 argv( )				List	the argument list
+assert_equal( {exp}, {act} [, {msg}]) none  assert {exp} equals {act}
+assert_exception({error} [, {msg}])   none  assert {error} is in v:exception
+assert_fails( {cmd} [, {error}])      none  assert {cmd} fails
+assert_false( {actual} [, {msg}])     none  assert {actual} is false
+assert_true( {actual} [, {msg}])      none  assert {actual} is true
 asin( {expr})			Float	arc sine of {expr}
 atan( {expr})			Float	arc tangent of {expr}
 atan2( {expr}, {expr})		Float   arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}
@@ -1730,7 +1802,7 @@ bufexists( {expr})		Number	TRUE if buffer {expr} exists
 buflisted( {expr})		Number	TRUE if buffer {expr} is listed
 bufloaded( {expr})		Number	TRUE if buffer {expr} is loaded
 bufname( {expr})		String	Name of the buffer {expr}
-bufnr( {expr})			Number	Number of the buffer {expr}
+bufnr( {expr} [, {create}])	Number	Number of the buffer {expr}
 bufwinnr( {expr})		Number	window number of buffer {expr}
 byte2line( {byte})		Number	line number at byte count {byte}
 byteidx( {expr}, {nr})		Number	byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr}
@@ -1748,6 +1820,8 @@ complete_add( {expr})		Number	add completion match
 complete_check()		Number	check for key typed during completion
 confirm( {msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
 				Number	number of choice picked by user
+connect( {address}, {mode} [, {callback}])
+				Number	open a channel
 copy( {expr})			any	make a shallow copy of {expr}
 cos( {expr})			Float	cosine of {expr}
 cosh( {expr})			Float	hyperbolic cosine of {expr}
@@ -1759,7 +1833,7 @@ cursor( {lnum}, {col} [, {off}])
 				Number	move cursor to {lnum}, {col}, {off}
 cursor( {list})			Number	move cursor to position in {list}
 deepcopy( {expr} [, {noref}])	any	make a full copy of {expr}
-delete( {fname})		Number	delete file {fname}
+delete( {fname} [, {flags}])	Number	delete the file or directory {fname}
 did_filetype()			Number	TRUE if FileType autocommand event used
 diff_filler( {lnum})		Number	diff filler lines about {lnum}
 diff_hlID( {lnum}, {col})	Number	diff highlighting at {lnum}/{col}
@@ -1805,12 +1879,13 @@ getbufvar( {expr}, {varname} [, {def}])
 				any	variable {varname} in buffer {expr}
 getchar( [expr])		Number	get one character from the user
 getcharmod( )			Number	modifiers for the last typed character
+getcharsearch()			Dict	last character search
 getcmdline()			String	return the current command-line
 getcmdpos()			Number	return cursor position in command-line
 getcmdtype()			String	return current command-line type
 getcmdwintype()			String	return current command-line window type
 getcurpos()			List	position of the cursor
-getcwd()			String	the current working directory
+getcwd( [{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])	String	get the current working directory
 getfontname( [{name}])		String	name of font being used
 getfperm( {fname})		String	file permissions of file {fname}
 getfsize( {fname})		Number	size in bytes of file {fname}
@@ -1841,7 +1916,8 @@ globpath( {path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {alllinks}]]])
 				String	do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path}
 has( {feature})			Number	TRUE if feature {feature} supported
 has_key( {dict}, {key})		Number	TRUE if {dict} has entry {key}
-haslocaldir()			Number	TRUE if current window executed |:lcd|
+haslocaldir( [{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
+				Number	TRUE if the window executed |:lcd|
 hasmapto( {what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
 				Number	TRUE if mapping to {what} exists
 histadd( {history},{item})	String	add an item to a history
@@ -1868,6 +1944,8 @@ isdirectory( {directory})	Number	TRUE if {directory} is a directory
 islocked( {expr})		Number	TRUE if {expr} is locked
 items( {dict})			List	key-value pairs in {dict}
 join( {list} [, {sep}])		String	join {list} items into one String
+jsondecode( {string})		any	decode JSON
+jsonencode( {expr})		String	encode JSON
 keys( {dict})			List	keys in {dict}
 len( {expr})			Number	the length of {expr}
 libcall( {lib}, {func}, {arg})	String	call {func} in library {lib} with {arg}
@@ -1909,6 +1987,7 @@ nextnonblank( {lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum}
 nr2char( {expr}[, {utf8}])	String	single char with ASCII/UTF8 value {expr}
 or( {expr}, {expr})		Number  bitwise OR
 pathshorten( {expr})		String	shorten directory names in a path
+perleval( {expr})		any	evaluate |Perl| expression
 pow( {x}, {y})			Float	{x} to the power of {y}
 prevnonblank( {lnum})		Number	line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum}
 printf( {fmt}, {expr1}...)	String	format text
@@ -1950,10 +2029,15 @@ searchpairpos( {start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]])
 				List	search for other end of start/end pair
 searchpos( {pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])
 				List	search for {pattern}
+sendexpr( {handle}, {expr} [, {callback}])
+				any	send {expr} over JSON channel {handle}
+sendraw( {handle}, {string} [, {callback}])
+				any	send {string} over raw channel {handle}
 server2client( {clientid}, {string})
 				Number	send reply string
 serverlist()			String	get a list of available servers
 setbufvar( {expr}, {varname}, {val})	set {varname} in buffer {expr} to {val}
+setcharsearch( {dict})		Dict	set character search from {dict}
 setcmdpos( {pos})		Number	set cursor position in command-line
 setline( {lnum}, {line})	Number	set line {lnum} to {line}
 setloclist( {nr}, {list}[, {action}])
@@ -1985,7 +2069,7 @@ split( {expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]])
 sqrt( {expr})			Float	square root of {expr}
 str2float( {expr})		Float	convert String to Float
 str2nr( {expr} [, {base}])	Number	convert String to Number
-strchars( {expr})		Number	character length of the String {expr}
+strchars( {expr} [, {skipcc}])	Number	character length of the String {expr}
 strdisplaywidth( {expr} [, {col}]) Number display length of the String {expr}
 strftime( {format}[, {time}])	String	time in specified format
 stridx( {haystack}, {needle}[, {start}])
@@ -2042,6 +2126,7 @@ winrestcmd()			String	returns command to restore window sizes
 winrestview( {dict})		none	restore view of current window
 winsaveview()			Dict	save view of current window
 winwidth( {nr})			Number	width of window {nr}
+wordcount()			Dict	get byte/char/word statistics
 writefile( {list}, {fname} [, {flags}])
 				Number	write list of lines to file {fname}
 xor( {expr}, {expr})		Number  bitwise XOR
@@ -2084,6 +2169,13 @@ add({list}, {expr})					*add()*
 		Use |insert()| to add an item at another position.
 
 
+alloc_fail({id}, {countdown}, {repeat})			*alloc_fail()*
+		This is for testing: If the memory allocation with {id} is
+		called, then decrement {countdown}, and when it reaches zero
+		let memory allocation fail {repeat} times.  When {repeat} is
+		smaller than one it fails one time.
+
+
 and({expr}, {expr})					*and()*
 		Bitwise AND on the two arguments.  The arguments are converted
 		to a number.  A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error.
@@ -2135,6 +2227,55 @@ argv([{nr}])	The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list of the
 <		Without the {nr} argument a |List| with the whole |arglist| is
 		returned.
 
+							*assert_equal()*
+assert_equal({expected}, {actual} [, {msg}])
+		When {expected} and {actual} are not equal an error message is
+		added to |v:errors|.
+		There is no automatic conversion, the String "4" is different
+		from the Number 4.  And the number 4 is different from the
+		Float 4.0.  The value of 'ignorecase' is not used here, case
+		always matters.
+		When {msg} is omitted an error in the form "Expected
+		{expected} but got {actual}" is produced.
+		Example: >
+	assert_equal('foo', 'bar')
+<		Will result in a string to be added to |v:errors|:
+	test.vim line 12: Expected 'foo' but got 'bar' ~
+
+assert_exception({error} [, {msg}])			*assert_exception()*
+		When v:exception does not contain the string {error} an error
+		message is added to |v:errors|.
+		This can be used to assert that a command throws an exception.
+		Using the error number, followed by a colon, avoids problems
+		with translations: >
+			try
+			  commandthatfails
+			  call assert_false(1, 'command should have failed')
+			catch
+			  call assert_exception('E492:')
+			endtry
+
+assert_fails({cmd} [, {error}])					*assert_fails()*
+		Run {cmd} and add an error message to |v:errors| if it does
+		NOT produce an error.
+		When {error} is given it must match |v:errmsg|.
+
+assert_false({actual} [, {msg}])				*assert_false()*
+		When {actual} is not false an error message is added to
+		|v:errors|, like with |assert_equal()|.
+		A value is false when it is zero. When "{actual}" is not a
+		number the assert fails.
+		When {msg} is omitted an error in the form "Expected False but
+		got {actual}" is produced.
+
+assert_true({actual} [, {msg}])					*assert_true()*
+		When {actual} is not true an error message is added to
+		|v:errors|, like with |assert_equal()|.
+		A value is true when it is a non-zero number.  When {actual}
+		is not a number the assert fails.
+		When {msg} is omitted an error in the form "Expected True but
+		got {actual}" is produced.
+
 asin({expr})						*asin()*
 		Return the arc sine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |Float|
 		in the range of [-pi/2, pi/2].
@@ -2525,6 +2666,20 @@ confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
 		don't fit, a vertical layout is used anyway.  For some systems
 		the horizontal layout is always used.
 
+connect({address}, {mode} [, {callback}])		*connect()*
+		Open a channel to {address}.  See |channel|.
+		Returns the channel handle on success.  Returns a negative
+		number for failure.
+
+		{address} has the form "hostname:port", e.g.,
+		"localhost:8765".
+
+		{mode} is either "json" or "raw".  See |channel-mode| for the
+		meaning.
+
+		{callback} is a function that handles received messages on the
+		channel.  See |channel-callback|.
+
 							*copy()*
 copy({expr})	Make a copy of {expr}.	For Numbers and Strings this isn't
 		different from using {expr} directly.
@@ -2654,10 +2809,20 @@ deepcopy({expr}[, {noref}])				*deepcopy()* *E698*
 		{noref} set to 1 will fail.
 		Also see |copy()|.
 
-delete({fname})							*delete()*
-		Deletes the file by the name {fname}.  The result is a Number,
-		which is 0 if the file was deleted successfully, and non-zero
-		when the deletion failed.
+delete({fname} [, {flags}])					*delete()*
+		Without {flags} or with {flags} empty: Deletes the file by the
+		name {fname}.  This also works when {fname} is a symbolic link.
+
+		When {flags} is "d": Deletes the directory by the name
+		{fname}.  This fails when directory {fname} is not empty.
+		
+		When {flags} is "rf": Deletes the directory by the name
+		{fname} and everything in it, recursively.  BE CAREFUL!
+		A symbolic link itself is deleted, not what it points to.
+		
+		The result is a Number, which is 0 if the delete operation was
+		successful and -1 when the deletion failed or partly failed.
+
 		Use |remove()| to delete an item from a |List|.
 		To delete a line from the buffer use |:delete|.  Use |:exe|
 		when the line number is in a variable.
@@ -2697,6 +2862,7 @@ empty({expr})						*empty()*
 		Return the Number 1 if {expr} is empty, zero otherwise.
 		A |List| or |Dictionary| is empty when it does not have any
 		items.	A Number is empty when its value is zero.
+		|v:false|, |v:none| and |v:null| are empty, |v:true| is not.
 		For a long |List| this is much faster than comparing the
 		length with zero.
 
@@ -2961,6 +3127,8 @@ extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])			*extend()*
 		{expr1} is changed when {expr2} is not empty.  If necessary
 		make a copy of {expr1} first.
 		{expr2} remains unchanged.
+		When {expr1} is locked and {expr2} is not empty the operation
+		fails.
 		Returns {expr1}.
 
 
@@ -2986,6 +3154,11 @@ feedkeys({string} [, {mode}])				*feedkeys()*
 			if coming from a mapping.  This matters for undo,
 			opening folds, etc.
 		'i'	Insert the string instead of appending (see above).
+		'x'	Execute commands until typeahead is empty.  This is
+			similar to using ":normal!".  You can call feedkeys()
+			several times without 'x' and then one time with 'x'
+			(possibly with an empty {string}) to execute all the
+			typeahead.
 		Return value is always 0.
 
 filereadable({file})					*filereadable()*
@@ -3342,6 +3515,26 @@ getcharmod()						*getcharmod()*
 		character itself are obtained.	Thus Shift-a results in "A"
 		without a modifier.
 
+getcharsearch()						*getcharsearch()*
+		Return the current character search information as a {dict}
+		with the following entries:
+
+		    char	character previously used for a character
+				search (|t|, |f|, |T|, or |F|); empty string
+				if no character search has been performed
+		    forward	direction of character search; 1 for forward,
+				0 for backward
+		    until	type of character search; 1 for a |t| or |T|
+				character search, 0 for an |f| or |F|
+				character search
+
+		This can be useful to always have |;| and |,| search
+		forward/backward regardless of the direction of the previous
+		character search: >
+			:nnoremap <expr> ; getcharsearch().forward ? ';' : ','
+			:nnoremap <expr> , getcharsearch().forward ? ',' : ';'
+<		Also see |setcharsearch()|.
+
 getcmdline()						*getcmdline()*
 		Return the current command-line.  Only works when the command
 		line is being edited, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or
@@ -3381,7 +3574,7 @@ getcmdwintype()						*getcmdwintype()*
 							*getcurpos()*
 getcurpos()	Get the position of the cursor.  This is like getpos('.'), but
 		includes an extra item in the list:
-		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off, curswant]
+		    [bufnum, lnum, col, off, curswant] ~
 		The "curswant" number is the preferred column when moving the
 		cursor vertically.
 		This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: >
@@ -3390,8 +3583,16 @@ getcurpos()	Get the position of the cursor.  This is like getpos('.'), but
 			call setpos('.', save_cursor)
 <
 							*getcwd()*
-getcwd()	The result is a String, which is the name of the current
+getcwd([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])
+		The result is a String, which is the name of the current
 		working directory.
+		Without arguments, for the current window.
+
+		With {winnr} return the local current directory of this window
+		in the current tab page.
+		With {winnr} and {tabnr} return the local current directory of
+		the window in the specified tab page.
+		Return an empty string if the arguments are invalid.
 
 getfsize({fname})					*getfsize()*
 		The result is a Number, which is the size in bytes of the
@@ -3455,7 +3656,8 @@ getftype({fname})					*getftype()*
 			getftype("/home")
 <		Note that a type such as "link" will only be returned on
 		systems that support it.  On some systems only "dir" and
-		"file" are returned.
+		"file" are returned.  On MS-Windows a symbolic link to a
+		directory returns "dir" instead of "link".
 
 							*getline()*
 getline({lnum} [, {end}])
@@ -3679,7 +3881,9 @@ glob2regpat({expr})					 *glob2regpat()*
 			if filename =~ glob2regpat('Make*.mak')
 <		This is equivalent to: >
 			if filename =~ '^Make.*\.mak$'
-<
+<		When {expr} is an empty string the result is "^$", match an
+		empty string.
+
 								*globpath()*
 globpath({path}, {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list} [, {allinks}]]])
 		Perform glob() on all directories in {path} and concatenate
@@ -3727,9 +3931,15 @@ has_key({dict}, {key})					*has_key()*
 		The result is a Number, which is 1 if |Dictionary| {dict} has
 		an entry with key {key}.  Zero otherwise.
 
-haslocaldir()						*haslocaldir()*
-		The result is a Number, which is 1 when the current
-		window has set a local path via |:lcd|, and 0 otherwise.
+haslocaldir([{winnr} [, {tabnr}]])			*haslocaldir()*
+		The result is a Number, which is 1 when the window has set a
+		local path via |:lcd|, and 0 otherwise.
+
+		Without arguments use the current window.
+		With {winnr} use this window in the current tab page.
+		With {winnr} and {tabnr} use the window in the specified tab
+		page.
+		Return 0 if the arguments are invalid.
 
 hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])			*hasmapto()*
 		The result is a Number, which is 1 if there is a mapping that
@@ -4059,6 +4269,48 @@ join({list} [, {sep}])					*join()*
 		converted into a string like with |string()|.
 		The opposite function is |split()|.
 
+jsondecode({string})					*jsondecode()*
+		This parses a JSON formatted string and returns the equivalent
+		in Vim values.  See |jsonencode()| for the relation between
+		JSON and Vim values.
+		The decoding is permissive:
+		- A trailing comma in an array and object is ignored.
+		- An empty item in an array, two commas with nothing or white
+		  space in between, results in v:none.
+		- When an object member name is not a string it is converted
+		  to a string.  E.g. the number 123 is used as the string
+		  "123".
+		- More floating point numbers are recognized, e.g. "1." for
+		  "1.0".
+		The result must be a valid Vim type:
+		- An empty object member name is not allowed.
+		- Duplicate object member names are not allowed.
+
+jsonencode({expr})					*jsonencode()*
+		Encode {expr} as JSON and return this as a string.
+		The encoding is specified in:
+		https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7159.html
+		Vim values are converted as follows:
+		   Number		decimal number
+		   Float		floating point number
+		   String		in double quotes (possibly null)
+		   Funcref		not possible, error
+		   List			as an array (possibly null); when
+		   			used recursively: []
+		   Dict			as an object (possibly null); when
+		   			used recursively: {}
+		   v:false		"false"
+		   v:true		"true"
+		   v:none		nothing
+		   v:null		"null"
+		Note that using v:none is permitted, although the JSON
+		standard does not allow empty items.  This can be useful for
+		omitting items in an array:
+			[0,,,,,5] ~
+		This is much more efficient than:
+			[0,null,null,null,null,5] ~
+		But a strict JSON parser will not accept it.
+
 keys({dict})						*keys()*
 		Return a |List| with all the keys of {dict}.  The |List| is in
 		arbitrary order.
@@ -4386,7 +4638,7 @@ match({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])			*match()*
 		done like 'magic' is set and 'cpoptions' is empty.
 
 					*matchadd()* *E798* *E799* *E801*
-matchadd({group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]])
+matchadd({group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id} [, {dict}]]])
 		Defines a pattern to be highlighted in the current window (a
 		"match").  It will be highlighted with {group}.  Returns an
 		identification number (ID), which can be used to delete the
@@ -4394,6 +4646,8 @@ matchadd({group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]])
 		Matching is case sensitive and magic, unless case sensitivity
 		or magicness are explicitly overridden in {pattern}.  The
 		'magic', 'smartcase' and 'ignorecase' options are not used.
+		The "Conceal" value is special, it causes the match to be
+		concealed.
 
 		The optional {priority} argument assigns a priority to the
 		match.	A match with a high priority will have its
@@ -4411,9 +4665,18 @@ matchadd({group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]])
 		message will appear and the match will not be added.  An ID
 		is specified as a positive integer (zero excluded).  IDs 1, 2
 		and 3 are reserved for |:match|, |:2match| and |:3match|,
-		respectively.  If the {id} argument is not specified,
+		respectively.  If the {id} argument is not specified or -1,
 		|matchadd()| automatically chooses a free ID.
 
+		The optional {dict} argument allows for further custom
+		values. Currently this is used to specify a match specific
+		conceal character that will be shown for |hl-Conceal|
+		highlighted matches. The dict can have the following members:
+
+			conceal	    Special character to show instead of the
+				    match (only for |hl-Conceal| highlighed
+				    matches, see |:syn-cchar|)
+
 		The number of matches is not limited, as it is the case with
 		the |:match| commands.
 
@@ -4427,7 +4690,7 @@ matchadd({group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]])
 		available from |getmatches()|.	All matches can be deleted in
 		one operation by |clearmatches()|.
 
-matchaddpos({group}, {pos}[, {priority}[, {id}]])		*matchaddpos()*
+matchaddpos({group}, {pos}[, {priority}[, {id}[, {dict}]]])		*matchaddpos()*
 		Same as |matchadd()|, but requires a list of positions {pos}
 		instead of a pattern. This command is faster than |matchadd()|
 		because it does not require to handle regular expressions and
@@ -4636,6 +4899,17 @@ pathshorten({expr})					*pathshorten()*
 <			~/.v/a/myfile.vim ~
 		It doesn't matter if the path exists or not.
 
+perleval({expr})					*perleval()*
+		Evaluate Perl expression {expr} in scalar context and return
+		its result converted to Vim data structures. If value can't be
+		converted, it is returned as a string Perl representation.
+		Note: If you want an array or hash, {expr} must return a
+		reference to it.
+		Example: >
+			:echo perleval('[1 .. 4]')
+<			[1, 2, 3, 4]
+		{only available when compiled with the |+perl| feature}
+
 pow({x}, {y})						*pow()*
 		Return the power of {x} to the exponent {y} as a |Float|.
 		{x} and {y} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
@@ -4887,7 +5161,7 @@ readfile({fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
 		separated with CR will result in a single long line (unless a
 		NL appears somewhere).
 		All NUL characters are replaced with a NL character.
-		When {binary/append} contains "b" binary mode is used:
+		When {binary} contains "b" binary mode is used:
 		- When the last line ends in a NL an extra empty list item is
 		  added.
 		- No CR characters are removed.
@@ -5133,14 +5407,15 @@ search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])	*search()*
 		move.  No error message is given.
 
 		{flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
-		'b'	search backward instead of forward
-		'c'	accept a match at the cursor position
+		'b'	search Backward instead of forward
+		'c'	accept a match at the Cursor position
 		'e'	move to the End of the match
 		'n'	do Not move the cursor
-		'p'	return number of matching sub-pattern (see below)
-		's'	set the ' mark at the previous location of the cursor
-		'w'	wrap around the end of the file
-		'W'	don't wrap around the end of the file
+		'p'	return number of matching sub-Pattern (see below)
+		's'	Set the ' mark at the previous location of the cursor
+		'w'	Wrap around the end of the file
+		'W'	don't Wrap around the end of the file
+		'z'	start searching at the cursor column instead of zero
 		If neither 'w' or 'W' is given, the 'wrapscan' option applies.
 
 		If the 's' flag is supplied, the ' mark is set, only if the
@@ -5148,6 +5423,12 @@ search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])	*search()*
 		flag.
 
 		'ignorecase', 'smartcase' and 'magic' are used.
+		
+		When the 'z' flag is not given, searching always starts in
+		column zero and then matches before the cursor are skipped.
+		When the 'c' flag is present in 'cpo' the next search starts
+		after the match.  Without the 'c' flag the next search starts
+		one column further.
 
 		When the {stopline} argument is given then the search stops
 		after searching this line.  This is useful to restrict the
@@ -5334,6 +5615,23 @@ searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])	*searchpos()*
 <		In this example "submatch" is 2 when a lowercase letter is
 		found |/\l|, 3 when an uppercase letter is found |/\u|.
 
+sendexpr({handle}, {expr} [, {callback}])		*sendexpr()*
+		Send {expr} over JSON channel {handle}.  See |channel-use|.
+
+		When {callback} is given returns immediately.  Without
+		{callback} waits for a JSON response and returns the decoded
+		expression.  When there is an error or timeout returns an
+		empty string.
+
+		When {callback} is zero no response is expected.
+		Otherwise {callback} must be a Funcref or the name of a
+		function.  It is called when the response is received.  See
+		|channel-callback|.
+
+sendraw({handle}, {string} [, {callback}])		*sendraw()*
+		Send {string} over raw channel {handle}.  See |channel-raw|.
+		Works like |sendexpr()|, but does not decode the response.
+
 server2client( {clientid}, {string})			*server2client()*
 		Send a reply string to {clientid}.  The most recent {clientid}
 		that sent a string can be retrieved with expand("<client>").
@@ -5367,6 +5665,26 @@ setbufvar({expr}, {varname}, {val})			*setbufvar()*
 			:call setbufvar("todo", "myvar", "foobar")
 <		This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
 
+setcharsearch({dict})					*setcharsearch()*
+		Set the current character search information to {dict},
+		which contains one or more of the following entries:
+
+		    char	character which will be used for a subsequent
+				|,| or |;| command; an empty string clears the
+				character search
+		    forward	direction of character search; 1 for forward,
+				0 for backward
+		    until	type of character search; 1 for a |t| or |T|
+				character search, 0 for an |f| or |F|
+				character search
+
+		This can be useful to save/restore a user's character search
+		from a script: >
+			:let prevsearch = getcharsearch()
+			:" Perform a command which clobbers user's search
+			:call setcharsearch(prevsearch)
+<		Also see |getcharsearch()|.
+
 setcmdpos({pos})					*setcmdpos()*
 		Set the cursor position in the command line to byte position
 		{pos}.	The first position is 1.
@@ -5616,18 +5934,8 @@ shellescape({string} [, {special}])			*shellescape()*
 shiftwidth()						*shiftwidth()*
 		Returns the effective value of 'shiftwidth'. This is the
 		'shiftwidth' value unless it is zero, in which case it is the
-		'tabstop' value.  To be backwards compatible in indent
-		plugins, use this: >
-			if exists('*shiftwidth')
-			  func s:sw()
-			    return shiftwidth()
-			  endfunc
-			else
-			  func s:sw()
-			    return &sw
-			  endfunc
-			endif
-<		And then use s:sw() instead of &sw.
+		'tabstop' value.  This function was introduced with patch
+		7.3.694 in 2012, everybody should have it by now.
 
 
 simplify({filename})					*simplify()*
@@ -5688,6 +5996,13 @@ sort({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]])			*sort()* *E702*
 		strtod() function to parse numbers, Strings, Lists, Dicts and
 		Funcrefs will be considered as being 0).
 
+		When {func} is given and it is 'N' then all items will be
+		sorted numerical. This is like 'n' but a string containing
+		digits will be used as the number they represent.
+
+		When {func} is given and it is 'f' then all items will be
+		sorted numerical. All values must be a Number or a Float.
+
 		When {func} is a |Funcref| or a function name, this function
 		is called to compare items.  The function is invoked with two
 		items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 or
@@ -5789,7 +6104,8 @@ split({expr} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]])			*split()*
 			:let words = split(getline('.'), '\W\+')
 <		To split a string in individual characters: >
 			:for c in split(mystring, '\zs')
-<		If you want to keep the separator you can also use '\zs': >
+<		If you want to keep the separator you can also use '\zs' at
+		the end of the pattern: >
 			:echo split('abc:def:ghi', ':\zs')
 <			['abc:', 'def:', 'ghi'] ~
 		Splitting a table where the first element can be empty: >
@@ -5828,24 +6144,46 @@ str2float( {expr})					*str2float()*
 
 str2nr( {expr} [, {base}])				*str2nr()*
 		Convert string {expr} to a number.
-		{base} is the conversion base, it can be 8, 10 or 16.
+		{base} is the conversion base, it can be 2, 8, 10 or 16.
 		When {base} is omitted base 10 is used.  This also means that
 		a leading zero doesn't cause octal conversion to be used, as
 		with the default String to Number conversion.
 		When {base} is 16 a leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored.  With a
-		different base the result will be zero.
+		different base the result will be zero.  Similarly, when
+		{base} is 8 a leading "0" is ignored, and when {base} is 2 a
+		leading "0b" or "0B" is ignored.
 		Text after the number is silently ignored.
 
 
-strchars({expr})					*strchars()*
+strchars({expr} [, {skipcc}])					*strchars()*
 		The result is a Number, which is the number of characters
-		String {expr} occupies.  Composing characters are counted
-		separately.
+		in String {expr}.
+		When {skipcc} is omitted or zero, composing characters are
+		counted separately.
+		When {skipcc} set to 1, Composing characters are ignored.
 		Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|.
 
+		
+		{skipcc} is only available after 7.4.755.  For backward
+		compatibility, you can define a wrapper function: >
+		    if has("patch-7.4.755")
+		      function s:strchars(str, skipcc)
+			return strchars(a:str, a:skipcc)
+		      endfunction
+		    else
+		      function s:strchars(str, skipcc)
+			if a:skipcc
+			  return strlen(substitute(a:str, ".", "x", "g"))
+			else
+			  return strchars(a:str)
+			endif
+		      endfunction
+		    endif
+<
+
 strdisplaywidth({expr}[, {col}])			*strdisplaywidth()*
 		The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells
-		String {expr} occupies on the screen when it starts a {col}.
+		String {expr} occupies on the screen when it starts at {col}.
 		When {col} is omitted zero is used.  Otherwise it is the
 		screen column where to start.  This matters for Tab
 		characters.
@@ -5911,15 +6249,11 @@ string({expr})	Return {expr} converted to a String.  If {expr} is a Number,
 							*strlen()*
 strlen({expr})	The result is a Number, which is the length of the String
 		{expr} in bytes.
-		If you want to count the number of multi-byte characters (not
-		counting composing characters) use something like this: >
-
-			:let len = strlen(substitute(str, ".", "x", "g"))
-<
 		If the argument is a Number it is first converted to a String.
 		For other types an error is given.
-		Also see |len()|, |strchars()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and
-		|strwidth()|.
+		If you want to count the number of multi-byte characters use
+		|strchars()|.
+		Also see |len()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|.
 
 strpart({src}, {start}[, {len}])			*strpart()*
 		The result is a String, which is part of {src}, starting from
@@ -6033,6 +6367,9 @@ synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans})				*synID()*
 
 		{col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first
 		line.  'synmaxcol' applies, in a longer line zero is returned.
+		Note that when the position is after the last character,
+		that's where the cursor can be in Insert mode, synID() returns
+		zero.
 
 		When {trans} is non-zero, transparent items are reduced to the
 		item that they reveal.	This is useful when wanting to know
@@ -6342,6 +6679,8 @@ type({expr})	The result is a Number, depending on the type of {expr}:
 			List:	    3
 			Dictionary: 4
 			Float:	    5
+			Boolean:    6 (v:false and v:true)
+			None	    7 (v:null and v:none)
 		To avoid the magic numbers it should be used this way: >
 			:if type(myvar) == type(0)
 			:if type(myvar) == type("")
@@ -6349,6 +6688,8 @@ type({expr})	The result is a Number, depending on the type of {expr}:
 			:if type(myvar) == type([])
 			:if type(myvar) == type({})
 			:if type(myvar) == type(0.0)
+			:if type(myvar) == type(v:false)
+			:if type(myvar) == type(v:none
 
 undofile({name})					*undofile()*
 		Return the name of the undo file that would be used for a file
@@ -6594,6 +6935,28 @@ winwidth({nr})						*winwidth()*
   :  exe "normal 50\<C-W>|"
   :endif
 <
+wordcount()						*wordcount()*
+		The result is a dictionary of byte/chars/word statistics for
+		the current buffer.  This is the same info as provided by
+		|g_CTRL-G|
+		The return value includes:
+			bytes		Number of bytes in the buffer
+			chars		Number of chars in the buffer
+			words		Number of words in the buffer
+			cursor_bytes    Number of bytes before cursor position
+					(not in Visual mode)
+			cursor_chars    Number of chars before cursor position
+					(not in Visual mode)
+			cursor_words    Number of words before cursor position
+					(not in Visual mode)
+			visual_bytes    Number of bytes visually selected
+			                (only in Visual mode)
+			visual_chars    Number of chars visually selected
+			                (only in Visual mode)
+			visual_words    Number of chars visually selected
+			                (only in Visual mode)
+
+
 							*writefile()*
 writefile({list}, {fname} [, {flags}])
 		Write |List| {list} to file {fname}.  Each list item is
@@ -6692,7 +7055,7 @@ ebcdic			Compiled on a machine with ebcdic character set.
 emacs_tags		Compiled with support for Emacs tags.
 eval			Compiled with expression evaluation support.  Always
 			true, of course!
-ex_extra		Compiled with extra Ex commands |+ex_extra|.
+ex_extra		|+ex_extra|, always true now
 extra_search		Compiled with support for |'incsearch'| and
 			|'hlsearch'|
 farsi			Compiled with Farsi support |farsi|.
@@ -7437,7 +7800,7 @@ This does NOT work: >
 			From Vim version 4.5 until 5.0, every Ex command in
 			between the ":if" and ":endif" is ignored.  These two
 			commands were just to allow for future expansions in a
-			backwards compatible way.  Nesting was allowed.  Note
+			backward compatible way.  Nesting was allowed.  Note
 			that any ":else" or ":elseif" was ignored, the "else"
 			part was not executed either.
 

runtime/doc/farsi.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*farsi.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2010 Aug 07
+*farsi.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Aug 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Mortaza Ghassab Shiran
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ o  Toggling between Farsi ISIR-3342 standard encoding and Vim Farsi via F9
    right-to-left mode, this function is also supported only in right-to-left
    mode.
 
-Farsi Fonts					*farsi fonts*
+Farsi Fonts					*farsi-fonts*
 -----------
 
 The following files are found in the subdirectories of the '$VIM/farsi/fonts'

runtime/doc/filetype.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Dec 15
+*filetype.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Dec 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ Local mappings:
 	to the end of the file in Normal mode.  This means "> " is inserted in
 	each line.
 
-MAN							*ft-man-plugin* *:Man*
+MAN					*ft-man-plugin* *:Man* *man.vim*
 
 Displays a manual page in a nice way.  Also see the user manual
 |find-manpage|.
@@ -577,6 +577,13 @@ Global mapping:
 Local mappings:
 CTRL-]		Jump to the manual page for the word under the cursor.
 CTRL-T		Jump back to the previous manual page.
+q		Same as ":quit"
+
+To enable folding use this: >
+  	let g:ft_man_folding_enable = 1
+If you do not like the default folding, use an autocommand to add your desired
+folding style instead.  For example: >
+        autocmd FileType man setlocal foldmethod=indent foldenable
 
 
 PDF							*ft-pdf-plugin*

runtime/doc/fold.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*fold.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Dec 04
+*fold.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -97,9 +97,9 @@ These are the conditions with which the expression is evaluated:
 			lowest.
   "="			use fold level from the previous line
   "a1", "a2", ..	add one, two, .. to the fold level of the previous
-			line
+			line, use the result for the current line
   "s1", "s2", ..	subtract one, two, .. from the fold level of the
-			previous line
+			previous line, use the result for the next line
   "<1", "<2", ..	a fold with this level ends at this line
   ">1", ">2", ..	a fold with this level starts at this line
 
@@ -122,6 +122,18 @@ method can be very slow!
 Try to avoid the "=", "a" and "s" return values, since Vim often has to search
 backwards for a line for which the fold level is defined.  This can be slow.
 
+An example of using "a1" and "s1": For a multi-line C comment, a line
+containing "/*" would return "a1" to start a fold, and a line containing "*/"
+would return "s1" to end the fold after that line: >
+  if match(thisline, '/\*') >= 0
+    return 'a1'
+  elseif match(thisline, '\*/') >= 0
+    return 's1'
+  else
+    return '='
+  endif
+However, this won't work for single line comments, strings, etc.
+
 |foldlevel()| can be useful to compute a fold level relative to a previous
 fold level.  But note that foldlevel() may return -1 if the level is not known
 yet.  And it returns the level at the start of the line, while a fold might
@@ -365,7 +377,7 @@ zX		Undo manually opened and closed folds: re-apply 'foldlevel'.
 		Also forces recomputing folds, like |zx|.
 
 							*zm*
-zm		Fold more: Subtract one from 'foldlevel'.  If 'foldlevel' was
+zm		Fold more: Subtract |v:count1| from 'foldlevel'.  If 'foldlevel' was
 		already zero nothing happens.
 		'foldenable' will be set.
 
@@ -374,7 +386,7 @@ zM		Close all folds: set 'foldlevel' to 0.
 		'foldenable' will be set.
 
 							*zr*
-zr		Reduce folding: Add one to 'foldlevel'.
+zr		Reduce folding: Add |v:count1| to 'foldlevel'.
 
 							*zR*
 zR		Open all folds.  This sets 'foldlevel' to highest fold level.
@@ -573,8 +585,9 @@ what you type!
 When using an operator, a closed fold is included as a whole.  Thus "dl"
 deletes the whole closed fold under the cursor.
 
-For Ex commands the range is adjusted to always start at the first line of a
-closed fold and end at the last line of a closed fold.  Thus this command: >
+For Ex commands that work on buffer lines the range is adjusted to always
+start at the first line of a closed fold and end at the last line of a closed
+fold.  Thus this command: >
 	:s/foo/bar/g
 when used with the cursor on a closed fold, will replace "foo" with "bar" in
 all lines of the fold.

runtime/doc/hangulin.txt

@@ -1,11 +1,8 @@
-*hangulin.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2009 Jun 24
+*hangulin.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Nov 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Chi-Deok Hwang and Sung-Hyun Nam
 
-NOTE: The |+hangul_input| feature is scheduled to be removed.  If you want to
-keep it, please send a message to the Vim user maillist.
-
 
 Introduction					*hangul*
 ------------
@@ -17,7 +14,8 @@ Compile
 -------
 Next is a basic option.  You can add any other configure option. >
 
-   ./configure --with-x --enable-multibyte --enable-fontset --enable-hangulinput
+   ./configure --with-x --enable-multibyte --enable-hangulinput \
+            --disable-xim
 
 And you should check feature.h.  If |+hangul_input| feature is enabled
 by configure, you can select more options such as keyboard type, 2 bulsik
@@ -26,18 +24,21 @@ or 3 bulsik.  You can find keywords like next in there. >
 	#define HANGUL_DEFAULT_KEYBOARD 2
 	#define ESC_CHG_TO_ENG_MODE
 	/* #define X_LOCALE */
-	/* #define SLOW_XSERVER */
 
 Environment variables
 ---------------------
-You should set LANG variable to Korean locale such as ko or ko_KR.euc.
+You should set LANG variable to Korean locale such as ko, ko_KR.eucKR
+or ko_KR.UTF-8.
 If you set LC_ALL variable, it should be set to Korean locale also.
 
 VIM resource
 ------------
-You should add nexts to your global vimrc ($HOME/.vimrc). >
+You may want to set 'encoding' and 'fileencodings'.
+Next are examples: >
 
-	:set fileencoding=korea
+	:set encoding=euc-kr
+	:set encoding=utf-8
+	:set fileencodings=ucs-bom,utf-8,cp949,euc-kr,latin1
 
 Keyboard
 --------
@@ -52,8 +53,16 @@ If both are set, VIM_KEYBOARD has higher priority.
 
 Hangul Fonts
 ------------
-You can set text font using $HOME/.Xdefaults or in your gvimrc file.
-But to use Hangul, you should set 'guifontset' in your vimrc.
+If you use GTK version of GVIM, you should set 'guifont' and 'guifontwide'.
+For example: >
+    set guifont=Courier\ 12
+    set guifontwide=NanumGothicCoding\ 12
+
+If you use Motif or Athena version of GVIM, you should set 'guifontset' in
+your vimrc.  You can set fontset in the .Xdefaults file.
+
+$HOME/.gvimrc: >
+    set guifontset=english_font,hangul_font
 
 $HOME/.Xdefaults: >
     Vim.font: english_font
@@ -66,40 +75,38 @@ $HOME/.Xdefaults: >
     *international: True
     Vim*fontList: english_font;hangul_font:
 
-$HOME/.gvimrc: >
-    set guifontset=english_font,hangul_font
-
 attention! the , (comma) or ; (semicolon)
 
 And there should be no ':set guifont'.  If it exists, then Gvim ignores
 ':set guifontset'.  It means VIM runs without fontset supporting.
 So, you can see only English.  Hangul does not be correctly displayed.
 
-After 'fontset' feature is enabled, VIM does not allow using 'font'.
+After 'fontset' feature is enabled, VIM does not allow using english
+font only in 'font' setting for syntax.
 For example, if you use >
    :set guifontset=eng_font,your_font
 in your .gvimrc, then you should do for syntax >
    :hi Comment guifg=Cyan font=another_eng_font,another_your_font
 If you just do >
    :hi Comment font=another_eng_font
-then you can see a GOOD error message.  Be careful!
+then you can see a error message.  Be careful!
 
 hangul_font width should be twice than english_font width.
 
 Unsupported Feature
 -------------------
-Johab font not yet supported.  And I don't have any plan.
-If you really want to use johab font, you can use the
-hanguldraw.c in gau package.
+We don't support Johab font.
+We don't support Hanja input.
+And We don't have any plan to support them.
 
-Hanja input not yet supported.  And I don't have any plan.
-If you really want to input hanja, just use VIM with hanterm.
+If you really need such features, you can use console version of VIM with a
+capable terminal emulator.
 
 Bug or Comment
 --------------
 Send comments, patches and suggestions to:
 
-				    Chi-Deok Hwang <hwang@mizi.co.kr>
 				    SungHyun Nam <goweol@gmail.com>
+				    Chi-Deok Hwang <...>
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/help.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2012 Dec 06
+*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 10
 
 			VIM - main help file
 									 k
@@ -10,20 +10,23 @@ Close this window:  Use ":q<Enter>".
 Jump to a subject:  Position the cursor on a tag (e.g. |bars|) and hit CTRL-].
    With the mouse:  ":set mouse=a" to enable the mouse (in xterm or GUI).
 		    Double-click the left mouse button on a tag, e.g. |bars|.
-	Jump back:  Type CTRL-T or CTRL-O (repeat to go further back).
+	Jump back:  Type CTRL-T or CTRL-O.  Repeat to go further back.
 
 Get specific help:  It is possible to go directly to whatever you want help
 		    on, by giving an argument to the |:help| command.
-		    It is possible to further specify the context:
-							*help-context*
+		    Prepend something to specify the context:  *help-context*
+
 			  WHAT			PREPEND    EXAMPLE	~
-		      Normal mode command      (nothing)   :help x
+		      Normal mode command		   :help x
 		      Visual mode command	  v_	   :help v_u
 		      Insert mode command	  i_	   :help i_<Esc>
 		      Command-line command	  :	   :help :quit
 		      Command-line editing	  c_	   :help c_<Del>
 		      Vim command argument	  -	   :help -r
 		      Option			  '	   :help 'textwidth'
+		      Regular expression	  /	   :help /[
+		    See |help-summary| for more contexts and an explanation.
+
   Search for help:  Type ":help word", then hit CTRL-D to see matching
 		    help entries for "word".
 		    Or use ":helpgrep word". |:helpgrep|
@@ -196,6 +199,7 @@ Remarks about specific systems ~
 Standard plugins ~
 |pi_getscript.txt| Downloading latest version of Vim scripts
 |pi_gzip.txt|      Reading and writing compressed files
+|pi_logipat.txt|   Logical operators on patterns
 |pi_netrw.txt|     Reading and writing files over a network
 |pi_paren.txt|     Highlight matching parens
 |pi_tar.txt|       Tar file explorer

runtime/doc/if_lua.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_lua.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Sep 04
+*if_lua.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Oct 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Luis Carvalho
@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ The Lua Interface to Vim				*lua* *Lua*
 6. Buffer userdata		|lua-buffer|
 7. Window userdata		|lua-window|
 8. The luaeval function		|lua-luaeval|
+9. Dynamic loading		|lua-dynamic|
 
 {Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
@@ -399,5 +400,24 @@ Examples: >
 	:echo Rand(1,10)
 
 
+==============================================================================
+9. Dynamic loading				    *lua-dynamic*
+
+On MS-Windows and Unix the Lua library can be loaded dynamically.  The
+|:version| output then includes |+lua/dyn|.
+
+This means that Vim will search for the Lua DLL or shared library file only
+when needed.  When you don't use the Lua interface you don't need it, thus
+you can use Vim without this file.
+
+On MS-Windows to use the Lua interface the Lua DLL must be in your search path.
+In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.  The version
+of the DLL must match the Lua version Vim was compiled with.
+
+On Unix the 'luadll' option can be used to specify the Lua shared library file
+instead of DYNAMIC_LUA_DLL file what was specified at compile time.  The
+version of the shared library must match the Lua version Vim was compiled with.
+
+
 ==============================================================================
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/if_mzsch.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2012 Dec 17
+*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sergey Khorev
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ The MzScheme Interface to Vim				*mzscheme* *MzScheme*
 5. mzeval() Vim function		|mzscheme-mzeval|
 6. Using Function references		|mzscheme-funcref|
 7. Dynamic loading			|mzscheme-dynamic|
+8. MzScheme setup			|mzscheme-setup|
 
 {Vi does not have any of these commands}
 
@@ -264,7 +265,7 @@ directly from Scheme. For instance: >
 <
 
 ==============================================================================
-7. Dynamic loading				    *mzscheme-dynamic* *E815*
+7. Dynamic loading				*mzscheme-dynamic* *E815*
 
 On MS-Windows the MzScheme libraries can be loaded dynamically. The |:version|
 output then includes |+mzscheme/dyn|.
@@ -272,6 +273,9 @@ output then includes |+mzscheme/dyn|.
 This means that Vim will search for the MzScheme DLL files only when needed.
 When you don't use the MzScheme interface you don't need them, thus you can
 use Vim without these DLL files.
+NOTE: Newer version of MzScheme (Racket) require earlier (trampolined)
+initialisation via scheme_main_setup.  So Vim always loads the MzScheme DLL at
+startup if possible.
 
 To use the MzScheme interface the MzScheme DLLs must be in your search path.
 In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
@@ -282,5 +286,24 @@ For MzScheme version 209 they will be "libmzsch209_000.dll" and
 command, look for -DDYNAMIC_MZSCH_DLL="something" and
 -DDYNAMIC_MZGC_DLL="something" in the "Compilation" info.
 
+For example, if MzScheme (Racket) is installed at C:\Racket63, you may need
+to set the environment variable as the following: >
+
+  PATH=%PATH%;C:\Racket63\lib
+  PLTCOLLECTS=C:\Racket63\collects
+  PLTCONFIGDIR=C:\Racket63\etc
+<
+==============================================================================
+8. MzScheme setup				    *mzscheme-setup* *E895*
+
+Vim requires "racket/base" module for if_mzsch core (fallback to "scheme/base"
+if it doesn't exist), "r5rs" module for test and "raco ctool" command for
+building Vim.  If MzScheme did not have them, you can install them with
+MzScheme's raco command:
+>
+  raco pkg install scheme-lib       # scheme/base module
+  raco pkg install r5rs-lib         # r5rs module
+  raco pkg install cext-lib         # raco ctool command
+<
 ======================================================================
   vim:tw=78:ts=8:sts=4:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/if_perl.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Oct 05
+*if_perl.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Oct 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sven Verdoolaege
@@ -290,5 +290,13 @@ The name of the DLL must match the Perl version Vim was compiled with.
 Currently the name is "perl512.dll".  That is for Perl 5.12.  To know for
 sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "perl\d*.dll\c".
 
+
+Unix ~
+
+The 'perldll' option can be used to specify the Perl shared library file
+instead of DYNAMIC_PERL_DLL file what was specified at compile time.  The
+version of the shared library must match the Perl version Vim was compiled
+with.
+
 ==============================================================================
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/if_pyth.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Jul 23
+*if_pyth.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Nov 10
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore
@@ -679,20 +679,26 @@ functions to evaluate Python expressions and pass their values to VimL.
 ==============================================================================
 9. Dynamic loading					*python-dynamic*
 
-On MS-Windows the Python library can be loaded dynamically.  The |:version|
-output then includes |+python/dyn|.
+On MS-Windows and Unix the Python library can be loaded dynamically.  The
+|:version| output then includes |+python/dyn| or |+python3/dyn|.
 
-This means that Vim will search for the Python DLL file only when needed.
-When you don't use the Python interface you don't need it, thus you can use
-Vim without this DLL file.
+This means that Vim will search for the Python DLL or shared library file only
+when needed.  When you don't use the Python interface you don't need it, thus
+you can use Vim without this file.
 
-To use the Python interface the Python DLL must be in your search path.  In a
-console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
+On MS-Windows to use the Python interface the Python DLL must be in your search
+path.  In a console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
 
 The name of the DLL must match the Python version Vim was compiled with.
 Currently the name is "python24.dll".  That is for Python 2.4.  To know for
 sure edit "gvim.exe" and search for "python\d*.dll\c".
 
+On Unix the 'pythondll' or 'pythonthreedll' option can be used to specify the
+Python shared library file instead of DYNAMIC_PYTHON_DLL or
+DYNAMIC_PYTHON3_DLL file what were specified at compile time.  The version of
+the shared library must match the Python 2.x or Python 3 version Vim was
+compiled with.
+
 ==============================================================================
 10. Python 3						*python3*
 

runtime/doc/if_ruby.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Feb 22
+*if_ruby.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Dec 03
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Shugo Maeda
@@ -7,9 +7,9 @@ The Ruby Interface to Vim				*ruby* *Ruby*
 
 
 1. Commands			|ruby-commands|
-2. The VIM module		|ruby-vim|
-3. VIM::Buffer objects		|ruby-buffer|
-4. VIM::Window objects		|ruby-window|
+2. The Vim module		|ruby-vim|
+3. Vim::Buffer objects		|ruby-buffer|
+4. Vim::Window objects		|ruby-window|
 5. Global variables		|ruby-globals|
 6. Dynamic loading		|ruby-dynamic|
 
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Example Vim script: >
 	ruby << EOF
 	class Garnet
 		def initialize(s)
-			@buffer = VIM::Buffer.current
+			@buffer = Vim::Buffer.current
 			vimputs(s)
 		end
 		def vimputs(s)
@@ -74,19 +74,19 @@ Example Vim script: >
 Executing Ruby commands is not possible in the |sandbox|.
 
 ==============================================================================
-2. The VIM module					*ruby-vim*
+2. The Vim module					*ruby-vim*
 
-Ruby code gets all of its access to vim via the "VIM" module.
+Ruby code gets all of its access to vim via the "Vim" module.
 
-Overview >
+Overview: >
 	print "Hello"			      # displays a message
-	VIM.command(cmd)		      # execute an Ex command
-	num = VIM::Window.count		      # gets the number of windows
-	w = VIM::Window[n]		      # gets window "n"
-	cw = VIM::Window.current	      # gets the current window
-	num = VIM::Buffer.count		      # gets the number of buffers
-	b = VIM::Buffer[n]		      # gets buffer "n"
-	cb = VIM::Buffer.current	      # gets the current buffer
+	Vim.command(cmd)		      # execute an Ex command
+	num = Vim::Window.count		      # gets the number of windows
+	w = Vim::Window[n]		      # gets window "n"
+	cw = Vim::Window.current	      # gets the current window
+	num = Vim::Buffer.count		      # gets the number of buffers
+	b = Vim::Buffer[n]		      # gets buffer "n"
+	cb = Vim::Buffer.current	      # gets the current buffer
 	w.height = lines		      # sets the window height
 	w.cursor = [row, col]		      # sets the window cursor position
 	pos = w.cursor			      # gets an array [row, col]
@@ -96,29 +96,29 @@ Overview >
 	b[n] = str			      # sets a line in the buffer
 	b.delete(n)			      # deletes a line
 	b.append(n, str)		      # appends a line after n
-	line = VIM::Buffer.current.line       # gets the current line
-	num = VIM::Buffer.current.line_number # gets the current line number
-	VIM::Buffer.current.line = "test"     # sets the current line number
+	line = Vim::Buffer.current.line       # gets the current line
+	num = Vim::Buffer.current.line_number # gets the current line number
+	Vim::Buffer.current.line = "test"     # sets the current line number
 <
 
 Module Functions:
 
 							*ruby-message*
-VIM::message({msg})
+Vim::message({msg})
 	Displays the message {msg}.
 
 							*ruby-set_option*
-VIM::set_option({arg})
+Vim::set_option({arg})
 	Sets a vim option.  {arg} can be any argument that the ":set" command
 	accepts.  Note that this means that no spaces are allowed in the
 	argument!  See |:set|.
 
 							*ruby-command*
-VIM::command({cmd})
+Vim::command({cmd})
 	Executes Ex command {cmd}.
 
 							*ruby-evaluate*
-VIM::evaluate({expr})
+Vim::evaluate({expr})
 	Evaluates {expr} using the vim internal expression evaluator (see
 	|expression|).  Returns the expression result as:
 	- a Integer if the Vim expression evaluates to a number
@@ -129,9 +129,9 @@ VIM::evaluate({expr})
 	Dictionaries and lists are recursively expanded.
 
 ==============================================================================
-3. VIM::Buffer objects					*ruby-buffer*
+3. Vim::Buffer objects					*ruby-buffer*
 
-VIM::Buffer objects represent vim buffers.
+Vim::Buffer objects represent vim buffers.
 
 Class Methods:
 
@@ -159,9 +159,9 @@ line_number     Returns the number of the current line if the buffer is
 		active.
 
 ==============================================================================
-4. VIM::Window objects					*ruby-window*
+4. Vim::Window objects					*ruby-window*
 
-VIM::Window objects represent vim windows.
+Vim::Window objects represent vim windows.
 
 Class Methods:
 
@@ -199,6 +199,8 @@ This means that Vim will search for the Ruby DLL file or shared library only
 when needed.  When you don't use the Ruby interface you don't need it, thus
 you can use Vim even though this library file is not on your system.
 
+MS-Windows ~
+
 You need to install the right version of Ruby for this to work.  You can find
 the package to download from:
 http://www.garbagecollect.jp/ruby/mswin32/en/download/release.html
@@ -216,5 +218,12 @@ and comment-out the check for _MSC_VER.
 You may also need to rename the include directory name to match the version,
 strangely for Ruby 1.9.3 the directory is called 1.9.1.
 
+Unix ~
+
+The 'rubydll' option can be used to specify the Ruby shared library file
+instead of DYNAMIC_RUBY_DLL file what was specified at compile time.  The
+version of the shared library must match the Ruby version Vim was compiled
+with.
+
 ==============================================================================
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/if_tcl.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2012 Aug 02
+*if_tcl.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Ingo Wilken
@@ -515,19 +515,29 @@ startup file (usually "~/.vimrc" on Unix):
 ==============================================================================
 9. Dynamic loading					*tcl-dynamic*
 
-On MS-Windows the Tcl library can be loaded dynamically.  The |:version|
-output then includes |+tcl/dyn|.
+On MS-Windows and Unix the Tcl library can be loaded dynamically.  The
+|:version| output then includes |+tcl/dyn|.
 
-This means that Vim will search for the Tcl DLL file only when needed.  When
-you don't use the Tcl interface you don't need it, thus you can use Vim
-without this DLL file.
+This means that Vim will search for the Tcl DLL or shared library file only
+when needed.  When you don't use the Tcl interface you don't need it, thus you
+can use Vim without this file.
+
+
+MS-Windows ~
 
 To use the Tcl interface the Tcl DLL must be in your search path.  In a
 console window type "path" to see what directories are used.
 
 The name of the DLL must match the Tcl version Vim was compiled with.
-Currently the name is "tcl83.dll".  That is for Tcl 8.3.  To know for sure
+Currently the name is "tcl86.dll".  That is for Tcl 8.6.  To know for sure
 edit "gvim.exe" and search for "tcl\d*.dll\c".
 
+
+Unix ~
+
+The 'tcldll' option can be used to specify the Tcl shared library file instead
+of DYNAMIC_TCL_DLL file what was specified at compile time.  The version of
+the shared library must match the Tcl version Vim was compiled with.
+
 ==============================================================================
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/index.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Feb 12
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 19
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1055,7 +1055,7 @@ tag		command	      action in Command-line editing mode	~
 |c_<Insert>|	<Insert>	toggle insert/overstrike mode
 |c_<LeftMouse>|	<LeftMouse>	cursor at mouse click
 
-You found it, Arthur!				*holy-grail*
+You found it, Arthur!				*holy-grail* *:smile*
 
 ==============================================================================
 5. EX commands					*ex-cmd-index* *:index*
@@ -1138,6 +1138,8 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:cc|		:cc		go to specific error
 |:cclose|	:ccl[ose]	close quickfix window
 |:cd|		:cd		change directory
+|:cdo|		:cdo		execute command in each valid error list entry
+|:cfdo|		:cfd[o]		execute command in each file in error list
 |:center|	:ce[nter]	format lines at the center
 |:cexpr|	:cex[pr]	read errors from expr and jump to first
 |:cfile|	:cf[ile]	read file with error messages and jump to first
@@ -1174,7 +1176,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:cpfile|	:cpf[ile]	go to last error in previous file
 |:cquit|	:cq[uit]	quit Vim with an error code
 |:crewind|	:cr[ewind]	go to the specified error, default first one
-|:cscope|	:cs[cope]       execute cscope command
+|:cscope|	:cs[cope]	execute cscope command
 |:cstag|	:cst[ag]	use cscope to jump to a tag
 |:cunmap|	:cu[nmap]	like ":unmap" but for Command-line mode
 |:cunabbrev|	:cuna[bbrev]	like ":unabbrev" but for Command-line mode
@@ -1295,7 +1297,9 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:lcd|		:lc[d]		change directory locally
 |:lchdir|	:lch[dir]	change directory locally
 |:lclose|	:lcl[ose]	close location window
-|:lcscope|	:lcs[cope]      like ":cscope" but uses location list
+|:lcscope|	:lcs[cope]	like ":cscope" but uses location list
+|:ldo|		:ld[o]		execute command in valid location list entries
+|:lfdo|		:lfd[o]		execute command in each file in location list
 |:left|		:le[ft]		left align lines
 |:leftabove|	:lefta[bove]	make split window appear left or above
 |:let|		:let		assign a value to a variable or option
@@ -1347,7 +1351,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:marks|	:marks		list all marks
 |:match|	:mat[ch]	define a match to highlight
 |:menu|		:me[nu]		enter a new menu item
-|:menutranslate| :menut[ranslate] add a menu translation item
+|:menutranslate|  :menut[ranslate] add a menu translation item
 |:messages|	:mes[sages]	view previously displayed messages
 |:mkexrc|	:mk[exrc]	write current mappings and settings to a file
 |:mksession|	:mks[ession]	write session info to a file
@@ -1491,6 +1495,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:smap|		:smap		like ":map" but for Select mode
 |:smapclear|	:smapc[lear]	remove all mappings for Select mode
 |:smenu|	:sme[nu]	add menu for Select mode
+|:smile|	:smi[le]	make the user happy
 |:snext|	:sn[ext]	split window and go to next file in the
 				argument list
 |:sniff|	:sni[ff]	send request to sniff
@@ -1513,7 +1518,7 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:stop|		:st[op]		suspend the editor or escape to a shell
 |:stag|		:sta[g]		split window and jump to a tag
 |:startinsert|	:star[tinsert]	start Insert mode
-|:startgreplace| :startg[replace] start Virtual Replace mode
+|:startgreplace|  :startg[replace] start Virtual Replace mode
 |:startreplace|	:startr[eplace]	start Replace mode
 |:stopinsert|	:stopi[nsert]	stop Insert mode
 |:stjump|	:stj[ump]	do ":tjump" and split window
@@ -1534,14 +1539,14 @@ tag	      command	      action ~
 |:tabdo|	:tabdo		execute command in each tab page
 |:tabedit|	:tabe[dit]	edit a file in a new tab page
 |:tabfind|	:tabf[ind]	find file in 'path', edit it in a new tab page
-|:tabfirst|	:tabfir[st]	got to first tab page
-|:tablast|	:tabl[ast]	got to last tab page
+|:tabfirst|	:tabfir[st]	go to first tab page
+|:tablast|	:tabl[ast]	go to last tab page
 |:tabmove|	:tabm[ove]	move tab page to other position
 |:tabnew|	:tabnew		edit a file in a new tab page
 |:tabnext|	:tabn[ext]	go to next tab page
 |:tabonly|	:tabo[nly]	close all tab pages except the current one
 |:tabprevious|	:tabp[revious]	go to previous tab page
-|:tabrewind|	:tabr[ewind]	got to first tab page
+|:tabrewind|	:tabr[ewind]	go to first tab page
 |:tabs|		:tabs		list the tab pages and what they contain
 |:tab|		:tab		create new tab when opening new window
 |:tag|		:ta[g]		jump to tag

runtime/doc/insert.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 04
+*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 31
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -81,9 +81,11 @@ CTRL-W		Delete the word before the cursor (see |i_backspacing| about
 		joining lines).  See the section "word motions",
 		|word-motions|, for the definition of a word.
 						*i_CTRL-U*
-CTRL-U		Delete all entered characters in the current line (see
-		|i_backspacing| about joining lines).
-
+CTRL-U		Delete all entered characters before the cursor in the current
+		line.  If there are no newly entered characters and
+		'backspace' is not empty, delete all characters before the
+		cursor in the current line.
+		See |i_backspacing| about joining lines.
 						*i_CTRL-I* *i_<Tab>* *i_Tab*
 <Tab> or CTRL-I Insert a tab.  If the 'expandtab' option is on, the
 		equivalent number of spaces is inserted (use CTRL-V <Tab> to
@@ -150,7 +152,7 @@ CTRL-R CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*+/:.-=}			*i_CTRL-R_CTRL-R*
 	CTRL-R a		results in "ac".
 	CTRL-R CTRL-R a		results in "ab^Hc".
 <		Options 'textwidth', 'formatoptions', etc. still apply.  If
-		you also want to avoid these, use "<C-R><C-O>r", see below.
+		you also want to avoid these, use CTRL-R CTRL-O, see below.
 		The '.' register (last inserted text) is still inserted as
 		typed.  {not in Vi}
 
@@ -375,6 +377,9 @@ CTRL-O		execute one command, return to Insert mode   *i_CTRL-O*
 CTRL-\ CTRL-O	like CTRL-O but don't move the cursor	     *i_CTRL-\_CTRL-O*
 CTRL-L		when 'insertmode' is set: go to Normal mode  *i_CTRL-L*
 CTRL-G u	break undo sequence, start new change	     *i_CTRL-G_u*
+CTRL-G U	don't break undo with next left/right cursor *i_CTRL-G_U*
+		movement (but only if the cursor stays
+		within same the line)
 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 Note: If the cursor keys take you out of Insert mode, check the 'noesckeys'
@@ -414,6 +419,28 @@ that, with CTRL-O u.  Another example: >
 This breaks undo at each line break.  It also expands abbreviations before
 this.
 
+An example for using CTRL-G U: >
+
+	inoremap <Left>  <C-G>U<Left>
+	inoremap <Right> <C-G>U<Right>
+	inoremap <expr> <Home> col('.') == match(getline('.'), '\S') + 1 ?
+	 \ repeat('<C-G>U<Left>', col('.') - 1) :
+	 \ (col('.') < match(getline('.'), '\S') ?
+	 \     repeat('<C-G>U<Right>', match(getline('.'), '\S') + 0) :
+	 \     repeat('<C-G>U<Left>', col('.') - 1 - match(getline('.'), '\S')))
+	inoremap <expr> <End> repeat('<C-G>U<Right>', col('$') - col('.'))
+	inoremap ( ()<C-G>U<Left>
+
+This makes it possible to use the cursor keys in Insert mode, without breaking
+the undo sequence and therefore using |.| (redo) will work as expected. 
+Also entering a text like (with the "(" mapping from above): >
+
+   Lorem ipsum (dolor
+
+will be repeatable by the |.|to the expected
+
+   Lorem ipsum (dolor)
+
 Using CTRL-O splits undo: the text typed before and after it is undone
 separately.  If you want to avoid this (e.g., in a mapping) you might be able
 to use CTRL-R = |i_CTRL-R|.  E.g., to call a function: >
@@ -1845,8 +1872,6 @@ NOTE: These commands cannot be used with |:global| or |:vglobal|.
 			or script is finished.
 			This command does not work from |:normal|.
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the |+ex_extra|
-			feature}
 
 							*:stopi* *:stopinsert*
 :stopi[nsert]		Stop Insert mode as soon as possible.  Works like
@@ -1864,15 +1889,11 @@ NOTE: These commands cannot be used with |:global| or |:vglobal|.
 			script that the replacement will only start after
 			the function or script is finished.
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the |+ex_extra|
-			feature}
 
 							*:startgreplace*
 :startg[replace][!]	Just like |:startreplace|, but use Virtual Replace
 			mode, like with |gR|.
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when compiled without the |+ex_extra|
-			feature}
 
 ==============================================================================
 10. Inserting a file					*inserting-file*

runtime/doc/map.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Dec 08
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 10
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -483,7 +483,7 @@ internal code is written to the script file.
 
 
 1.6 SPECIAL CHARACTERS					*:map-special-chars*
-							*map_backslash*
+						*map_backslash* *map-backslash*
 Note that only CTRL-V is mentioned here as a special character for mappings
 and abbreviations.  When 'cpoptions' does not contain 'B', a backslash can
 also be used like CTRL-V.  The <> notation can be fully used then |<>|.  But
@@ -494,21 +494,21 @@ To map a backslash, or use a backslash literally in the {rhs}, the special
 sequence "<Bslash>" can be used.  This avoids the need to double backslashes
 when using nested mappings.
 
-							*map_CTRL-C*
+						*map_CTRL-C* *map-CTRL-C*
 Using CTRL-C in the {lhs} is possible, but it will only work when Vim is
 waiting for a key, not when Vim is busy with something.  When Vim is busy
 CTRL-C interrupts/breaks the command.
 When using the GUI version on MS-Windows CTRL-C can be mapped to allow a Copy
 command to the clipboard.  Use CTRL-Break to interrupt Vim.
 
-							*map_space_in_lhs*
+					*map_space_in_lhs* *map-space_in_lhs*
 To include a space in {lhs} precede it with a CTRL-V (type two CTRL-Vs for
 each space).
-							*map_space_in_rhs*
+					*map_space_in_rhs* *map-space_in_rhs*
 If you want a {rhs} that starts with a space, use "<Space>".  To be fully Vi
 compatible (but unreadable) don't use the |<>| notation, precede {rhs} with a
 single CTRL-V (you have to type CTRL-V two times).
-							*map_empty_rhs*
+						*map_empty_rhs* *map-empty-rhs*
 You can create an empty {rhs} by typing nothing after a single CTRL-V (you
 have to type CTRL-V two times).  Unfortunately, you cannot do this in a vimrc
 file.
@@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ Upper and lowercase differences are ignored.
 It is not possible to put a comment after these commands, because the '"'
 character is considered to be part of the {lhs} or {rhs}.
 
-							*map_bar*
+							*map_bar* *map-bar*
 Since the '|' character is used to separate a map command from the next
 command, you will have to do something special to include  a '|' in {rhs}.
 There are three methods:
@@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ When 'b' is present in 'cpoptions', "\|" will be recognized as a mapping
 ending in a '\' and then another command.  This is Vi compatible, but
 illogical when compared to other commands.
 
-							*map_return*
+						*map_return* *map-return*
 When you have a mapping that contains an Ex command, you need to put a line
 terminator after it to have it executed.  The use of <CR> is recommended for
 this (see |<>|).  Example: >

runtime/doc/mlang.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2012 Jan 15
+*mlang.txt*     For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -97,13 +97,15 @@ If you used the self-installing .exe file, message translations should work
 already.  Otherwise get the libintl.dll file if you don't have it yet:
 
 	http://sourceforge.net/projects/gettext
+Or:
+	https://mlocati.github.io/gettext-iconv-windows/
 
 This also contains tools xgettext, msgformat and others.
 
 libintl.dll should be placed in same directory with (g)vim.exe, or some
-place where PATH environment value describe.  Message files (vim.mo)
-have to be placed in "$VIMRUNTIME/lang/xx/LC_MESSAGES", where "xx" is the
-abbreviation of the language (mostly two letters).
+place where PATH environment value describe.  Vim also finds libintl-8.dll.
+Message files (vim.mo) have to be placed in "$VIMRUNTIME/lang/xx/LC_MESSAGES",
+where "xx" is the abbreviation of the language (mostly two letters).
 
 If you write your own translations you need to generate the .po file and
 convert it to a .mo file.  You need to get the source distribution and read

runtime/doc/motion.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Feb 11
+*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Jun 06
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -172,6 +172,8 @@ CTRL-H		or					*CTRL-H* *<BS>*
 l		or					*l*
 <Right>		or					*<Right>* *<Space>*
 <Space>			[count] characters to the right.  |exclusive| motion.
+			See the 'whichwrap' option for adjusting the behavior
+			at end of line
 
 							*0*
 0			To the first character of the line.  |exclusive|

runtime/doc/netbeans.txt

@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
-*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Mar 14
+*netbeans.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 31
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Gordon Prieur et al.
 
 
-			*socket-interface* *netbeans* *netbeans-support*
+					*netbeans* *netbeans-support*
 
 Vim NetBeans Protocol: a socket interface for Vim integration into an IDE.
 
@@ -823,7 +823,7 @@ REJECT		Not used.
 6.7 Protocol errors					*nb-protocol_errors*
 
 These errors occur when a message violates the protocol:
-*E627* *E628* *E629* *E630* *E631* *E632* *E633* *E634* *E635* *E636*
+*E627* *E628* *E629* *E632* *E633* *E634* *E635* *E636*
 *E637* *E638* *E639* *E640* *E641* *E642* *E643* *E644* *E645* *E646*
 *E647* *E648* *E649* *E650* *E651* *E652* *E653* *E654*
 

runtime/doc/options.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Feb 17
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -50,9 +50,19 @@ achieve special effects.  These options come in three forms:
 :se[t] {option}&vi	Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi}
 :se[t] {option}&vim	Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi}
 
-:se[t] all&		Set all options, except terminal options, to their
-			default value.  The values of 'term', 'lines' and
-			'columns' are not changed. {not in Vi}
+:se[t] all&		Set all options to their default value.  The values of 
+			these options are not changed:
+			  all terminal options, starting with t_
+			  'columns'
+			  'cryptmethod'
+			  'encoding'
+			  'key'
+			  'lines'
+			  'term'
+			  'ttymouse'
+			  'ttytype'
+			Warning: This may have a lot of side effects.
+			{not in Vi}
 
 						*:set-args* *E487* *E521*
 :se[t] {option}={value}		or
@@ -786,7 +796,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	line.
 	When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in
 	a different way.
-	The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
+	The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set and
+	restored when 'paste' is reset.
 	{small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing
 	<Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the
 	deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}.
@@ -1124,6 +1135,47 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	expression evaluates to a |List| this is equal to using each List item
 	as a string and putting "\n" in between them.
 
+						*'belloff'* *'bo'*
+'belloff' 'bo'		string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Specifies for which events the bell will not be rung. It is a comma
+	separated list of items. For each item that is present, the bell
+	will be silenced. This is most useful to specify specific events in
+	insert mode to be silenced.
+
+	item	    meaning when present	~
+	all	    All events.
+	backspace   When hitting <BS> or <Del> and deleting results in an
+		    error.
+	cursor	    Fail to move around using the cursor keys or
+		    <PageUp>/<PageDown> in |Insert-mode|.
+	complete    Error occurred when using |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K| or
+		    |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|.
+	copy	    Cannot copy char from insert mode using |i_CTRL-Y| or
+		    |i_CTRL-E|.
+	ctrlg	    Unknown Char after <C-G> in Insert mode.
+	error	    Other Error occurred (e.g. try to join last line)
+		    (mostly used in |Normal-mode| or |Cmdline-mode|).
+	esc	    hitting <Esc> in |Normal-mode|.
+	ex	    In |Visual-mode|, hitting |Q| results in an error.
+	hangul	    Error occurred when using hangul input.
+	insertmode  Pressing <Esc> in 'insertmode'.
+	lang	    Calling the beep module for Lua/Mzscheme/TCL.
+	mess	    No output available for |g<|.
+	showmatch   Error occurred for 'showmatch' function.
+	operator    Empty region error |cpo-E|.
+	register    Unknown register after <C-R> in |Insert-mode|.
+	shell	    Bell from shell output |:!|.
+	spell	    Error happened on spell suggest.
+	wildmode    More matches in |cmdline-completion| available
+		    (depends on the 'wildmode' setting).
+
+	This is most useful, to fine tune when in insert mode the bell should
+	be rung. For normal mode and ex commands, the bell is often rung to
+	indicate that an error occurred. It can be silenced by adding the
+	"error" keyword.
+
 				     *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'*
 'binary' 'bin'		boolean	(default off)
 			local to buffer
@@ -1196,7 +1248,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	break if 'linebreak' is on.  Only works for ASCII and also for 8-bit
 	characters when 'encoding' is an 8-bit encoding.
 
-						*'breakindent'* *'bri'*
+				*'breakindent'* *'bri'* *'nobreakindent'* *'nobri'*
 'breakindent' 'bri'	boolean (default off)
 			local to window
 			{not in Vi}
@@ -1819,6 +1871,14 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		    completion in the preview window.  Only works in
 		    combination with "menu" or "menuone".
 
+	   noinsert Do not insert any text for a match until the user selects
+		    a match from the menu. Only works in combination with
+		    "menu" or "menuone". No effect if "longest" is present.
+
+	   noselect Do not select a match in the menu, force the user to
+		    select one from the menu. Only works in combination with
+		    "menu" or "menuone".
+
 
 						*'concealcursor'* *'cocu'*
 'concealcursor' 'cocu'	string (default: "")
@@ -2235,7 +2295,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			the encrypted bytes will be different.
 							*blowfish2*
 	   blowfish2	Blowfish method.  Medium strong encryption.  Requires
-			Vim 7.4.399 or later, files can NOT be read by Vim 7.3
+			Vim 7.4.401 or later, files can NOT be read by Vim 7.3
 			and older.  This adds a "seed" to the file, every time
 			you write the file the encrypted bytes will be
 			different.  The whole undo file is encrypted, not just
@@ -2663,15 +2723,16 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
 	When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
-	is on, no <EOL> will be written for the last line in the file.  This
-	option is automatically set when starting to edit a new file, unless
-	the file does not have an <EOL> for the last line in the file, in
-	which case it is reset.  Normally you don't have to set or reset this
-	option.  When 'binary' is off the value is not used when writing the
-	file.  When 'binary' is on it is used to remember the presence of a
-	<EOL> for the last line in the file, so that when you write the file
-	the situation from the original file can be kept.  But you can change
-	it if you want to.
+	is on, or 'fixeol' option is off, no <EOL> will be written for the
+	last line in the file.  This option is automatically set or reset when
+	starting to edit a new file, depending on whether file has an <EOL>
+	for the last line in the file.  Normally you don't have to set or
+	reset this option.
+	When 'binary' is off and 'fixeol' is on the value is not used when
+	writing the file.  When 'binary' is on or 'fixeol' is off it is used
+	to remember the presence of a <EOL> for the last line in the file, so
+	that when you write the file the situation from the original file can
+	be kept.  But you can change it if you want to.
 
 			     *'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'*
 'equalalways' 'ea'	boolean	(default on)
@@ -2712,7 +2773,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always
 	for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal
 	mode).  See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep,
-	screen flash or do nothing.
+	screen flash or do nothing. See 'belloff' to finetune when to ring the
+	bell.
 
 						*'errorfile'* *'ef'*
 'errorfile' 'ef'	string	(Amiga default: "AztecC.Err",
@@ -2774,6 +2836,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	<Tab>.  Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and
 	when 'autoindent' is on.  To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is
 	on, use CTRL-V<Tab>.  See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|.
+	This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set and restored when
+	the 'paste' option is reset.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
 
 					*'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'*
@@ -3056,6 +3120,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  fold:c	Folded			|hl-Folded|
 	  diff:c	DiffDelete		|hl-DiffDelete|
 
+		*'fixendofline'* *'fixeol'* *'nofixendofline'* *'nofixeol'*
+'fixendofline' 'fixeol'	boolean	(default on)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	When writing a file and this option is on, <EOL> at the end of file
+	will be restored if missing. Turn this option off if you want to
+	preserve the situation from the original file.
+	When the 'binary' option is set the value of this option doesn't
+	matter.
+	See the 'endofline' option.
+
 					*'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'*
 'fkmap' 'fk'		boolean (default off)			*E198*
 			global
@@ -3337,7 +3412,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	modeline, see |sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working,
 	since changing the buffer text is not allowed.
 
-						*'fsync'* *'fs'*
+					*'fsync'* *'fs'* *'nofsync'* *'nofs'*
 'fsync' 'fs'		boolean	(default on)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
@@ -3420,7 +3495,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	the height of the cursor can be changed.  This can be done by
 	specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or
 	horizontal cursor.
-	For a console the 't_SI' and 't_EI' escape sequences are used.
+	For a console the 't_SI', 't_SR', and 't_EI' escape sequences are
+	used.
 
 	The option is a comma separated list of parts.  Each part consist of a
 	mode-list and an argument-list:
@@ -4033,7 +4109,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global
 	Ignore case in search patterns.  Also used when searching in the tags
 	file.
-	Also see 'smartcase'.
+	Also see 'smartcase' and 'tagcase'.
 	Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
 	|/ignorecase|.
 
@@ -4413,6 +4489,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	'*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that
 	command).
 	When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.
+	This option also influences syntax highlighting, unless the syntax
+	uses |:syn-iskeyword|.
 	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
 	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
 
@@ -4527,7 +4605,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			feature}
 	This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language
 	mode.  When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are
-	inserted directly.  When in command mode the 'langmap' option takes
+	inserted directly.  When in Normal mode the 'langmap' option takes
 	care of translating these special characters to the original meaning
 	of the key.  This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to
 	be able to execute Normal mode commands.
@@ -4590,7 +4668,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		:source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
 <	Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!
 
-					*'langnoremap'* *'lnr'*
+			*'langnoremap'* *'lnr'* *'nolangnoremap'* *'nolnr'*
 'langnoremap' 'lnr'	boolean (default off)
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
@@ -4716,33 +4794,38 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command.  It is a
 	comma separated list of string settings.
-	  						*lcs-eol*
+							*lcs-eol*
 	  eol:c		Character to show at the end of each line.  When
 			omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
 			line.
-	  						*lcs-tab*
+							*lcs-tab*
 	  tab:xy	Two characters to be used to show a tab.  The first
 			char is used once.  The second char is repeated to
 			fill the space that the tab normally occupies.
 			"tab:>-" will show a tab that takes four spaces as
 			">---".  When omitted, a tab is show as ^I.
-	  						*lcs-trail*
+							*lcs-space*
+	  space:c	Character to show for a space.  When omitted, spaces
+			are left blank.
+							*lcs-trail*
 	  trail:c	Character to show for trailing spaces.  When omitted,
-			trailing spaces are blank.
-	  						*lcs-extends*
+			trailing spaces are blank.  Overrides the "space"
+			setting for trailing spaces.
+							*lcs-extends*
 	  extends:c	Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
 			off and the line continues beyond the right of the
 			screen.
-	  						*lcs-precedes*
+							*lcs-precedes*
 	  precedes:c	Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'
 			is off and there is text preceding the character
 			visible in the first column.
-	  						*lcs-conceal*
+							*lcs-conceal*
 	  conceal:c	Character to show in place of concealed text, when
 			'conceallevel' is set to 1.
-	  						*lcs-nbsp*
-	  nbsp:c	Character to show for a non-breakable space (character
-			0xA0, 160).  Left blank when omitted.
+							*lcs-nbsp*
+	  nbsp:c	Character to show for a non-breakable space character
+			(0xA0 (160 decimal) and U+202F).  Left blank when
+			omitted.
 
 	The characters ':' and ',' should not be used.  UTF-8 characters can
 	be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable
@@ -4753,7 +4836,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	    :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:%
 	    :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<
 <	The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and
-	"precedes".  "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "tab" and "trail".
+	"precedes".  "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "space", "tab" and "trail".
 	|hl-NonText| |hl-SpecialKey|
 
 			*'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'*
@@ -4766,6 +4849,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
 	reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
 
+						*'luadll'*
+'luadll' 		string	(default depends on the build)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+lua/dyn|
+			feature}
+	Specifies the name of the Lua shared library. The default is
+	DYNAMIC_LUA_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
 						*'macatsui'* *'nomacatsui'*
 'macatsui'		boolean	(default on)
 			global
@@ -4927,8 +5021,11 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Maximum amount of memory in Kbyte to use for all buffers together.
 	The maximum usable value is about 2000000 (2 Gbyte).  Use this to work
-	without a limit.  On 64 bit machines higher values might work.  But
-	hey, do you really need more than 2 Gbyte for text editing?
+	without a limit.
+	On 64 bit machines higher values might work.  But hey, do you really
+	need more than 2 Gbyte for text editing?  Keep in mind that text is
+	stored in the swap file, one can edit files > 2 Gbyte anyay.  We do
+	need the memory to store undo info.
 	Also see 'maxmem'.
 
 						*'menuitems'* *'mis'*
@@ -5202,7 +5299,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling.
 
 							*'nrformats'* *'nf'*
-'nrformats' 'nf'	string	(default "octal,hex")
+'nrformats' 'nf'	string	(default "bin,octal,hex")
 			local to buffer
 			{not in Vi}
 	This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
@@ -5216,6 +5313,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	hex	If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
 		considered to be hexadecimal.  Example: Using CTRL-X on
 		"0x100" results in "0x0ff".
+	bin	If included, numbers starting with "0b" or "0B" will be
+		considered to be binary.  Example: Using CTRL-X on
+		"0b1000" subtracts one, resulting in "0b0111".
 	Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always
 	considered decimal.  This also happens for numbers that are not
 	recognized as octal or hex.
@@ -5334,19 +5434,21 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on):
 		- mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled
 		- abbreviations are disabled
-		- 'textwidth' is set to 0
-		- 'wrapmargin' is set to 0
 		- 'autoindent' is reset
-		- 'smartindent' is reset
-		- 'softtabstop' is set to 0
+		- 'expandtab' is reset
+		- 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty
 		- 'revins' is reset
 		- 'ruler' is reset
 		- 'showmatch' is reset
-		- 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty
+		- 'smartindent' is reset
+		- 'smarttab' is reset
+		- 'softtabstop' is set to 0
+		- 'textwidth' is set to 0
+		- 'wrapmargin' is set to 0
 	These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled:
-		- 'lisp'
-		- 'indentexpr'
 		- 'cindent'
+		- 'indentexpr'
+		- 'lisp'
 	NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is
 	on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the
 	settings again, causing trouble when pasting text.  You might want to
@@ -5467,6 +5569,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 <	Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used.  Note that
 	this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.
 
+						*'perldll'*
+'perldll' 		string	(default depends on the build)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+perl/dyn|
+			feature}
+	Specifies the name of the Perl shared library. The default is
+	DYNAMIC_PERL_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
 			*'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'*
 'preserveindent' 'pi'	boolean	(default off)
 			local to buffer
@@ -5593,6 +5706,27 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Insert mode completion.  When zero as much space as available is used.
 	|ins-completion-menu|.
 
+						*'pythondll'*
+'pythondll' 		string	(default depends on the build)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+python/dyn|
+			feature}
+	Specifies the name of the Python 2.x shared library. The default is
+	DYNAMIC_PYTHON_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'pythonthreedll'*
+'pythonthreedll'	string	(default depends on the build)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+python3/dyn|
+			feature}
+	Specifies the name of the Python 3 shared library. The default is
+	DYNAMIC_PYTHON3_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
 
 						*'quoteescape'* *'qe'*
 'quoteescape' 'qe'	string	(default "\")
@@ -5779,7 +5913,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards.  See "typing
 	backwards" |ins-reverse|.  This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_
 	command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.
-	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' or 'paste' is set.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+	This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is
+	reset.
 
 				 *'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'*
 'rightleft' 'rl'	boolean	(default off)
@@ -5811,6 +5947,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.
 	The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.
 
+						*'rubydll'*
+'rubydll' 		string	(default: depends on the build)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+ruby/dyn|
+			feature}
+	Specifies the name of the Ruby shared library. The default is
+	DYNAMIC_RUBY_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
 					 *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'*
 'ruler' 'ru'		boolean	(default off)
 			global
@@ -5835,7 +5982,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	separated with a dash.
 	For an empty line "0-1" is shown.
 	For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".
-	This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
+	This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is
+	reset.
 	If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where
 	you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
@@ -6388,6 +6536,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  c	don't give |ins-completion-menu| messages.  For example,
 		"-- XXX completion (YYY)", "match 1 of 2", "The only match",
 		"Pattern not found", "Back at original", etc.
+	  q     use "recording" instead of "recording @a"
 
 	This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
 	requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
@@ -6474,7 +6623,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen.  The time to
 	show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.
 	A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be
-	seen or not).  This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
+	seen or not).
+	This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is
+	reset.
 	When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character
 	will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.
 	See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and
@@ -6583,8 +6734,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.
 	When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted
 	right.
-	NOTE: 'smartindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.  When 'paste'
-	is set smart indenting is disabled.
+	NOTE: 'smartindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+	This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is
+	reset.
 
 				 *'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'*
 'smarttab' 'sta'	boolean	(default off)
@@ -6600,6 +6752,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	What gets inserted (a <Tab> or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab'
 	option.  Also see |ins-expandtab|.  When 'expandtab' is not set, the
 	number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
+	This option is reset when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste' is
+	reset.
 	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
 
 					*'softtabstop'* *'sts'*
@@ -6614,7 +6768,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.
 	When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.
 	When 'sts' is negative, the value of 'shiftwidth' is used.
-	'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.
+	'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set and restored
+	when 'paste' is reset.
 	See also |ins-expandtab|.  When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of
 	spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
 	The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is
@@ -6691,7 +6846,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	the two-letter, lower case region name.  You can use more than one
 	region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian
 	English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great
-	Britain.
+	Britain. (Note: currently en_au and en_nz dictionaries are older than
+	en_ca, en_gb and en_us).
 	If the name "cjk" is included East Asian characters are excluded from
 	spell checking.  This is useful when editing text that also has Asian
 	words.
@@ -6827,7 +6983,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with
 	normal text.  Each status line item is of the form:
 	  %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}
-	All fields except the {item} is optional.  A single percent sign can
+	All fields except the {item} are optional.  A single percent sign can
 	be given as "%%".  Up to 80 items can be specified.  *E541*
 
 	When the option starts with "%!" then it is used as an expression,
@@ -6935,7 +7091,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	become empty.  This will make a group like the following disappear
 	completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. >
 		:set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...
-<
+<							*g:actual_curbuf*
 	Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status
 	line is displayed.  The current buffer and current window will be set
 	temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is
@@ -7061,6 +7217,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   split	If included, split the current window before loading
 			a buffer for a |quickfix| command that display errors.
 			Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
+	   vsplit	Just like "split" but split vertically.
 	   newtab	Like "split", but open a new tab page.  Overrules
 			"split" when both are present.
 
@@ -7191,19 +7348,22 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 <	[The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]
 
 	When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the
-	files listed in 'tags', and 'ignorecase' is set or a pattern is used
+	files listed in 'tags', and case is ignored or a pattern is used
 	instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.
 	Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only
 	be found in the retry.
 
 	If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second,
-	linear search can be avoided for the 'ignorecase' case.  Use a value
-	of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this.  A tag file can be
-	case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in
-	the command: "sort -f -o tags tags".  For "Exuberant ctags" version
-	5.x or higher (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be used
-	for this as well.  Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this
-	to work.
+	linear search can be avoided when case is ignored.  Use a value of '2'
+	in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this.  A tag file can be case-fold
+	sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in the command:
+	"sort -f -o tags tags".  For "Exuberant ctags" version 5.x or higher
+	(at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be used for this as
+	well.  Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this to work.
+
+	By default, tag searches are case-sensitive.  Case is ignored when
+	'ignorecase' is set and 'tagcase' is "followic", or when 'tagcase' is
+	"ignore".
 
 	When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
 	exists, but faster when no full match exists.  Tags in unsorted tags
@@ -7215,6 +7375,16 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	command-line completion and ":help").
 	{Vi: always uses binary search in some versions}
 
+							*'tagcase'* *'tc'*
+'tagcase' 'tc'		string	(default "followic")
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+	This option specifies how case is handled when searching the tags
+	file:
+	   followic	Follow the 'ignorecase' option
+	   ignore	Ignore case
+	   match	Match case
+
 						*'taglength'* *'tl'*
 'taglength' 'tl'	number	(default 0)
 			global
@@ -7269,6 +7439,17 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a
 	mapping which should not change the tagstack.
 
+						*'tcldll'*
+'tcldll' 		string	(default depends on the build)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+tcl/dyn|
+			feature}
+	Specifies the name of the Tcl shared library. The default is
+	DYNAMIC_TCL_DLL, which was specified at compile time.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
 						*'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531*
 'term'			string	(default is $TERM, if that fails:
 				      in the GUI: "builtin_gui"
@@ -7317,14 +7498,12 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ( 'encoding' is used for the
 	display).  Except for the Mac when 'macatsui' is off, then
 	'termencoding' should be "macroman".
-	In the Win32 console version the default value is the console codepage
-	when it differs from the ANSI codepage.
 								*E617*
 	Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ 2 GUI.  After the GUI has been
 	successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8".
 	Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error
 	message is shown.
-	For the Win32 GUI 'termencoding' is not used for typed characters,
+	For the Win32 GUI and console versions 'termencoding' is not used,
 	because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters.
 	When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option.
 	This is the normal value.
@@ -7374,8 +7553,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			{not in Vi}
 	Maximum width of text that is being inserted.  A longer line will be
 	broken after white space to get this width.  A zero value disables
-	this.  'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.  When
-	'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used.  See also
+	this.
+	'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set and restored
+	when 'paste' is reset.
+	When 'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used.  See also
 	'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
 	When 'formatexpr' is set it will be used to break the line.
 	NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
@@ -7914,9 +8095,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	%	When included, save and restore the buffer list.  If Vim is
 		started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
 		restored.  If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
-		buffer list is restored from the viminfo file.  Buffers
-		without a file name and buffers for help files are not written
-		to the viminfo file.
+		buffer list is restored from the viminfo file.  Quickfix
+		('buftype'), unlisted ('buflisted'), unnamed and buffers on
+		removable media (|viminfo-r|) are not saved.
 		When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum
 		number of buffers that are stored.  Without a number all
 		buffers are stored.
@@ -8397,6 +8578,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause
 	the text width to be further reduced.  This is Vi compatible.
 	When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used.
+	This option is set to 0 when 'paste' is set and restored when 'paste'
+	is reset.
 	See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.  {Vi: works differently
 	and less usefully}
 

runtime/doc/os_os2.txt

@@ -1,221 +1,13 @@
-*os_os2.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2007 Apr 22
+*os_os2.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Dec 31
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Slootman
 
 
 							*os2* *OS2* *OS/2*
-This file contains the particularities for the OS/2 version of Vim.
+This file used to contain the particularities for the OS/2 version of Vim.
 
-At present there is no native PM version of the GUI version of Vim: The OS/2
-version is a console application.  However, there is now a Win32s-compatible
-GUI version, which should be usable by owners of Warp 4 (which supports
-Win32s) in a Win-OS/2 session.  The notes in this file refer to the native
-console version.
+The OS/2 support was removed in patch 7.4.1008.
 
 
-NOTE
-
-This OS/2 port works well for me and a couple of other OS/2 users; however,
-since I haven't had much feedback, that either means no (OS/2-specific) bugs
-exist (besides the ones mentioned below), or no one has yet created a
-situation in which any bugs are apparent.  File I/O in Dos and Unix mode,
-binary mode, and FAT handling all seem to work well, which would seem to be
-the most likely places for trouble.
-
-A known problem is that files opened by Vim are inherited by other programs
-that are started via a shell escape from within Vim.  This specifically means
-that Vim won't be able to remove the swap file(s) associated with buffers open
-at the time the other program was started, until the other program is stopped.
-At that time, the swap file may be removed, but if Vim could not do that the
-first time, it won't be removed at all.  You'll get warnings that some other
-Vim session may be editing the file when you start Vim up again on that file.
-This can be reproduced with ":!start epm".  Now quit Vim, and start Vim again
-with the file that was in the buffer at the time epm was started.  I'm working
-on this!
-
-A second problem is that Vim doesn't understand the situation when using it
-when accessing the OS/2 system via the network, e.g. using telnet from a Unix
-system, and then starting Vim.  The problem seems to be that OS/2 =sometimes=
-recognizes function / cursor keys, and tries to convert those to the
-corresponding OS/2 codes generated by the "normal" PC keyboard.  I've been
-testing a workaround (mapping the OS/2 codes to the correct functions), but so
-far I can't say anything conclusive (this is on Warp 3, by the way).  In the
-meantime any help will be appreciated.
-
-
-PREREQUISITES
-
-To run Vim, you need the emx runtime environment (at least rev. 0.9b).  This
-is generally available as (ask Archie about it):
-
-    emxrt.zip     emx runtime package
-
-I've included a copy of emx.dll, which should be copied to one of the
-directories listed in your LIBPATH.  Emx is GPL'ed, but the emx.dll library is
-not (read COPYING.EMX to find out what that means to you).
-
-This emx.dll is from the emxfix04.zip package, which unfortunately has a bug,
-eh, I mean a POSIX feature, in select().  Versions of Vim before 3.27 will
-appear to hang when starting (actually, while processing vimrc).  Hit <Enter> a
-couple of times until Vim starts working if this happens.  Next, get an up to
-date version of Vim!
-
-
-HELP AND VIMRC FILE
-
-If you unpack the archive that Vim came in and run Vim directly from where it
-was unpacked, Vim should be able to find the runtime files and your .vimrc
-without any settings.
-
-If you put the runtime files separately from the binary, the VIM environment
-variable is used to find the location of the help files and the system .vimrc.
-Place an entry such as this in CONFIG.SYS: >
-
-  SET VIM=c:/local/lib/vim
-
-Put your .vimrc and your other Vim files in this directory.  Copy the runtime
-directory to this directory.  Each version of Vim has its own runtime
-directory.  It will be called something like "c:/local/lib/vim/vim54".  Thus
-you get a tree of Vim files like this:
-	c:/local/lib/vim/.vimrc
-	c:/local/lib/vim/vim54/filetype.vim
-	c:/local/lib/vim/vim54/doc/help.txt
-	etc.
-
-Note: .vimrc may also be called _vimrc to accommodate those who have chosen to
-install OS/2 on a FAT file system.  Vim first tries to find .vimrc and if that
-fails, looks for _vimrc in the same place.  The existence of a .vimrc or
-_vimrc file influences the 'compatible' options, which can have unexpected side
-effects.  See |'compatible'|.
-
-If you're using network drives with OS/2, then you can install Vim on a
-network drive (including .vimrc; this is then called the "system" vimrc file),
-and then use a personal copy of .vimrc (the "user" vimrc file).  This should be
-located in a directory indicated by the HOME environment variable.
-
-
-ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES IN FILE NAMES
-
-This HOME environment variable is also used when using ~ in file names, so
-":e ~/textfile" will edit the file "textfile" in the directory referred to by
-HOME.  Additionally you can use other environment variables in file names, as
-in ":n $SRC/*.c".
-
-The HOME environment variable is also used to locate the .viminfo file
-(see |viminfo-file|).  There is no support yet for .viminfo on FAT file
-systems yet, sorry.  You could try the -i startup flag (as in "vim -i
-$HOME/_viminfo") however.
-
-If the HOME environment variable is not set, the value "C:/" is used as a
-default.
-
-
-BACKSLASHES
-
-Using slashes ('/') and backslashes ('\') can be a bit of a problem (see
-|dos-backslash| for more explanation), but in almost all cases Vim does "The
-Right Thing".  Vim itself uses backslashes in file names, but will happily
-accept forward slashes if they are entered (in fact, sometimes that works
-better!).
-
-
-TEMP FILES
-
-Temporary files (for filtering) are put in the first directory in the next
-list that exists and where a file can be created:
-	$TMP
-	$TEMP
-	C:\TMP
-	C:\TEMP
-	current directory
-
-
-TERMINAL SETTING
-
-							*os2ansi*
-Use "os2ansi" as the TERM environment variable (or don't set it at all, as the
-default is the correct value).  You can set term to os2ansi in the .vimrc, in
-case you need TERM to be a different value for other applications.  The
-problem is that OS/2 ANSI emulation is quite limited (it doesn't have insert /
-delete line, for example).
-
-If you want to use a different value for TERM (because of other programs, for
-example), make sure that the termcap entry for that TERM value has the
-appropriate key mappings.  The termcap.dat distributed with emx does not always
-have them.  Here are some suitable values to add to the termcap entry of your
-choice; these allow the cursor keys and the named function keys (such as
-pagedown) to work.
-
-	:ku=\316H:kd=\316P:kl=\316K:kr=\316M:%i=\316t:#4=\316s:\
-	:kD=\316S:kI=\316R:kN=\316Q:kP=\316I:kh=\316G:@7=\316O:\
-	:k1=\316;:k2=\316<:k3=\316=:k4=\316>:k5=\316?:k6=\316@:\
-	:k7=\316A:k8=\316B:k9=\316C:k;=\316D:
-
-
-Paul Slootman
-
-
-43 LINE WINDOW
-
-A suggestion from Steven Tryon, on how to run Vim in a bigger window:
-
-When I call Vim from an OS/2 WPS application such as PMMail it comes up
-in the default 25-line mode.  To get a more useful window size I make
-my external editor "vimbig.cmd" which in turn calls "vimbig2.cmd".
-Brute force and awkwardness, perhaps, but it works.
-
-vimbig.cmd: >
-   @echo off
-   start "Vi Improved" /f vimbig2.cmd %1 %2 %3 %4
-
-vimbig2.cmd: >
-   @echo off
-   mode 80,43
-   vim.exe %1 %2 %3 %4
-   exit
-<
-
-CLIPBOARD ACCESS (provided by Alexander Wagner)
-
-Vim for OS/2 has no direct access to the system clipboard.  To enable access
-anyway you need an additional tool which gives you access to the clipboard
-from within a vio application.  The freeware package clipbrd.zip by Stefan
-Gruendel can be used for this purpose.  You might download the package
-including precompiled binaries and all sources from:
-	http://www.os2site.com/sw/util/clipboard/index.html
-	http://download.uni-hd.de/ftp/pub/os2/pmtools/
-
-Installation of this package is straight forward: just put the two executables
-that come with this package into a directory within your PATH for Vim should
-be able to call them from whatever directory you are working.
-
-To copy text from the clipboard to your Vim session you can use the :r
-command.  Simply call clipbrd.exe from within Vim in the following way: >
-
-	:r !clipbrd -r
-
-To copy text from Vim to the system clipboard just mark the text in the usual
-vim-manner and call: >
-
-	:!clipbrd -w
-
-which will write your selection right into OS/2's clipboard.
-
-For ease of use you might want to add some maps for these commands.  E.g. to
-use F11 to paste the clipboard into Vim and F12 to copy selected text to the
-clipboard you would use: >
-
-	if has("os2")
-	  imap <F11>     <ESC>:r !clipbrd -r<CR>i
-	  vmap <F12>     :!clipbrd -w<cr>
-	else
-	  imap <F11>     <ESC>"*p<CR>i
-	  vmap <F12>     "*y
-	endif
-
-This will ensure that only on OS/2 clipbrd is called whereas on other
-platforms vims build in mechanism is used.  (To enable this functions on every
-load of Vim place the above lines in your .vimrc.)
-
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/pattern.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Mar 16
+*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 03
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -393,8 +393,8 @@ Use of "\M" makes the pattern after it be interpreted as if 'nomagic' is used.
 Use of "\v" means that in the pattern after it all ASCII characters except
 '0'-'9', 'a'-'z', 'A'-'Z' and '_' have a special meaning.  "very magic"
 
-Use of "\V" means that in the pattern after it only the backslash has a
-special meaning.  "very nomagic"
+Use of "\V" means that in the pattern after it only the backslash and the
+terminating character (/ or ?) has a special meaning.  "very nomagic"
 
 Examples:
 after:	  \v	   \m	    \M	     \V		matches ~
@@ -402,6 +402,7 @@ after:	  \v	   \m	    \M	     \V		matches ~
 	  $	   $	    $	     \$		matches end-of-line
 	  .	   .	    \.	     \.		matches any character
 	  *	   *	    \*	     \*		any number of the previous atom
+	  ~	   ~	    \~	     \~		latest substitute string
 	  ()	   \(\)     \(\)     \(\)	grouping into an atom
 	  |	   \|	    \|	     \|		separating alternatives
 	  \a	   \a	    \a	     \a		alphabetic character
@@ -480,6 +481,7 @@ More explanation and examples below, follow the links.
 |/\%v|	\%23v	\%23v	in virtual column 23 |/zero-width|
 
 Character classes {not in Vi}:				*/character-classes*
+      magic   nomagic	matches ~
 |/\i|	\i	\i	identifier character (see 'isident' option)
 |/\I|	\I	\I	like "\i", but excluding digits
 |/\k|	\k	\k	keyword character (see 'iskeyword' option)
@@ -510,6 +512,7 @@ Character classes {not in Vi}:				*/character-classes*
 			class with end-of-line included
 (end of character classes)
 
+      magic   nomagic	matches ~
 |/\e|	\e	\e	<Esc>
 |/\t|	\t	\t	<Tab>
 |/\r|	\r	\r	<CR>
@@ -535,6 +538,7 @@ Character classes {not in Vi}:				*/character-classes*
 |/\Z|	\Z	\Z	ignore differences in Unicode "combining characters".
 			Useful when searching voweled Hebrew or Arabic text.
 
+      magic   nomagic	matches ~
 |/\m|	\m	\m	'magic' on for the following chars in the pattern
 |/\M|	\M	\M	'magic' off for the following chars in the pattern
 |/\v|	\v	\v	the following chars in the pattern are "very magic"
@@ -1098,7 +1102,10 @@ x	A single character, with no special meaning, matches itself
 	  plausible pattern for a UNIX filename: "[-./[:alnum:]_~]\+" That is,
 	  a list of at least one character, each of which is either '-', '.',
 	  '/', alphabetic, numeric, '_' or '~'.
-	  These items only work for 8-bit characters.
+	  These items only work for 8-bit characters, except [:lower:] and
+	  [:upper:] also work for multi-byte characters when using the new
+	  regexp engine.  In the future these items may work for multi-byte
+	  characters.
 							*/[[=* *[==]*
 	- An equivalence class.  This means that characters are matched that
 	  have almost the same meaning, e.g., when ignoring accents.  This

runtime/doc/pi_logipat.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+*pi_logipat.txt*	Logical Patterns				Mar 13, 2013
+
+Author:  Charles E. Campbell  <NdrOchip@ScampbellPfamily.AbizM>
+Copyright: (c) 2004-2013 by Charles E. Campbell	*logipat-copyright*
+           The VIM LICENSE applies to LogiPat.vim and LogiPat.txt
+           (see |copyright|) except use "LogiPat" instead of "Vim"
+	   No warranty, express or implied.  Use At-Your-Own-Risk.
+
+==============================================================================
+1. Contents					*logipat* *logipat-contents*
+
+	1. Contents.................: |logipat-contents|
+	2. LogiPat Manual...........: |logipat-manual|
+	3. LogiPat Examples.........: |logipat-examples|
+	4. Caveat...................: |logipat-caveat|
+	5. LogiPat History..........: |logipat-history|
+
+==============================================================================
+2. LogiPat Manual			*logipat-manual* *logipat-man*
+
+
+	*logipat-arg* *logipat-input* *logipat-pattern* *logipat-operators*
+	Boolean logic patterns are composed of
+
+			operators  ! = not
+			           | = logical-or
+			           & = logical-and
+			grouping   ( ... )
+			patterns   "pattern"
+
+	:LogiPat {boolean-logic pattern}		*:LogiPat*
+		:LogiPat is a command which takes a boolean-logic
+		argument (|logipat-arg|).
+
+	:LP {boolean-logic pattern}			*:LP*
+		:LP is a shorthand command version of :LogiPat
+		(|:LogiPat|).
+
+	:ELP {boolean-logic pattern}			*:ELP*
+		No search is done, but the conversion from the
+		boolean logic pattern to the regular expression
+		is performed and echoed onto the display.
+
+	:LogiPatFlags {search flags}			*LogiPat-flags*
+		:LogiPatFlags {search flags}
+		LogiPat uses the |search()| command.  The flags
+		passed to that call to search() may be specified
+		by the :LogiPatFlags command.
+
+	:LPF {search flags}				*:LPF*
+		:LPF is a shorthand version of :LogiPatFlags.
+
+	:let pat=LogiPat({boolean-logic pattern})	*LogiPat()*
+		If one calls LogiPat() directly, no search
+		is done, but the transformation from the boolean
+		logic pattern into a regular expression pattern
+		is performed and returned.
+
+	To get a " inside a pattern, as opposed to having it delimit
+	the pattern, double it.
+
+==============================================================================
+3. LogiPat Examples					*logipat-examples*
+
+	LogiPat takes Boolean logic arguments and produces a regular
+	expression which implements the choices.  A series of examples
+	follows:
+>
+	:LogiPat "abc"
+<		will search for lines containing the string  :abc:
+>
+	:LogiPat "ab""cd"
+<		will search for lines containing the string  :ab"c:
+>
+	:LogiPat !"abc"
+<		will search for lines which don't contain the string  :abc:
+>
+	:LogiPat "abc"|"def"
+<		will search for lines which contain either the string
+		:abc:  or the string  :def:
+>
+	:LogiPat !("abc"|"def")
+<		will search for lines which don't contain either
+		of the strings  :abc:  or  :def:
+>
+	:LogiPat "abc"&"def"
+<		will search for lines which contain both of the strings
+		:abc:  and  :def:
+>
+	:let pat= LogiPat('!"abc"')
+<		will return the regular expression which will match
+		all lines not containing  :abc: .  The double quotes
+		are needed to pass normal patterns to LogiPat, and
+		differentiate such patterns from boolean logic
+		operators.
+
+
+==============================================================================
+4. Caveat						*logipat-caveat*
+
+	The "not" operator may be fragile; ie. it may not always play well
+	with the & (logical-and) and | (logical-or) operators.  Please try out
+	your patterns, possibly with :set hls, to insure that what is matching
+	is what you want.
+
+==============================================================================
+3. LogiPat History					*logipat-history*
+
+	v3 Sep 25, 2006 * LP_Or() fixed; it now encapsulates its output
+	                  in \%(...\) parentheses
+	   Dec 12, 2011 * |:ELP| added
+			* "" is mapped to a single " and left inside patterns
+	v2 May 31, 2005	* LPF and LogiPatFlags commands weren't working
+	v1 May 23, 2005	* initial release
+
+==============================================================================
+vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help

runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Jan 05
+*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Oct 31
 
 	    ------------------------------------------------
 	    NETRW REFERENCE MANUAL    by Charles E. Campbell
@@ -367,7 +367,12 @@ settings are described below, in |netrw-browser-options|, and in
 			    fun! MyFuncRef()
 			    endfun
 			    let g:Netrw_funcref= function("MyFuncRef")
+
 <
+ *g:Netrw_UserMaps*	specifies a function or |List| of functions which can
+			be used to set up user-specified maps and functionality.
+			See |netrw-usermaps|
+
  *g:netrw_ftp*		   if it doesn't exist, use default ftp
 			=0 use default ftp		       (uid password)
 			=1 use alternate ftp method	  (user uid password)
@@ -1064,9 +1069,10 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS				*netrw-browse-maps* {{{2
 <	 <F1>	Causes Netrw to issue help
 	 <cr>	Netrw will enter the directory or read the file      |netrw-cr|
 	 <del>	Netrw will attempt to remove the file/directory      |netrw-del|
-	 <c-h>	Edit file hiding list                             |netrw-ctrl-h|
-	 <c-l>	Causes Netrw to refresh the directory listing     |netrw-ctrl-l|
-	 <c-r>	Browse using a gvim server                        |netrw-ctrl-r|
+	 <c-h>	Edit file hiding list                                |netrw-ctrl-h|
+	 <c-l>	Causes Netrw to refresh the directory listing        |netrw-ctrl-l|
+	 <c-r>	Browse using a gvim server                           |netrw-ctrl-r|
+	 <c-tab> Shrink/expand a netrw/explore window                |netrw-c-tab|
 	   -	Makes Netrw go up one directory                      |netrw--|
 	   a	Toggles between normal display,                      |netrw-a|
 	    	hiding (suppress display of files matching g:netrw_list_hide)
@@ -1079,6 +1085,7 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS				*netrw-browse-maps* {{{2
 	   gd	Force treatment as directory                         |netrw-gd|
 	   gf	Force treatment as file                              |netrw-gf|
 	   gh	Quick hide/unhide of dot-files                       |netrw-gh|
+	   gn	Make top of tree the directory below the cursor      |netrw-gn|
 	   i	Cycle between thin, long, wide, and tree listings    |netrw-i|
 	   mb	Bookmark current directory                           |netrw-mb|
 	   mc	Copy marked files to marked-file target directory    |netrw-mc|
@@ -1107,7 +1114,7 @@ QUICK REFERENCE: MAPS				*netrw-browse-maps* {{{2
 	   qf	Display information on file                          |netrw-qf|
 	   qF	Mark files using a quickfix list                     |netrw-qF|
 	   r	Reverse sorting order                                |netrw-r|
-	   R	Rename the designed file(s)/directory(ies)           |netrw-R|
+	   R	Rename the designated file(s)/directory(ies)         |netrw-R|
 	   s	Select sorting style: by name, time, or file size    |netrw-s|
 	   S	Specify suffix priority for name-sorting             |netrw-S|
 	   t	Enter the file/directory under the cursor in a new tab|netrw-t|
@@ -1176,10 +1183,10 @@ Addtionally, one may use :NetrwMB to bookmark files or directories. >
 < No bang: enters files/directories into Netrw's bookmark system
 
    No argument and in netrw buffer:
-     if there are marked files: bookmark marked files
-     otherwise                : bookmark file/directory under cursor
+     if there are marked files        : bookmark marked files
+     otherwise                        : bookmark file/directory under cursor
    No argument and not in netrw buffer: bookmarks current open file
-   Has arguments: globs them individually and bookmarks them
+   Has arguments                      : |glob()|s each arg and bookmarks them
 
  With bang: deletes files/directories from Netrw's bookmark system
 
@@ -1396,8 +1403,8 @@ list (unless |g:netrw_dirhistmax| is zero; by default, it's ten).  With the
 the opposite, see |netrw-U|.
 
 The "u" map also accepts counts to go back in the history several slots.
-For your convenience, |netrw-qb| lists the history number which can be
-re-used in that count.
+For your convenience, qb (see |netrw-qb|) lists the history number which may
+be used in that count.
 
 						*.netrwhist*
 See |g:netrw_dirhistmax| for how to control the quantity of history stack
@@ -1414,7 +1421,7 @@ CHANGING TO A SUCCESSOR DIRECTORY		*netrw-U* *netrw-downdir* {{{2
 
 With the "U" map, one can change to a later directory (successor).
 This map is the opposite of the "u" map. (see |netrw-u|)  Use the
-q map to list both the bookmarks and history. (see |netrw-qb|)
+qb map to list both the bookmarks and history. (see |netrw-qb|)
 
 The "U" map also accepts counts to go forward in the history several slots.
 
@@ -1422,7 +1429,7 @@ See |g:netrw_dirhistmax| for how to control the quantity of history stack
 slots.
 
 
-CHANGING TREE TOP				*netrw-ntree* *:Ntree* {{{2
+CHANGING TREE TOP			*netrw-ntree*  *:Ntree*  *netrw-gn* {{{2
 
 One may specify a new tree top for tree listings using >
 
@@ -1432,14 +1439,18 @@ Without a "dirname", the current line is used (and any leading depth
 information is elided).
 With a "dirname", the specified directory name is used.
 
+The "gn" map will take the word below the cursor and use that for
+changing the top of the tree listing.
+
 
 NETRW CLEAN					*netrw-clean* *:NetrwClean* {{{2
 
-With :NetrwClean one may easily remove netrw from one's home directory;
+With NetrwClean one may easily remove netrw from one's home directory;
 more precisely, from the first directory on your |'runtimepath'|.
 
-With :NetrwClean!, netrw will remove netrw from all directories on your
-|'runtimepath'|.
+With NetrwClean!, netrw will attempt to remove netrw from all directories on
+your |'runtimepath'|.  Of course, you have to have write/delete permissions
+correct to do this.
 
 With either form of the command, netrw will first ask for confirmation
 that the removal is in fact what you want to do.  If netrw doesn't have
@@ -1456,6 +1467,7 @@ operating system).  Netrw allows one to invoke such special handlers by: >
 	* when Exploring, hit the "x" key
 	* when editing, hit gx with the cursor atop the special filename
 <	  (latter not available if the |g:netrw_nogx| variable exists)
+
 Netrw determines which special handler by the following method:
 
   * if |g:netrw_browsex_viewer| exists, then it will be used to attempt to
@@ -1631,19 +1643,23 @@ DIRECTORY EXPLORATION COMMANDS  {{{2
 	  of the current tab.  It will open a netrw window on the current
 	  directory if [dir] is omitted; a :Lexplore [dir] will show the
 	  specified directory in the left-hand side browser display no matter
-	  from which window the command is issued.  By default, :Lexplore will
-	  change an uninitialized |g:netrw_chgwin| to 2; edits will thus
-	  preferentially be made in window#2.
-	    The [N] specifies a |g:netrw_winsize| just for the new :Lexplore
+	  from which window the command is issued.
+
+	  By default, :Lexplore will change an uninitialized |g:netrw_chgwin|
+	  to 2; edits will thus preferentially be made in window#2.
+
+	  The [N] specifies a |g:netrw_winsize| just for the new :Lexplore
 	  window.
-	    Those who like this method often also like tree style displays;
+
+	  Those who like this method often also often like tree style displays;
 	  see |g:netrw_liststyle|.
 
-	  Also see: |netrw-C| |g:netrw_chgwin| |g:netrw_winsize|
-		    |netrw-p| |netrw-P|        |g:netrw_browse_split|
+	  Also see: |netrw-C|           |g:netrw_browse_split|   |g:netrw_wiw|
+		    |netrw-p| |netrw-P|   |g:netrw_chgwin|
+		    |netrw-c-tab|       |g:netrw_winsize|
 
 :[N]Lexplore! is like :Lexplore, except that the full-height Explorer window
-	  will open on the right hand side, and an uninitialized |g:netrw_chgwin|
+	  will open on the right hand side and an uninitialized |g:netrw_chgwin|
 	  will be set to 1.
 
 						*netrw-:Sexplore*
@@ -2127,19 +2143,18 @@ is unlikely to be fixed.
 
 
 UNMARKING FILES							*netrw-mF* {{{2
-	(also see |netrw-mf|)
+	(also see |netrw-mf|, |netrw-mu|)
 
-This command will unmark all files in the current buffer.  One may also use
-mf (|netrw-mf|) on a specific file to unmark just that file.
+The "mF" command will unmark all files in the current buffer.  One may also use
+mf (|netrw-mf|) on a specific, already marked, file to unmark just that file.
 
 
 MARKING FILES BY QUICKFIX LIST				*netrw-qF* {{{2
 	(also see |netrw-mf|)
 
-One may convert the |quickfix-error-lists| into a marked file list using
-"qF".  You may then proceed with commands such as me (|netrw-me|) to
-edit them.  Quickfix error lists are generated, for example, by calls
-to |:vimgrep|.
+One may convert |quickfix-error-lists| into a marked file list using "qF".
+You may then proceed with commands such as me (|netrw-me|) to edit them.
+Quickfix error lists are generated, for example, by calls to |:vimgrep|.
 
 
 MARKING FILES BY REGULAR EXPRESSION				*netrw-mr* {{{2
@@ -2157,14 +2172,17 @@ MARKED FILES, ARBITRARY VIM COMMAND				*netrw-mv*  {{{2
 	    (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files)
 		      (uses the local marked-file list)
 
-The "mv" map causes netrw execute an arbitrary vim command on each file
-on the local marked file list, individually:
+The "mv" map causes netrw to execute an arbitrary vim command on each file on
+the local marked file list, individually:
 
 	* 1split
 	* sil! keepalt e file
 	* run vim command
 	* sil! keepalt wq!
 
+A prompt, "Enter vim command: ", will be issued to elicit the vim command
+you wish used.
+
 
 MARKED FILES, ARBITRARY SHELL COMMAND				*netrw-mx* {{{2
 	    (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files)
@@ -2196,13 +2214,13 @@ command to be applied to all marked files on the global marked file list.  The
 
 	command files
 
-It is useful, for example, to select files and make a tarball:
+This approach is useful, for example, to select files and make a tarball: >
 
 	(mark files)
 	mX
 	Enter command: tar cf mynewtarball.tar
-
-The command that will be run in this example:
+<
+The command that will be run with this example:
 
 	tar cf mynewtarball.tar 'file1' 'file2' ...
 
@@ -2255,7 +2273,7 @@ MARKED FILES: EDITING						*netrw-me* {{{2
 	    (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files)
 		      (uses the global marked file list)
 
-This command will place the marked files on the |arglist| and commence
+The "me" command will place the marked files on the |arglist| and commence
 editing them.  One may return the to explorer window with |:Rexplore|.
 (use |:n| and |:p| to edit next and previous files in the arglist)
 
@@ -2263,26 +2281,33 @@ MARKED FILES: GREP						*netrw-mg* {{{2
 	    (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files)
 		      (uses the global marked file list)
 
-This command will apply |:vimgrep| to the marked files.
+The "mg" command will apply |:vimgrep| to the marked files.
 The command will ask for the requested pattern; one may then enter: >
 
 	/pattern/[g][j]
 	! /pattern/[g][j]
 	pattern
 <
-In the cases of "j" option usage as shown above, "mg" will winnow the current
-marked file list to just those possessing the specified pattern.
-Thus, one may use >
-	mr ...file-pattern
-	mg ..contents-pattern
-to have a marked file list satisfying the file-pattern but containing the
-desired contents-pattern.
+With /pattern/, editing will start with the first item on the |quickfix| list
+that vimgrep sets up (see |:copen|, |:cnext|, |:cprevious|).  The |:vimgrep|
+command is in use, so without 'g' each line is added to quickfix list only
+once; with 'g' every match is included.
+
+With /pattern/j, "mg" will winnow the current marked file list to just those
+marked files also possessing the specified pattern.  Thus, one may use >
+
+	mr ...file-pattern...
+	mg /pattern/j
+<
+to have a marked file list satisfying the file-pattern but also restricted to
+files containing some desired pattern.
+
 
 MARKED FILES: HIDING AND UNHIDING BY SUFFIX			*netrw-mh* {{{2
 	    (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files)
 		      (uses the local marked file list)
 
-This command extracts the suffices of the marked files and toggles their
+The "mh" command extracts the suffices of the marked files and toggles their
 presence on the hiding list.  Please note that marking the same suffix
 this way multiple times will result in the suffix's presence being toggled
 for each file (so an even quantity of marked files having the same suffix
@@ -2311,16 +2336,16 @@ MARKED FILES: PRINTING						*netrw-mp* {{{2
 	    (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files)
 		      (uses the local marked file list)
 
-Netrw will apply the |:hardcopy| command to marked files.  What it does
-is open each file in a one-line window, execute hardcopy, then close the
-one-line window.
+When "mp" is used, netrw will apply the |:hardcopy| command to marked files.
+What netrw does is open each file in a one-line window, execute hardcopy, then
+close the one-line window.
 
 
 MARKED FILES: SOURCING						*netrw-ms* {{{2
 	    (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files)
 		      (uses the local marked file list)
 
-Netrw will source the marked files (using vim's |:source| command)
+With "ms", netrw will source the marked files (using vim's |:source| command)
 
 
 MARKED FILES: SETTING THE TARGET DIRECTORY			*netrw-mt* {{{2
@@ -2343,6 +2368,9 @@ Set the marked file copy/move-to target (see |netrw-mc| and |netrw-mm|):
     This command uses |<q-args>|, so spaces in the directory name are
     permitted without escaping.
 
+  * With mouse-enabled vim or with gvim, one may select a target by using
+    <c-leftmouse>
+
 There is only one copy/move-to target at a time in a vim session; ie. the
 target is a script variable (see |s:var|) and is shared between all netrw
 windows (in an instance of vim).
@@ -2419,9 +2447,13 @@ Related topics:
 
 
 MARKED FILES: UNMARKING						*netrw-mu* {{{2
-     (See |netrw-mf| and |netrw-mr| for how to mark files)
+     (See |netrw-mf|, |netrw-mF|)
+
+The "mu" mapping will unmark all currently marked files.  This command differs
+from "mF" as the latter only unmarks files in the current directory whereas
+"mu" will unmark global and all buffer-local marked files.
+(see |netrw-mF|)
 
-The "mu" mapping will unmark all currently marked files.
 
 				*netrw-browser-settings*
 NETRW BROWSER VARIABLES		*netrw-browser-options* *netrw-browser-var* {{{2
@@ -2726,6 +2758,11 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				evaluation will be suppressed
 				(see |'ballooneval'|)
 
+  *g:netrw_usetab*		if this variable exists and is non-zero, then
+				the <tab> map supporting shrinking/expanding a
+				Lexplore or netrw window will be enabled.
+				(see |netrw-c-tab|)
+
   *g:netrw_remote_mkdir*	command for making a remote directory
 				via ftp  (also see |g:netrw_mkdir_cmd|)
 				 default: "mkdir"
@@ -2762,7 +2799,8 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				|netrw-ctrl-r| to use for its server.
 				 default: "NETRWSERVER"
 
-  *g:netrw_sort_by*		sort by "name", "time", or "size"
+  *g:netrw_sort_by*		sort by "name", "time", "size", or
+  				"exten".
 				 default: "name"
 
   *g:netrw_sort_direction*	sorting direction: "normal" or "reverse"
@@ -2874,6 +2912,10 @@ your browsing preferences.  (see also: |netrw-settings|)
 				take effect, for example).
 				 default: 50  (for 50%)
 
+  *g:netrw_wiw*			=1 specifies the minimum window width to use
+				when shrinking a netrw/Lexplore window
+				(see |netrw-c-tab|).
+
   *g:netrw_xstrlen*		Controls how netrw computes string lengths,
 				including multi-byte characters' string
 				length. (thanks to N Weibull, T Mechelynck)
@@ -2919,7 +2961,7 @@ help on what each of the variables do.
 
 
 ==============================================================================
-OBTAINING A FILE					*netrw-O* {{{2
+OBTAINING A FILE					*netrw-obtain* *netrw-O* {{{2
 
 If there are no marked files:
 
@@ -2949,7 +2991,7 @@ Related topics:
  * To automatically make the currently browsed directory the current
    directory, see |g:netrw_keepdir|.
 
-							*netrw-createfile*
+					*netrw-newfile* *netrw-createfile*
 OPEN A NEW FILE IN NETRW'S CURRENT DIRECTORY		*netrw-%* {{{2
 
 To open a new file in netrw's current directory, press "%".  This map
@@ -2981,10 +3023,13 @@ These will:
 	   will use only 30% of the columns available; the rest of the window
 	   is used for the preview window.
 
-Also see: |g:netrw_chgwin| |netrw-P|
+	Related: if you like this idea, you may also find :Lexplore
+	         (|netrw-:Lexplore|) or |g:netrw_chgwin| of interest
+
+Also see: |g:netrw_chgwin| |netrw-P| |'previewwindow'|
 
 
-PREVIOUS WINDOW				*netrw-P* *netrw-prvwin* {{{2
+PREVIOUS WINDOW					*netrw-P* *netrw-prvwin* {{{2
 
 To edit a file or directory in the previously used (last accessed) window (see
 :he |CTRL-W_p|), press a "P".  If there's only one window, then the one window
@@ -3006,7 +3051,7 @@ Associated setting variables:
 Also see: |g:netrw_chgwin| |netrw-p|
 
 
-REFRESHING THE LISTING			*netrw-ctrl-l* *netrw-ctrl_l* {{{2
+REFRESHING THE LISTING		*netrw-refresh* *netrw-ctrl-l* *netrw-ctrl_l* {{{2
 
 To refresh either a local or remote directory listing, press ctrl-l (<c-l>) or
 hit the <cr> when atop the ./ directory entry in the listing.  One may also
@@ -3026,11 +3071,12 @@ RENAMING FILES OR DIRECTORIES	*netrw-move* *netrw-rename* *netrw-R* {{{2
 
 If there are no marked files: (see |netrw-mf|)
 
-    Renaming/moving files and directories involves moving the cursor to the
+    Renaming files and directories involves moving the cursor to the
     file/directory to be moved (renamed) and pressing "R".  You will then be
-    queried for where you want the file/directory to be moved.  You may select
+    queried for what you want the file/directory to be renamed to  You may select
     a range of lines with the "V" command (visual selection), and then
-    pressing "R".
+    press "R"; you will be queried for each file as to what you want it
+    renamed to.
 
 If there are marked files:  (see |netrw-mf|)
 
@@ -3048,6 +3094,14 @@ If there are marked files:  (see |netrw-mf|)
     This example will mark all *.c files and then rename them to *.cpp
     files.
 
+    The ctrl-X character has special meaning for renaming files: >
+
+    	<c-x>      : a single ctrl-x tells netrw to ignore the portion of the response
+	             lying between the last '/' and the ctrl-x.
+
+	<c-x><c-x> : a pair of contiguous ctrl-x's tells netrw to ignore any
+		     portion of the string preceding the double ctrl-x's.
+<
     WARNING:~
 
     Note that moving files is a dangerous operation; copies are safer.  That's
@@ -3055,13 +3109,13 @@ If there are marked files:  (see |netrw-mf|)
     the copy fails and the delete does not, you may lose the file.
     Use at your own risk.
 
-The g:netrw_rename_cmd variable is used to implement renaming.  By default its
-value is:
+The g:netrw_rename_cmd variable is used to implement remote renaming.  By
+default its value is:
 
 	ssh HOSTNAME mv
 
 One may rename a block of files and directories by selecting them with
-the V (|linewise-visual|).
+V (|linewise-visual|) when using thin style
 
 
 SELECTING SORTING STYLE			*netrw-s* *netrw-sort* {{{2
@@ -3074,18 +3128,19 @@ Related topics:               |netrw-r| |netrw-S|
 Associated setting variables: |g:netrw_sort_by| |g:netrw_sort_sequence|
 
 
-SETTING EDITING WINDOW				*netrw-C* *netrw-:NetrwC* {{{2
+SETTING EDITING WINDOW		*netrw-editwindow* *netrw-C* *netrw-:NetrwC* {{{2
 
 One may select a netrw window for editing with the "C" mapping, using the
-:NetrwC [win#] command, or by setting g:netrw_chgwin to the selected window
+:NetrwC [win#] command, or by setting |g:netrw_chgwin| to the selected window
 number.  Subsequent selection of a file to edit (|netrw-cr|) will use that
 window.
 
-	* C  by itself, will select the current window for editing via
-	  |netrw-cr|
+	* C : by itself, will select the current window holding a netrw buffer
+	  for editing via |netrw-cr|.  The C mapping is only available while in
+	  netrw buffers.
 
-	* [count]C the count will be used as the window number to be used
-	  for editing via |netrw-cr|.
+	* [count]C : the count will be used as the window number to be used
+	  for subsequent editing via |netrw-cr|.
 
 	* :NetrwC will set |g:netrw_chgwin| to the current window
 
@@ -3094,12 +3149,91 @@ window.
 
 Using >
 	let g:netrw_chgwin= -1
-will restore the default editing behavior (ie. use the current window).
+will restore the default editing behavior
+(ie. editing will use the current window).
 
 Related topics:			|netrw-cr| |g:netrw_browse_split|
 Associated setting variables:	|g:netrw_chgwin|
 
 
+SHRINKING OR EXPANDING A NETRW OR LEXPLORE WINDOW	*netrw-c-tab* {{{2
+
+The <c-tab> key will toggle a netrw or |:Lexplore| window's width,
+but only if |g:netrw_usetab| exists and is non-zero (and, of course,
+only if your terminal supports differentiating <c-tab> from a plain
+<tab>).
+
+  * If the current window is a netrw window, toggle its width
+    (between |g:netrw_wiw| and its original width)
+
+  * Else if there is a |:Lexplore| window in the current tab, toggle
+    its width
+
+  * Else bring up a |:Lexplore| window
+
+If |g:netrw_usetab| exists or is zero, or if there is a pre-existing mapping
+for <c-tab>, then the <tab> will not be mapped.  One may map something other
+than a <c-tab>, too: (but you'll still need to have had g:netrw_usetab set) >
+
+	nmap <unique> (whatever)	<Plug>NetrwShrink
+<
+Related topics:			|:Lexplore|
+Associated setting variable:	|g:netrw_usetab|
+
+
+USER SPECIFIED MAPS					*netrw-usermaps* {{{1
+
+One may make customized user maps.  Specify a variable, |g:Netrw_UserMaps|,
+to hold a |List| of lists of keymap strings and function names: >
+
+	[["keymap-sequence","ExampleUserMapFunc"],...]
+<
+When netrw is setting up maps for a netrw buffer, if |g:Netrw_UserMaps|
+exists, then the internal function netrw#UserMaps(islocal) is called.
+This function goes through all the entries in the |g:Netrw_UserMaps| list:
+
+	* sets up maps: >
+		nno <buffer> <silent> KEYMAP-SEQUENCE
+		:call s:UserMaps(islocal,"ExampleUserMapFunc")
+<	* refreshes if result from that function call is the string
+	  "refresh"
+	* if the result string is not "", then that string will be
+	  executed (:exe result)
+	* if the result is a List, then the above two actions on results
+	  will be taken for every string in the result List
+
+The user function is passed one argument; it resembles >
+
+	fun! ExampleUserMapFunc(islocal)
+<
+where a:islocal is 1 if its a local-directory system call or 0 when
+remote-directory system call.
+
+Use netrw#Expose("varname")          to access netrw-internal (script-local)
+				     variables.
+Use netrw#Modify("varname",newvalue) to change netrw-internal variables.
+Use netrw#Call("funcname"[,args])    to call a netrw-internal function with
+				     specified arguments.
+
+Example: Get a copy of netrw's marked file list: >
+
+	let netrwmarkfilelist= netrw#Expose("netrwmarkfilelist")
+<
+Example: Modify the value of netrw's marked file list: >
+
+	call netrw#Modify("netrwmarkfilelist",[])
+<
+Example: Clear netrw's marked file list via a mapping on gu >
+    " ExampleUserMap: {{{2
+    fun! ExampleUserMap(islocal)
+      call netrw#Modify("netrwmarkfilelist",[])
+      call netrw#Modify('netrwmarkfilemtch_{bufnr("%")}',"")
+      let retval= ["refresh"]
+      return retval
+    endfun
+    let g:Netrw_UserMaps= [["gu","ExampleUserMap"]]
+<
+
 10. Problems and Fixes					*netrw-problems* {{{1
 
 	(This section is likely to grow as I get feedback)
@@ -3274,6 +3408,7 @@ Associated setting variables:	|g:netrw_chgwin|
 		The first one (|g:netrw_ssh_cmd|) is the most important; most
 		of the others will use the string in g:netrw_ssh_cmd by
 		default.
+
 						*netrw-p9* *netrw-ml_get*
 	P9. I'm browsing, changing directory, and bang!  ml_get errors
 	    appear and I have to kill vim.  Any way around this?
@@ -3300,6 +3435,14 @@ Associated setting variables:	|g:netrw_chgwin|
 	P11. I want to have two windows; a thin one on the left and my editing
 	     window on the right.  How may I accomplish this?
 
+	     You probably want netrw running as in a side window.  If so, you
+	     will likely find that ":[N]Lexplore" does what you want.  The
+	     optional "[N]" allows you to select the quantity of columns you
+	     wish the |:Lexplore|r window to start with (see |g:netrw_winsize|
+	     for how this parameter works).
+
+	     Previous solution:
+
 		* Put the following line in your <.vimrc>:
 			let g:netrw_altv = 1
 		* Edit the current directory:  :e .
@@ -3313,6 +3456,7 @@ Associated setting variables:	|g:netrw_chgwin|
 		  <leftmouse> in the browser window and then press the
 		  <middlemouse> to select the file.
 
+
 								*netrw-p12*
 	P12. My directory isn't sorting correctly, or unwanted letters are
 	     appearing in the listed filenames, or things aren't lining
@@ -3390,7 +3534,7 @@ Associated setting variables:	|g:netrw_chgwin|
 	     to open a swap file.
 
 	     (romainl) It looks like you are starting Vim from a protected
-	     directory.  Start if from your $HOME or another writable
+	     directory.  Start netrw from your $HOME or other writable
 	     directory.
 
 								*netrw-p17*
@@ -3414,6 +3558,58 @@ Associated setting variables:	|g:netrw_chgwin|
 	     "Using Vim to Remotely Edit A File on ServerB Only
 	      Accessible From ServerA"
 
+								*netrw-P19*
+	P19. How do I get numbering on in directory listings?
+		With |g:netrw_bufsettings|, you can control netrw's buffer
+		settings; try putting >
+		  let g:netrw_bufsettings="noma nomod nu nobl nowrap ro nornu"
+<		in your .vimrc.  If you'd like to have relative numbering
+		instead, try >
+		  let g:netrw_bufsettings="noma nomod nonu nobl nowrap ro rnu"
+<
+								*netrw-P20*
+	P20. How may I have gvim start up showing a directory listing?
+		Try putting the following code snippet into your .vimrc: >
+		    augroup VimStartup
+		      au!
+		      au VimEnter * if expand("%") == "" && argc() == 0 &&
+		      \ (v:servername =~ 'GVIM\d*' || v:servername == "")
+		      \ | e . | endif
+		    augroup END
+<		You may use Lexplore instead of "e" if you're so inclined.
+		This snippet assumes that you have client-server enabled
+		(ie. a "huge" vim version).
+
+								*netrw-P21*
+	P21. I've made a directory (or file) with an accented character, but
+		netrw isn't letting me enter that directory/read that file:
+
+		Its likely that the shell or o/s is using a different encoding
+		than you have vim (netrw) using.  A patch to vim supporting
+		"systemencoding" may address this issue in the future; for
+		now, just have netrw use the proper encoding.  For example: >
+
+			au FileType netrw set enc=latin1
+<
+								*netrw-P22*
+	P22. I get an error message when I try to copy or move a file:
+
+		**error** (netrw) tried using g:netrw_localcopycmd<cp>; it doesn't work!
+
+	     What's wrong?
+
+	     Netrw uses several system level commands to do things (see
+
+		 |g:netrw_localcopycmd|, |g:netrw_localmovecmd|,
+		 |g:netrw_localrmdir|, |g:netrw_mkdir_cmd|).
+
+	    You may need to adjust the default commands for one or more of
+	    these commands by setting them properly in your .vimrc.  Another
+	    source of difficulty is that these commands use vim's local
+	    directory, which may not be the same as the browsing directory
+	    shown by netrw (see |g:netrw_keepdir|).
+
+
 ==============================================================================
 11. Debugging Netrw Itself				*netrw-debug* {{{1
 
@@ -3504,6 +3700,46 @@ netrw:
 ==============================================================================
 12. History						*netrw-history* {{{1
 
+	v154:	Feb 26, 2015	* (Yuri Kanivetsky) reported a situation where
+				  a file was not treated properly as a file
+				  due to g:netrw_keepdir == 1
+		Mar 25, 2015	* (requested by Ben Friz) one may now sort by
+				  extension
+		Mar 28, 2015	* (requested by Matt Brooks) netrw has a lot
+				  of buffer-local mappings; however, some
+				  plugins (such as vim-surround) set up
+				  conflicting mappings that cause vim to wait.
+				  The "<nowait>" modifier has been included
+				  with most of netrw's mappings to avoid that
+				  delay.
+		Jun 26, 2015	* |netrw-gn| mapping implemted
+				* :Ntree NotADir resulted in having
+				  the tree listing expand in the error messages
+				  window.  Fixed.
+		Jun 29, 2015	* Attempting to delete a file remotely caused
+				  an error with "keepsol" mentioned; fixed.
+		Jul 08, 2015	* Several changes to keep the |:jumps| table
+				  correct when working with
+				  |g:netrw_fastbrowse| set to 2
+				* wide listing with accented characters fixed
+				  (using %-S instead of %-s with a |printf()|
+		Jul 13, 2015	* (Daniel Hahler) CheckIfKde() could be true
+				  but kfmclient not installed.  Changed order
+				  in netrw#BrowseX(): checks if kde and
+				  kfmclient, then will use xdg-open on a unix
+				  system (if xdg-open is executable)
+		Aug 11, 2015	* (McDonnell) tree listing mode wouldn't
+				  select a file in a open subdirectory.
+				* (McDonnell) when multiple subdirectories
+				  were concurrently open in tree listing
+				  mode, a ctrl-L wouldn't refresh properly.
+				* The netrw:target menu showed duplicate
+				  entries
+		Oct 13, 2015	* (mattn) provided an exception to handle
+				  windows with shellslash set but no shell
+		Oct 23, 2015	* if g:netrw_usetab and <c-tab> now used
+				  to control whether NetrwShrink is used
+				  (see |netrw-c-tab|)
 	v153:	May 13, 2014	* added another |g:netrw_ffkeep| usage {{{2
 		May 14, 2014	* changed s:PerformListing() so that it
 				  always sets ft=netrw for netrw buffers

runtime/doc/quickfix.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Mar 27
+*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -299,6 +299,75 @@ use this code: >
 	au QuickfixCmdPost make call QfMakeConv()
 
 
+EXECUTE A COMMAND IN ALL THE BUFFERS IN QUICKFIX OR LOCATION LIST:
+							*:cdo*
+:cdo[!] {cmd}		Execute {cmd} in each valid entry in the quickfix list.
+			It works like doing this: >
+				:cfirst
+				:{cmd}
+				:cnext
+				:{cmd}
+				etc.
+<			When the current file can't be |abandon|ed and the [!]
+			is not present, the command fails.
+			When an error is detected excecution stops.
+			The last buffer (or where an error occurred) becomes
+			the current buffer.
+			{cmd} can contain '|' to concatenate several commands.
+
+			Only valid entries in the quickfix list are used.
+			A range can be used to select entries, e.g.: >
+				:10,$cdo cmd
+<			To skip entries 1 to 9.
+
+			Note: While this command is executing, the Syntax
+			autocommand event is disabled by adding it to
+			'eventignore'.  This considerably speeds up editing
+			each buffer.
+			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			|+listcmds| feature}
+			Also see |:bufdo|, |:tabdo|, |:argdo|, |:windo|,
+			|:ldo|, |:cfdo| and |:lfdo|.
+
+							*:cfdo*
+:cfdo[!] {cmd}		Execute {cmd} in each file in the quickfix list.
+			It works like doing this: >
+				:cfirst
+				:{cmd}
+				:cnfile
+				:{cmd}
+				etc.
+<			Otherwise it works the same as `:cdo`.
+			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			|+listcmds| feature}
+
+							*:ldo*
+:ld[o][!] {cmd}		Execute {cmd} in each valid entry in the location list
+			for the current window.
+			It works like doing this: >
+				:lfirst
+				:{cmd}
+				:lnext
+				:{cmd}
+				etc.
+<			Only valid entries in the location list are used.
+			Otherwise it works the same as `:cdo`.
+			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			|+listcmds| feature}
+
+							*:lfdo*
+:lfdo[!] {cmd}		Execute {cmd} in each file in the location list for
+			the current window.
+			It works like doing this: >
+				:lfirst
+				:{cmd}
+				:lnfile
+				:{cmd}
+				etc.
+<			Otherwise it works the same as `:ldo`.
+			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
+			|+listcmds| feature}
+
 =============================================================================
 2. The error window					*quickfix-window*
 

runtime/doc/quickref.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Nov 19
+*quickref.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Nov 10
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -620,6 +620,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'balloondelay'	  'bdlay'   delay in mS before a balloon may pop up
 'ballooneval'	  'beval'   switch on balloon evaluation
 'balloonexpr'	  'bexpr'   expression to show in balloon
+'belloff'	  'bo'	    do not ring the bell for these reasons
 'binary'	  'bin'     read/write/edit file in binary mode
 'bioskey'	  'biosk'   MS-DOS: use bios calls for input characters
 'bomb'			    prepend a Byte Order Mark to the file
@@ -696,6 +697,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'fileignorecase'  'fic'     ignore case when using file names
 'filetype'	  'ft'	    type of file, used for autocommands
 'fillchars'	  'fcs'     characters to use for displaying special items
+'fixendofline'	  'fixeol'  make sure last line in file has <EOL>
 'fkmap'		  'fk'	    Farsi keyboard mapping
 'foldclose'	  'fcl'     close a fold when the cursor leaves it
 'foldcolumn'	  'fdc'     width of the column used to indicate folds
@@ -710,10 +712,10 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'foldnestmax'	  'fdn'     maximum fold depth
 'foldopen'	  'fdo'     for which commands a fold will be opened
 'foldtext'	  'fdt'     expression used to display for a closed fold
+'formatexpr'	  'fex'     expression used with "gq" command
 'formatlistpat'   'flp'     pattern used to recognize a list header
 'formatoptions'   'fo'	    how automatic formatting is to be done
 'formatprg'	  'fp'	    name of external program used with "gq" command
-'formatexpr'	  'fex'     expression used with "gq" command
 'fsync'		  'fs'	    whether to invoke fsync() after file write
 'gdefault'	  'gd'	    the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on
 'grepformat'	  'gfm'     format of 'grepprg' output
@@ -732,15 +734,15 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'helplang'	  'hlg'     preferred help languages
 'hidden'	  'hid'     don't unload buffer when it is |abandon|ed
 'highlight'	  'hl'	    sets highlighting mode for various occasions
-'hlsearch'	  'hls'     highlight matches with last search pattern
 'history'	  'hi'	    number of command-lines that are remembered
 'hkmap'		  'hk'	    Hebrew keyboard mapping
 'hkmapp'	  'hkp'     phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping
+'hlsearch'	  'hls'     highlight matches with last search pattern
 'icon'			    let Vim set the text of the window icon
 'iconstring'		    string to use for the Vim icon text
 'ignorecase'	  'ic'	    ignore case in search patterns
-'imactivatekey'   'imak'    key that activates the X input method
 'imactivatefunc'  'imaf'    function to enable/disable the X input method
+'imactivatekey'   'imak'    key that activates the X input method
 'imcmdline'	  'imc'     use IM when starting to edit a command line
 'imdisable'	  'imd'     do not use the IM in any mode
 'iminsert'	  'imi'     use :lmap or IM in Insert mode
@@ -775,6 +777,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'list'			    show <Tab> and <EOL>
 'listchars'	  'lcs'     characters for displaying in list mode
 'loadplugins'	  'lpl'     load plugin scripts when starting up
+'luadll'		    name of the Lua dynamic library
 'macatsui'		    Mac GUI: use ATSUI text drawing
 'magic'			    changes special characters in search patterns
 'makeef'	  'mef'     name of the errorfile for ":make"
@@ -814,6 +817,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'patchexpr'	  'pex'     expression used to patch a file
 'patchmode'	  'pm'	    keep the oldest version of a file
 'path'		  'pa'	    list of directories searched with "gf" et.al.
+'perldll'		    name of the Perl dynamic library
 'preserveindent'  'pi'	    preserve the indent structure when reindenting
 'previewheight'   'pvh'     height of the preview window
 'previewwindow'   'pvw'     identifies the preview window
@@ -826,6 +830,8 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'printmbfont'	  'pmbfn'   font names to be used for CJK output of :hardcopy
 'printoptions'	  'popt'    controls the format of :hardcopy output
 'pumheight'	  'ph'	    maximum height of the popup menu
+'pythondll'		    name of the Python 2 dynamic library
+'pythonthreedll'	    name of the Python 3 dynamic library
 'quoteescape'	  'qe'	    escape characters used in a string
 'readonly'	  'ro'	    disallow writing the buffer
 'redrawtime'	  'rdt'     timeout for 'hlsearch' and |:match| highlighting
@@ -838,6 +844,7 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'revins'	  'ri'	    inserting characters will work backwards
 'rightleft'	  'rl'	    window is right-to-left oriented
 'rightleftcmd'	  'rlc'     commands for which editing works right-to-left
+'rubydll'		    name of the Ruby dynamic library
 'ruler'		  'ru'	    show cursor line and column in the status line
 'rulerformat'	  'ruf'     custom format for the ruler
 'runtimepath'	  'rtp'     list of directories used for runtime files
@@ -893,14 +900,16 @@ Short explanation of each option:		*option-list*
 'switchbuf'	  'swb'     sets behavior when switching to another buffer
 'synmaxcol'	  'smc'     maximum column to find syntax items
 'syntax'	  'syn'     syntax to be loaded for current buffer
-'tabstop'	  'ts'	    number of spaces that <Tab> in file uses
 'tabline'	  'tal'     custom format for the console tab pages line
 'tabpagemax'	  'tpm'     maximum number of tab pages for |-p| and "tab all"
+'tabstop'	  'ts'	    number of spaces that <Tab> in file uses
 'tagbsearch'	  'tbs'     use binary searching in tags files
+'tagcase'	  'tc'      how to handle case when searching in tags files
 'taglength'	  'tl'	    number of significant characters for a tag
 'tagrelative'	  'tr'	    file names in tag file are relative
 'tags'		  'tag'     list of file names used by the tag command
 'tagstack'	  'tgst'    push tags onto the tag stack
+'tcldll'		    name of the Tcl dynamic library
 'term'			    name of the terminal
 'termbidi'	  'tbidi'   terminal takes care of bi-directionality
 'termencoding'	  'tenc'    character encoding used by the terminal

runtime/doc/repeat.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Jan 07
+*repeat.txt*    For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -109,7 +109,13 @@ To abort this type CTRL-C twice.
 q{0-9a-zA-Z"}		Record typed characters into register {0-9a-zA-Z"}
 			(uppercase to append).  The 'q' command is disabled
 			while executing a register, and it doesn't work inside
-			a mapping and |:normal|.  {Vi: no recording}
+			a mapping and |:normal|.
+
+			Note: If the register being used for recording is also
+			used for |y| and |p| the result is most likely not
+			what is expected, because the put will paste the
+			recorded macro and the yank will overwrite the
+			recorded macro. {Vi: no recording}
 
 q			Stops recording.  (Implementation note: The 'q' that
 			stops recording is not stored in the register, unless
@@ -477,16 +483,44 @@ Additionally, these commands can be used:
 	finish		Finish the current script or user function and come
 			back to debug mode for the command after the one that
 			sourced or called it.
+							*>bt*
+							*>backtrace*
+							*>where*
+	backtrace	Show the call stacktrace for current debugging session.
+	bt
+	where
+							*>frame*
+	frame N		Goes to N bactrace level. + and - signs make movement
+			relative.  E.g., ":frame +3" goes three frames up.
+							*>up*
+	up		Goes one level up from call stacktrace.
+							*>down*
+	down		Goes one level down from call stacktrace.
 
 About the additional commands in debug mode:
 - There is no command-line completion for them, you get the completion for the
   normal Ex commands only.
-- You can shorten them, up to a single character: "c", "n", "s" and "f".
+- You can shorten them, up to a single character, unless more then one command
+  starts with the same letter.  "f" stands for "finish", use "fr" for "frame".
 - Hitting <CR> will repeat the previous one.  When doing another command, this
   is reset (because it's not clear what you want to repeat).
 - When you want to use the Ex command with the same name, prepend a colon:
   ":cont", ":next", ":finish" (or shorter).
 
+The backtrace shows the hierarchy of function calls, e.g.:
+	>bt ~
+	  3 function One[3] ~
+	  2 Two[3] ~
+	->1 Three[3] ~
+	  0 Four ~
+	line 1: let four = 4 ~
+
+The "->" points to the current frame.  Use "up", "down" and "frame N" to
+select another frame.
+
+In the current frame you can evaluate the local function variables.  There is
+no way to see the command at the current line yet.
+
 
 DEFINING BREAKPOINTS
 							*:breaka* *:breakadd*
@@ -600,6 +634,7 @@ For example, to profile the one_script.vim script file: >
 
 :prof[ile] start {fname}			*:prof* *:profile* *E750*
 		Start profiling, write the output in {fname} upon exit.
+		"~/" and environment variables in {fname} will be expanded.
 		If {fname} already exists it will be silently overwritten.
 		The variable |v:profiling| is set to one.
 

runtime/doc/spell.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*spell.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Sep 19
+*spell.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -1386,6 +1386,14 @@ the item name.  Case is always ignored.
 
 The Hunspell feature to use three arguments and flags is not supported.
 
+							*spell-NOCOMPOUNDSUGS*
+This item indicates that using compounding to make suggestions is not a good
+idea.  Use this when compounding is used with very short or one-character
+words.  E.g. to make numbers out of digits.  Without this flag creating
+suggestions would spend most time trying all kind of weird compound words.
+
+	NOCOMPOUNDSUGS ~
+
 							*spell-SYLLABLE*
 The SYLLABLE item defines characters or character sequences that are used to
 count the number of syllables in a word.  Example:

runtime/doc/syntax.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Mar 20
+*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 28
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -422,18 +422,19 @@ and last line to be converted.  Example, using the last set Visual area: >
 							*:TOhtml*
 :[range]TOhtml		The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
 			This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
-			range is given, set |g:html_start_line| and
-			|g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the range,
-			respectively. Default range is the entire buffer.
+			range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line|
+			and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the
+			range, respectively. Default range is the entire
+			buffer.
 
-                        If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
-                        |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
-                        all windows which are part of the diff in the current
-                        tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
-                        in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
-                        jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
-                        #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
-                        #W3L87 for line 87 in the third.
+			If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
+			|g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
+			all windows which are part of the diff in the current
+			tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
+			in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
+			jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
+			#W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
+			#W3L87 for line 87 in the third.
 
 			Examples: >
 
@@ -747,6 +748,22 @@ and UTF-32 instead, use: >
 Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
 compatibility problems with some major browsers.
 
+								 *g:html_font*
+Default: "monospace"
+You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using
+g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be
+surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list
+item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either
+way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire
+result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS).
+Examples: >
+
+   " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace;
+   :let g:html_font = "Consolas"
+
+   " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace;
+   :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"]
+<
 			*convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
 Default: 0.
 When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
@@ -1064,7 +1081,8 @@ CPP						*cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax*
 Most of things are same as |ft-c-syntax|.
 
 Variable		Highlight ~
-cpp_no_c11		don't highlight C++11 standard items
+cpp_no_cpp11		don't highlight C++11 standard items
+cpp_no_cpp14		don't highlight C++14 standard items
 
 
 CSH						*csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax*
@@ -1420,34 +1438,27 @@ form, then >
     :let fortran_fixed_source=1
 in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.
 
-If the form of the source code depends upon the file extension, then it is
-most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin file.  For more
-information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|.  For example, if all your
-fortran files with an .f90 extension are written in free source form and the
-rest in fixed source form, add the following code to your ftplugin file >
-    let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
-    if s:extfname ==? "f90"
-	let fortran_free_source=1
-	unlet! fortran_fixed_source
-    else
-	let fortran_fixed_source=1
-	unlet! fortran_free_source
-    endif
-Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
-precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.
+If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file
+extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin
+file.  For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this
+will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax
+on" command in your .vimrc file.
 
 When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free
 source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes
 fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set.  If
 neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to
-determine which source form has been used by examining the first five columns
-of the first 250 lines of your file.  If no signs of free source form are
-detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form.  The algorithm
-should work in the vast majority of cases.  In some cases, such as a file that
-begins with 250 or more full-line comments, the script may incorrectly decide
-that the fortran code is in fixed form.  If that happens, just add a
-non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns of the
-first twenty five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.
+determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension
+using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale
+compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for
+free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five
+columns of the first 500 lines of your file.  If no signs of free source form
+are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form.  The
+algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases.  In some cases, such as a
+file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may
+incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form.  If that happens,
+just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns
+of the first twenty five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.
 
 Tabs in fortran files ~
 Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards.  Tabs are not a good idea in
@@ -3231,7 +3242,8 @@ improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). >
 The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of
 embedded script highlighting they wish to have. >
 
-   g:vimsyn_embed == 0   : don't embed any scripts
+   g:vimsyn_embed == 0   : don't support any embedded scripts
+   g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua
    g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme
    g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl
    g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python
@@ -3249,6 +3261,7 @@ Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
    g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding
    g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups
    g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions
+   g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua      script
    g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script
    g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl     script
    g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python   script
@@ -3322,6 +3335,32 @@ must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it.
 It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
 	:set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-*
 
+
+YAML						*yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax*
+
+					*g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema*
+A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving 
+non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on 
+plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string 
+and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point, 
+integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values 
+will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are
+
+Schema		Description ~
+failsafe	No additional highlighting.
+json		Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null.
+core		Supports more number, boolean and null styles.
+pyyaml		In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps, 
+		but there are some differences in what is recognized as 
+		numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core 
+		schema.
+
+Default schema is `core`.
+
+Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the 
+only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only 
+difference defined in the syntax file.
+
 ==============================================================================
 5. Defining a syntax					*:syn-define* *E410*
 
@@ -3399,6 +3438,32 @@ SPELL CHECKING						*:syn-spell*
 
 	To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.
 
+SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING				*:syn-iskeyword*
+
+:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}]
+	This defines the keyword characters.  It's like the 'iskeyword' option
+	for but only applies to syntax highlighting.
+
+	clear:		Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the
+			buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used.
+	{option}        Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value. 
+
+	Example: >
+  :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_
+<
+	This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all
+	alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented
+	characters and also includes the "_" and the "$".
+
+	If no argument is given, the current value will be output.
+
+	Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns
+	and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new
+	match.
+
+	It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command
+	to the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change
+	the 'iskeyword' option.
 
 DEFINING KEYWORDS					*:syn-keyword*
 
@@ -3419,7 +3484,7 @@ DEFINING KEYWORDS					*:syn-keyword*
   :syntax keyword   Type   contained int long char
   :syntax keyword   Type   int long contained char
   :syntax keyword   Type   int long char contained
-<								*E789*
+<								*E789* *E890*
 	When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in
 	Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the
 	variations at once: >
@@ -3430,6 +3495,7 @@ DEFINING KEYWORDS					*:syn-keyword*
 	isn't, the keyword will never be recognized.
 	Multi-byte characters can also be used.  These do not have to be in
 	'iskeyword'.
+	See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings.
 
 	A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the
 	keyword is used if more than one item matches.	Keywords do not nest
@@ -3673,6 +3739,7 @@ Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
 'conceallevel' option.  The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
 concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
 edit the line.
+Another way to conceal text with with |matchadd()|.
 
 concealends						*:syn-concealends*
 
@@ -4119,7 +4186,7 @@ example, for instance, can be done like this: >
 
 As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty.	In the start pattern,
 it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it
-changes the \1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
+changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
 first external sub-expression in the start pattern.  External references can
 also be used in skip patterns: >
   :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1"

runtime/doc/tabpage.txt

@@ -202,23 +202,29 @@ REORDERING TAB PAGES:
 		Move the current tab page to after tab page N.  Use zero to
 		make the current tab page the first one.  Without N the tab
 		page is made the last one. >
+		    :.tabmove	" do nothing
 		    :-tabmove	" move the tab page to the left
-		    :tabmove	" move the tab page to the right
-		    :.tabmove	" as above
-		    :+tabmove	" as above
+		    :+tabmove	" move the tab page to the right
 		    :0tabmove	" move the tab page to the beginning of the tab
 				" list
-		    :$tabmove	" move the tab page to the end of the tab list
-<
+		    :tabmove 0	" as above
+		    :tabmove	" move the tab page to the last
+		    :$tabmove	" as above
+		    :tabmove $	" as above
 
 :tabm[ove] +[N]
 :tabm[ove] -[N]
 		Move the current tab page N places to the right (with +) or to
-		the left (with -).
+		the left (with -). >
+		    :tabmove -	" move the tab page to the left
+		    :tabmove -1	" as above
+		    :tabmove +	" move the tab page to the right
+		    :tabmove +1	" as above
+
 
 Note that although it is possible to move a tab behind the N-th one by using
-:Ntabmove, it is impossible to move it by N places by using :+Ntabmove. For
-clarification what +N means in this context see |[range]|.
+:Ntabmove. And move it by N places by using :+Ntabmove. For clarification what
++N means in this context see |[range]|.
 
 
 LOOPING OVER TAB PAGES:
@@ -242,7 +248,8 @@ LOOPING OVER TAB PAGES:
 		{cmd} must not open or close tab pages or reorder them.
 		{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
 		|+listcmds| feature}
-		Also see |:windo|, |:argdo| and |:bufdo|.
+		Also see |:windo|, |:argdo|, |:bufdo|, |:cdo|, |:ldo|, |:cfdo|
+		and |:lfdo|
 
 ==============================================================================
 3. Other items						*tab-page-other*

runtime/doc/tags

@@ -76,6 +76,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'bdir'	options.txt	/*'bdir'*
 'bdlay'	options.txt	/*'bdlay'*
 'beautify'	vi_diff.txt	/*'beautify'*
+'belloff'	options.txt	/*'belloff'*
 'beval'	options.txt	/*'beval'*
 'bex'	options.txt	/*'bex'*
 'bexpr'	options.txt	/*'bexpr'*
@@ -89,6 +90,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'bk'	options.txt	/*'bk'*
 'bkc'	options.txt	/*'bkc'*
 'bl'	options.txt	/*'bl'*
+'bo'	options.txt	/*'bo'*
 'bomb'	options.txt	/*'bomb'*
 'breakat'	options.txt	/*'breakat'*
 'breakindent'	options.txt	/*'breakindent'*
@@ -246,6 +248,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'fileignorecase'	options.txt	/*'fileignorecase'*
 'filetype'	options.txt	/*'filetype'*
 'fillchars'	options.txt	/*'fillchars'*
+'fixendofline'	options.txt	/*'fixendofline'*
+'fixeol'	options.txt	/*'fixeol'*
 'fk'	options.txt	/*'fk'*
 'fkmap'	options.txt	/*'fkmap'*
 'fl'	vi_diff.txt	/*'fl'*
@@ -411,6 +415,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'lpl'	options.txt	/*'lpl'*
 'ls'	options.txt	/*'ls'*
 'lsp'	options.txt	/*'lsp'*
+'luadll'	options.txt	/*'luadll'*
 'lw'	options.txt	/*'lw'*
 'lz'	options.txt	/*'lz'*
 'ma'	options.txt	/*'ma'*
@@ -495,6 +500,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'nobk'	options.txt	/*'nobk'*
 'nobl'	options.txt	/*'nobl'*
 'nobomb'	options.txt	/*'nobomb'*
+'nobreakindent'	options.txt	/*'nobreakindent'*
+'nobri'	options.txt	/*'nobri'*
 'nobuflisted'	options.txt	/*'nobuflisted'*
 'nocf'	options.txt	/*'nocf'*
 'noci'	options.txt	/*'noci'*
@@ -540,9 +547,13 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'nofen'	options.txt	/*'nofen'*
 'nofic'	options.txt	/*'nofic'*
 'nofileignorecase'	options.txt	/*'nofileignorecase'*
+'nofixendofline'	options.txt	/*'nofixendofline'*
+'nofixeol'	options.txt	/*'nofixeol'*
 'nofk'	options.txt	/*'nofk'*
 'nofkmap'	options.txt	/*'nofkmap'*
 'nofoldenable'	options.txt	/*'nofoldenable'*
+'nofs'	options.txt	/*'nofs'*
+'nofsync'	options.txt	/*'nofsync'*
 'nogd'	options.txt	/*'nogd'*
 'nogdefault'	options.txt	/*'nogdefault'*
 'noguipty'	options.txt	/*'noguipty'*
@@ -569,11 +580,13 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'nois'	options.txt	/*'nois'*
 'nojoinspaces'	options.txt	/*'nojoinspaces'*
 'nojs'	options.txt	/*'nojs'*
+'nolangnoremap'	options.txt	/*'nolangnoremap'*
 'nolazyredraw'	options.txt	/*'nolazyredraw'*
 'nolbr'	options.txt	/*'nolbr'*
 'nolinebreak'	options.txt	/*'nolinebreak'*
 'nolisp'	options.txt	/*'nolisp'*
 'nolist'	options.txt	/*'nolist'*
+'nolnr'	options.txt	/*'nolnr'*
 'noloadplugins'	options.txt	/*'noloadplugins'*
 'nolpl'	options.txt	/*'nolpl'*
 'nolz'	options.txt	/*'nolz'*
@@ -721,6 +734,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'path'	options.txt	/*'path'*
 'pdev'	options.txt	/*'pdev'*
 'penc'	options.txt	/*'penc'*
+'perldll'	options.txt	/*'perldll'*
 'pex'	options.txt	/*'pex'*
 'pexpr'	options.txt	/*'pexpr'*
 'pfn'	options.txt	/*'pfn'*
@@ -747,6 +761,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'pumheight'	options.txt	/*'pumheight'*
 'pvh'	options.txt	/*'pvh'*
 'pvw'	options.txt	/*'pvw'*
+'pythondll'	options.txt	/*'pythondll'*
+'pythonthreedll'	options.txt	/*'pythonthreedll'*
 'qe'	options.txt	/*'qe'*
 'quote	motion.txt	/*'quote*
 'quoteescape'	options.txt	/*'quoteescape'*
@@ -773,6 +789,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'rs'	options.txt	/*'rs'*
 'rtp'	options.txt	/*'rtp'*
 'ru'	options.txt	/*'ru'*
+'rubydll'	options.txt	/*'rubydll'*
 'ruf'	options.txt	/*'ruf'*
 'ruler'	options.txt	/*'ruler'*
 'rulerformat'	options.txt	/*'rulerformat'*
@@ -929,9 +946,11 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 't_KJ'	term.txt	/*'t_KJ'*
 't_KK'	term.txt	/*'t_KK'*
 't_KL'	term.txt	/*'t_KL'*
+'t_RB'	term.txt	/*'t_RB'*
 't_RI'	term.txt	/*'t_RI'*
 't_RV'	term.txt	/*'t_RV'*
 't_SI'	term.txt	/*'t_SI'*
+'t_SR'	term.txt	/*'t_SR'*
 't_Sb'	term.txt	/*'t_Sb'*
 't_Sf'	term.txt	/*'t_Sf'*
 't_WP'	term.txt	/*'t_WP'*
@@ -1003,6 +1022,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'tabstop'	options.txt	/*'tabstop'*
 'tag'	options.txt	/*'tag'*
 'tagbsearch'	options.txt	/*'tagbsearch'*
+'tagcase'	options.txt	/*'tagcase'*
 'taglength'	options.txt	/*'taglength'*
 'tagrelative'	options.txt	/*'tagrelative'*
 'tags'	options.txt	/*'tags'*
@@ -1013,6 +1033,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'tbidi'	options.txt	/*'tbidi'*
 'tbis'	options.txt	/*'tbis'*
 'tbs'	options.txt	/*'tbs'*
+'tc'	options.txt	/*'tc'*
+'tcldll'	options.txt	/*'tcldll'*
 'tenc'	options.txt	/*'tenc'*
 'term'	options.txt	/*'term'*
 'termbidi'	options.txt	/*'termbidi'*
@@ -1157,6 +1179,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 +browse	various.txt	/*+browse*
 +builtin_terms	various.txt	/*+builtin_terms*
 +byte_offset	various.txt	/*+byte_offset*
++channel	various.txt	/*+channel*
 +cindent	various.txt	/*+cindent*
 +clientserver	various.txt	/*+clientserver*
 +clipboard	various.txt	/*+clipboard*
@@ -1836,6 +1859,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :CompilerSet	usr_41.txt	/*:CompilerSet*
 :DiffOrig	diff.txt	/*:DiffOrig*
 :DoMatchParen	pi_paren.txt	/*:DoMatchParen*
+:ELP	pi_logipat.txt	/*:ELP*
 :Explore	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Explore*
 :GLVS	pi_getscript.txt	/*:GLVS*
 :GetLatestVimScripts_dat	pi_getscript.txt	/*:GetLatestVimScripts_dat*
@@ -1843,7 +1867,10 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :GnatPretty	ft_ada.txt	/*:GnatPretty*
 :GnatTags	ft_ada.txt	/*:GnatTags*
 :Hexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Hexplore*
+:LP	pi_logipat.txt	/*:LP*
+:LPF	pi_logipat.txt	/*:LPF*
 :Lexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*:Lexplore*
+:LogiPat	pi_logipat.txt	/*:LogiPat*
 :Man	filetype.txt	/*:Man*
 :MkVimball	pi_vimball.txt	/*:MkVimball*
 :N	editing.txt	/*:N*
@@ -2003,11 +2030,13 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :cclose	quickfix.txt	/*:cclose*
 :cd	editing.txt	/*:cd*
 :cd-	editing.txt	/*:cd-*
+:cdo	quickfix.txt	/*:cdo*
 :ce	change.txt	/*:ce*
 :center	change.txt	/*:center*
 :cex	quickfix.txt	/*:cex*
 :cexpr	quickfix.txt	/*:cexpr*
 :cf	quickfix.txt	/*:cf*
+:cfdo	quickfix.txt	/*:cfdo*
 :cfile	quickfix.txt	/*:cfile*
 :cfir	quickfix.txt	/*:cfir*
 :cfirst	quickfix.txt	/*:cfirst*
@@ -2118,6 +2147,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :delm	motion.txt	/*:delm*
 :delmarks	motion.txt	/*:delmarks*
 :di	change.txt	/*:di*
+:dif	diff.txt	/*:dif*
 :diffg	diff.txt	/*:diffg*
 :diffget	diff.txt	/*:diffget*
 :diffo	diff.txt	/*:diffo*
@@ -2130,7 +2160,6 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :diffsplit	diff.txt	/*:diffsplit*
 :difft	diff.txt	/*:difft*
 :diffthis	diff.txt	/*:diffthis*
-:diffu	diff.txt	/*:diffu*
 :diffupdate	diff.txt	/*:diffupdate*
 :dig	digraph.txt	/*:dig*
 :digraphs	digraph.txt	/*:digraphs*
@@ -2354,6 +2383,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :lclose	quickfix.txt	/*:lclose*
 :lcs	if_cscop.txt	/*:lcs*
 :lcscope	if_cscop.txt	/*:lcscope*
+:ldo	quickfix.txt	/*:ldo*
 :le	change.txt	/*:le*
 :left	change.txt	/*:left*
 :lefta	windows.txt	/*:lefta*
@@ -2372,6 +2402,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :lex	quickfix.txt	/*:lex*
 :lexpr	quickfix.txt	/*:lexpr*
 :lf	quickfix.txt	/*:lf*
+:lfdo	quickfix.txt	/*:lfdo*
 :lfile	quickfix.txt	/*:lfile*
 :lfir	quickfix.txt	/*:lfir*
 :lfirst	quickfix.txt	/*:lfirst*
@@ -2698,6 +2729,14 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :rviminfo	starting.txt	/*:rviminfo*
 :s	change.txt	/*:s*
 :s%	change.txt	/*:s%*
+:sI	change.txt	/*:sI*
+:sIc	change.txt	/*:sIc*
+:sIe	change.txt	/*:sIe*
+:sIg	change.txt	/*:sIg*
+:sIl	change.txt	/*:sIl*
+:sIn	change.txt	/*:sIn*
+:sIp	change.txt	/*:sIp*
+:sIr	change.txt	/*:sIr*
 :sN	windows.txt	/*:sN*
 :sNext	windows.txt	/*:sNext*
 :s\=	change.txt	/*:s\\=*
@@ -2729,6 +2768,13 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :sbr	windows.txt	/*:sbr*
 :sbrewind	windows.txt	/*:sbrewind*
 :sbuffer	windows.txt	/*:sbuffer*
+:sc	change.txt	/*:sc*
+:scI	change.txt	/*:scI*
+:sce	change.txt	/*:sce*
+:scg	change.txt	/*:scg*
+:sci	change.txt	/*:sci*
+:scl	change.txt	/*:scl*
+:scp	change.txt	/*:scp*
 :scr	repeat.txt	/*:scr*
 :scripte	repeat.txt	/*:scripte*
 :scriptencoding	repeat.txt	/*:scriptencoding*
@@ -2762,8 +2808,20 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :sfind	windows.txt	/*:sfind*
 :sfir	windows.txt	/*:sfir*
 :sfirst	windows.txt	/*:sfirst*
+:sg	change.txt	/*:sg*
+:sgI	change.txt	/*:sgI*
+:sgc	change.txt	/*:sgc*
+:sge	change.txt	/*:sge*
+:sgi	change.txt	/*:sgi*
+:sgl	change.txt	/*:sgl*
+:sgn	change.txt	/*:sgn*
+:sgp	change.txt	/*:sgp*
+:sgr	change.txt	/*:sgr*
 :sh	various.txt	/*:sh*
 :shell	various.txt	/*:shell*
+:si	change.txt	/*:si*
+:sic	change.txt	/*:sic*
+:sie	change.txt	/*:sie*
 :sig	sign.txt	/*:sig*
 :sign	sign.txt	/*:sign*
 :sign-define	sign.txt	/*:sign-define*
@@ -2778,6 +2836,9 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :silent	various.txt	/*:silent*
 :sim	gui_w32.txt	/*:sim*
 :simalt	gui_w32.txt	/*:simalt*
+:sin	change.txt	/*:sin*
+:sip	change.txt	/*:sip*
+:sir	change.txt	/*:sir*
 :sl	various.txt	/*:sl*
 :sla	windows.txt	/*:sla*
 :slast	windows.txt	/*:slast*
@@ -2790,6 +2851,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :smapclear	map.txt	/*:smapclear*
 :sme	gui.txt	/*:sme*
 :smenu	gui.txt	/*:smenu*
+:smile	index.txt	/*:smile*
 :sn	windows.txt	/*:sn*
 :snext	windows.txt	/*:snext*
 :sni	if_sniff.txt	/*:sni*
@@ -2822,8 +2884,16 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :split_f	windows.txt	/*:split_f*
 :spr	windows.txt	/*:spr*
 :sprevious	windows.txt	/*:sprevious*
+:sr	change.txt	/*:sr*
+:srI	change.txt	/*:srI*
+:src	change.txt	/*:src*
 :sre	windows.txt	/*:sre*
 :srewind	windows.txt	/*:srewind*
+:srg	change.txt	/*:srg*
+:sri	change.txt	/*:sri*
+:srl	change.txt	/*:srl*
+:srn	change.txt	/*:srn*
+:srp	change.txt	/*:srp*
 :st	starting.txt	/*:st*
 :sta	windows.txt	/*:sta*
 :stag	windows.txt	/*:stag*
@@ -2879,6 +2949,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :syn-files	syntax.txt	/*:syn-files*
 :syn-fold	syntax.txt	/*:syn-fold*
 :syn-include	syntax.txt	/*:syn-include*
+:syn-iskeyword	syntax.txt	/*:syn-iskeyword*
 :syn-keepend	syntax.txt	/*:syn-keepend*
 :syn-keyword	syntax.txt	/*:syn-keyword*
 :syn-lc	syntax.txt	/*:syn-lc*
@@ -3298,12 +3369,18 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 ==	change.txt	/*==*
 >	change.txt	/*>*
 >>	change.txt	/*>>*
+>backtrace	repeat.txt	/*>backtrace*
+>bt	repeat.txt	/*>bt*
 >cont	repeat.txt	/*>cont*
+>down	repeat.txt	/*>down*
 >finish	repeat.txt	/*>finish*
+>frame	repeat.txt	/*>frame*
 >interrupt	repeat.txt	/*>interrupt*
 >next	repeat.txt	/*>next*
 >quit	repeat.txt	/*>quit*
 >step	repeat.txt	/*>step*
+>up	repeat.txt	/*>up*
+>where	repeat.txt	/*>where*
 ?	pattern.txt	/*?*
 ?<CR>	pattern.txt	/*?<CR>*
 @	repeat.txt	/*@*
@@ -4058,8 +4135,8 @@ E627	netbeans.txt	/*E627*
 E628	netbeans.txt	/*E628*
 E629	netbeans.txt	/*E629*
 E63	pattern.txt	/*E63*
-E630	netbeans.txt	/*E630*
-E631	netbeans.txt	/*E631*
+E630	channel.txt	/*E630*
+E631	channel.txt	/*E631*
 E632	netbeans.txt	/*E632*
 E633	netbeans.txt	/*E633*
 E634	netbeans.txt	/*E634*
@@ -4341,7 +4418,23 @@ E887	if_pyth.txt	/*E887*
 E888	pattern.txt	/*E888*
 E889	map.txt	/*E889*
 E89	message.txt	/*E89*
+E890	syntax.txt	/*E890*
+E891	eval.txt	/*E891*
+E892	eval.txt	/*E892*
+E893	eval.txt	/*E893*
+E894	eval.txt	/*E894*
+E895	if_mzsch.txt	/*E895*
+E896	channel.txt	/*E896*
+E897	channel.txt	/*E897*
+E898	channel.txt	/*E898*
+E899	channel.txt	/*E899*
 E90	message.txt	/*E90*
+E900	channel.txt	/*E900*
+E901	channel.txt	/*E901*
+E902	channel.txt	/*E902*
+E903	channel.txt	/*E903*
+E904	channel.txt	/*E904*
+E905	channel.txt	/*E905*
 E91	options.txt	/*E91*
 E92	message.txt	/*E92*
 E93	windows.txt	/*E93*
@@ -4420,6 +4513,8 @@ L	motion.txt	/*L*
 Linux-backspace	options.txt	/*Linux-backspace*
 List	eval.txt	/*List*
 Lists	eval.txt	/*Lists*
+LogiPat()	pi_logipat.txt	/*LogiPat()*
+LogiPat-flags	pi_logipat.txt	/*LogiPat-flags*
 Lua	if_lua.txt	/*Lua*
 M	motion.txt	/*M*
 MDI	starting.txt	/*MDI*
@@ -4466,6 +4561,7 @@ OffTheSpot	mbyte.txt	/*OffTheSpot*
 OnTheSpot	mbyte.txt	/*OnTheSpot*
 Operator-pending	intro.txt	/*Operator-pending*
 Operator-pending-mode	intro.txt	/*Operator-pending-mode*
+OptionSet	autocmd.txt	/*OptionSet*
 OverTheSpot	mbyte.txt	/*OverTheSpot*
 P	change.txt	/*P*
 PATHEXT	eval.txt	/*PATHEXT*
@@ -4555,6 +4651,7 @@ SourcePre	autocmd.txt	/*SourcePre*
 SpellFileMissing	autocmd.txt	/*SpellFileMissing*
 StdinReadPost	autocmd.txt	/*StdinReadPost*
 StdinReadPre	autocmd.txt	/*StdinReadPre*
+String	eval.txt	/*String*
 SwapExists	autocmd.txt	/*SwapExists*
 Syntax	autocmd.txt	/*Syntax*
 T	motion.txt	/*T*
@@ -4799,6 +4896,7 @@ added-win32-GUI	version5.txt	/*added-win32-GUI*
 aff-dic-format	spell.txt	/*aff-dic-format*
 after-directory	options.txt	/*after-directory*
 aleph	options.txt	/*aleph*
+alloc_fail()	eval.txt	/*alloc_fail()*
 alt	intro.txt	/*alt*
 alt-input	debugger.txt	/*alt-input*
 alternate-file	editing.txt	/*alternate-file*
@@ -4827,6 +4925,11 @@ asin()	eval.txt	/*asin()*
 asm.vim	syntax.txt	/*asm.vim*
 asm68k	syntax.txt	/*asm68k*
 asmh8300.vim	syntax.txt	/*asmh8300.vim*
+assert_equal()	eval.txt	/*assert_equal()*
+assert_exception()	eval.txt	/*assert_exception()*
+assert_fails()	eval.txt	/*assert_fails()*
+assert_false()	eval.txt	/*assert_false()*
+assert_true()	eval.txt	/*assert_true()*
 at	motion.txt	/*at*
 atan()	eval.txt	/*atan()*
 atan2()	eval.txt	/*atan2()*
@@ -4874,6 +4977,7 @@ b:current_syntax-variable	syntax.txt	/*b:current_syntax-variable*
 b:netrw_lastfile	pi_netrw.txt	/*b:netrw_lastfile*
 b:tex_stylish	syntax.txt	/*b:tex_stylish*
 b:var	eval.txt	/*b:var*
+b:yaml_schema	syntax.txt	/*b:yaml_schema*
 baan-folding	syntax.txt	/*baan-folding*
 baan-syntax	syntax.txt	/*baan-syntax*
 baan.vim	syntax.txt	/*baan.vim*
@@ -4984,6 +5088,7 @@ c_<Home>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<Home>*
 c_<Insert>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<Insert>*
 c_<Left>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<Left>*
 c_<LeftMouse>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<LeftMouse>*
+c_<MiddleMouse>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<MiddleMouse>*
 c_<NL>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<NL>*
 c_<PageDown>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<PageDown>*
 c_<PageUp>	cmdline.txt	/*c_<PageUp>*
@@ -5076,6 +5181,15 @@ changelog.vim	syntax.txt	/*changelog.vim*
 changenr()	eval.txt	/*changenr()*
 changetick	eval.txt	/*changetick*
 changing	change.txt	/*changing*
+channel	channel.txt	/*channel*
+channel-callback	channel.txt	/*channel-callback*
+channel-commands	channel.txt	/*channel-commands*
+channel-demo	channel.txt	/*channel-demo*
+channel-mode	channel.txt	/*channel-mode*
+channel-open	channel.txt	/*channel-open*
+channel-raw	channel.txt	/*channel-raw*
+channel-use	channel.txt	/*channel-use*
+channel.txt	channel.txt	/*channel.txt*
 char-variable	eval.txt	/*char-variable*
 char2nr()	eval.txt	/*char2nr()*
 characterwise	motion.txt	/*characterwise*
@@ -5200,12 +5314,14 @@ complete_CTRL-E	insert.txt	/*complete_CTRL-E*
 complete_CTRL-Y	insert.txt	/*complete_CTRL-Y*
 complete_add()	eval.txt	/*complete_add()*
 complete_check()	eval.txt	/*complete_check()*
+completed_item-variable	eval.txt	/*completed_item-variable*
 completion-functions	usr_41.txt	/*completion-functions*
 complex-change	change.txt	/*complex-change*
 complex-repeat	repeat.txt	/*complex-repeat*
 compress	pi_gzip.txt	/*compress*
 conceal	syntax.txt	/*conceal*
 confirm()	eval.txt	/*confirm()*
+connect()	eval.txt	/*connect()*
 connection-refused	message.txt	/*connection-refused*
 console-menus	gui.txt	/*console-menus*
 control	intro.txt	/*control*
@@ -5516,6 +5632,7 @@ errorformat-multi-line	quickfix.txt	/*errorformat-multi-line*
 errorformat-separate-filename	quickfix.txt	/*errorformat-separate-filename*
 errorformats	quickfix.txt	/*errorformats*
 errors	message.txt	/*errors*
+errors-variable	eval.txt	/*errors-variable*
 escape	intro.txt	/*escape*
 escape()	eval.txt	/*escape()*
 escape-bar	version4.txt	/*escape-bar*
@@ -5635,8 +5752,10 @@ extend()	eval.txt	/*extend()*
 extension-removal	cmdline.txt	/*extension-removal*
 extensions-improvements	todo.txt	/*extensions-improvements*
 f	motion.txt	/*f*
+false-variable	eval.txt	/*false-variable*
 faq	intro.txt	/*faq*
 farsi	farsi.txt	/*farsi*
+farsi-fonts	farsi.txt	/*farsi-fonts*
 farsi.txt	farsi.txt	/*farsi.txt*
 fasm.vim	syntax.txt	/*fasm.vim*
 fcs_choice-variable	eval.txt	/*fcs_choice-variable*
@@ -5883,6 +6002,7 @@ ft-xhtml-omni	insert.txt	/*ft-xhtml-omni*
 ft-xml-omni	insert.txt	/*ft-xml-omni*
 ft-xml-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-xml-syntax*
 ft-xpm-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-xpm-syntax*
+ft-yaml-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ft-yaml-syntax*
 ft_ada.txt	ft_ada.txt	/*ft_ada.txt*
 ft_sql.txt	ft_sql.txt	/*ft_sql.txt*
 ftdetect	filetype.txt	/*ftdetect*
@@ -5917,8 +6037,10 @@ g0	motion.txt	/*g0*
 g8	various.txt	/*g8*
 g:	eval.txt	/*g:*
 g:NetrwTopLvlMenu	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:NetrwTopLvlMenu*
+g:Netrw_UserMaps	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:Netrw_UserMaps*
 g:Netrw_corehandler	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:Netrw_corehandler*
 g:Netrw_funcref	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:Netrw_funcref*
+g:actual_curbuf	options.txt	/*g:actual_curbuf*
 g:ada#Comment	ft_ada.txt	/*g:ada#Comment*
 g:ada#Ctags_Kinds	ft_ada.txt	/*g:ada#Ctags_Kinds*
 g:ada#DotWordRegex	ft_ada.txt	/*g:ada#DotWordRegex*
@@ -5975,6 +6097,7 @@ g:html_dynamic_folds	syntax.txt	/*g:html_dynamic_folds*
 g:html_encoding_override	syntax.txt	/*g:html_encoding_override*
 g:html_end_line	syntax.txt	/*g:html_end_line*
 g:html_expand_tabs	syntax.txt	/*g:html_expand_tabs*
+g:html_font	syntax.txt	/*g:html_font*
 g:html_hover_unfold	syntax.txt	/*g:html_hover_unfold*
 g:html_id_expr	syntax.txt	/*g:html_id_expr*
 g:html_ignore_conceal	syntax.txt	/*g:html_ignore_conceal*
@@ -6078,8 +6201,10 @@ g:netrw_uid	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_uid*
 g:netrw_use_errorwindow	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_use_errorwindow*
 g:netrw_use_noswf	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_use_noswf*
 g:netrw_use_nt_rcp	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_use_nt_rcp*
+g:netrw_usetab	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_usetab*
 g:netrw_win95ftp	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_win95ftp*
 g:netrw_winsize	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_winsize*
+g:netrw_wiw	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_wiw*
 g:netrw_xstrlen	pi_netrw.txt	/*g:netrw_xstrlen*
 g:sh_isk	syntax.txt	/*g:sh_isk*
 g:sh_noisk	syntax.txt	/*g:sh_noisk*
@@ -6112,6 +6237,7 @@ g:vimsyn_folding	syntax.txt	/*g:vimsyn_folding*
 g:vimsyn_maxlines	syntax.txt	/*g:vimsyn_maxlines*
 g:vimsyn_minlines	syntax.txt	/*g:vimsyn_minlines*
 g:vimsyn_noerror	syntax.txt	/*g:vimsyn_noerror*
+g:yaml_schema	syntax.txt	/*g:yaml_schema*
 g:zip_nomax	pi_zip.txt	/*g:zip_nomax*
 g:zip_shq	pi_zip.txt	/*g:zip_shq*
 g:zip_unzipcmd	pi_zip.txt	/*g:zip_unzipcmd*
@@ -6163,6 +6289,7 @@ getbufline()	eval.txt	/*getbufline()*
 getbufvar()	eval.txt	/*getbufvar()*
 getchar()	eval.txt	/*getchar()*
 getcharmod()	eval.txt	/*getcharmod()*
+getcharsearch()	eval.txt	/*getcharsearch()*
 getcmdline()	eval.txt	/*getcmdline()*
 getcmdpos()	eval.txt	/*getcmdpos()*
 getcmdtype()	eval.txt	/*getcmdtype()*
@@ -6520,6 +6647,7 @@ i_CTRL-G_<Down>	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-G_<Down>*
 i_CTRL-G_<Up>	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-G_<Up>*
 i_CTRL-G_CTRL-J	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-G_CTRL-J*
 i_CTRL-G_CTRL-K	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-G_CTRL-K*
+i_CTRL-G_U	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-G_U*
 i_CTRL-G_j	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-G_j*
 i_CTRL-G_k	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-G_k*
 i_CTRL-G_u	insert.txt	/*i_CTRL-G_u*
@@ -6679,8 +6807,11 @@ java-indenting	indent.txt	/*java-indenting*
 java.vim	syntax.txt	/*java.vim*
 javascript-cinoptions	indent.txt	/*javascript-cinoptions*
 javascript-indenting	indent.txt	/*javascript-indenting*
+job-control	channel.txt	/*job-control*
 join()	eval.txt	/*join()*
 jsbterm-mouse	options.txt	/*jsbterm-mouse*
+jsondecode()	eval.txt	/*jsondecode()*
+jsonencode()	eval.txt	/*jsonencode()*
 jtags	tagsrch.txt	/*jtags*
 jump-motions	motion.txt	/*jump-motions*
 jumplist	motion.txt	/*jumplist*
@@ -6729,6 +6860,7 @@ lcs-eol	options.txt	/*lcs-eol*
 lcs-extends	options.txt	/*lcs-extends*
 lcs-nbsp	options.txt	/*lcs-nbsp*
 lcs-precedes	options.txt	/*lcs-precedes*
+lcs-space	options.txt	/*lcs-space*
 lcs-tab	options.txt	/*lcs-tab*
 lcs-trail	options.txt	/*lcs-trail*
 left-right-motions	motion.txt	/*left-right-motions*
@@ -6776,6 +6908,18 @@ location-list	quickfix.txt	/*location-list*
 location-list-window	quickfix.txt	/*location-list-window*
 log()	eval.txt	/*log()*
 log10()	eval.txt	/*log10()*
+logipat	pi_logipat.txt	/*logipat*
+logipat-arg	pi_logipat.txt	/*logipat-arg*
+logipat-caveat	pi_logipat.txt	/*logipat-caveat*
+logipat-contents	pi_logipat.txt	/*logipat-contents*
+logipat-copyright	pi_logipat.txt	/*logipat-copyright*
+logipat-examples	pi_logipat.txt	/*logipat-examples*
+logipat-history	pi_logipat.txt	/*logipat-history*
+logipat-input	pi_logipat.txt	/*logipat-input*
+logipat-man	pi_logipat.txt	/*logipat-man*
+logipat-manual	pi_logipat.txt	/*logipat-manual*
+logipat-operators	pi_logipat.txt	/*logipat-operators*
+logipat-pattern	pi_logipat.txt	/*logipat-pattern*
 long-lines	version5.txt	/*long-lines*
 love	intro.txt	/*love*
 lowercase	change.txt	/*lowercase*
@@ -6784,6 +6928,7 @@ lua	if_lua.txt	/*lua*
 lua-buffer	if_lua.txt	/*lua-buffer*
 lua-commands	if_lua.txt	/*lua-commands*
 lua-dict	if_lua.txt	/*lua-dict*
+lua-dynamic	if_lua.txt	/*lua-dynamic*
 lua-eval	if_lua.txt	/*lua-eval*
 lua-funcref	if_lua.txt	/*lua-funcref*
 lua-list	if_lua.txt	/*lua-list*
@@ -6813,12 +6958,17 @@ mail.vim	syntax.txt	/*mail.vim*
 maillist	intro.txt	/*maillist*
 maillist-archive	intro.txt	/*maillist-archive*
 make.vim	syntax.txt	/*make.vim*
+man.vim	filetype.txt	/*man.vim*
 manual-copyright	usr_01.txt	/*manual-copyright*
 map()	eval.txt	/*map()*
 map-<SID>	map.txt	/*map-<SID>*
+map-CTRL-C	map.txt	/*map-CTRL-C*
 map-ambiguous	map.txt	/*map-ambiguous*
+map-backslash	map.txt	/*map-backslash*
 map-backtick	tips.txt	/*map-backtick*
+map-bar	map.txt	/*map-bar*
 map-comments	map.txt	/*map-comments*
+map-empty-rhs	map.txt	/*map-empty-rhs*
 map-error	map.txt	/*map-error*
 map-examples	map.txt	/*map-examples*
 map-keys-fails	map.txt	/*map-keys-fails*
@@ -6827,7 +6977,10 @@ map-modes	map.txt	/*map-modes*
 map-multibyte	map.txt	/*map-multibyte*
 map-overview	map.txt	/*map-overview*
 map-precedence	map.txt	/*map-precedence*
+map-return	map.txt	/*map-return*
 map-self-destroy	tips.txt	/*map-self-destroy*
+map-space_in_lhs	map.txt	/*map-space_in_lhs*
+map-space_in_rhs	map.txt	/*map-space_in_rhs*
 map-typing	map.txt	/*map-typing*
 map-which-keys	map.txt	/*map-which-keys*
 map.txt	map.txt	/*map.txt*
@@ -6970,6 +7123,7 @@ mzscheme-examples	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-examples*
 mzscheme-funcref	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-funcref*
 mzscheme-mzeval	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-mzeval*
 mzscheme-sandbox	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-sandbox*
+mzscheme-setup	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-setup*
 mzscheme-threads	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-threads*
 mzscheme-vim	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-vim*
 mzscheme-vimext	if_mzsch.txt	/*mzscheme-vimext*
@@ -7022,6 +7176,10 @@ netrw-D	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-D*
 netrw-O	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-O*
 netrw-P	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-P*
 netrw-P18	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-P18*
+netrw-P19	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-P19*
+netrw-P20	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-P20*
+netrw-P21	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-P21*
+netrw-P22	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-P22*
 netrw-R	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-R*
 netrw-S	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-S*
 netrw-Tb	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-Tb*
@@ -7041,6 +7199,7 @@ netrw-browser-settings	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browser-settings*
 netrw-browser-var	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browser-var*
 netrw-browsing	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-browsing*
 netrw-c	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-c*
+netrw-c-tab	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-c-tab*
 netrw-cadaver	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-cadaver*
 netrw-chgup	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-chgup*
 netrw-clean	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-clean*
@@ -7062,6 +7221,7 @@ netrw-dir	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-dir*
 netrw-dirlist	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-dirlist*
 netrw-downdir	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-downdir*
 netrw-edithide	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-edithide*
+netrw-editwindow	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-editwindow*
 netrw-ex	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-ex*
 netrw-explore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-explore*
 netrw-explore-cmds	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-explore-cmds*
@@ -7077,6 +7237,7 @@ netrw-getftype	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-getftype*
 netrw-gf	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-gf*
 netrw-gh	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-gh*
 netrw-gitignore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-gitignore*
+netrw-gn	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-gn*
 netrw-gp	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-gp*
 netrw-grep	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-grep*
 netrw-gx	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-gx*
@@ -7122,12 +7283,14 @@ netrw-mv	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-mv*
 netrw-mx	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-mx*
 netrw-mz	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-mz*
 netrw-netrc	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-netrc*
+netrw-newfile	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-newfile*
 netrw-nexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-nexplore*
 netrw-noload	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-noload*
 netrw-nread	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-nread*
 netrw-ntree	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-ntree*
 netrw-nwrite	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-nwrite*
 netrw-o	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-o*
+netrw-obtain	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-obtain*
 netrw-options	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-options*
 netrw-p	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-p*
 netrw-p1	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-p1*
@@ -7169,6 +7332,7 @@ netrw-quickmaps	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-quickmaps*
 netrw-r	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-r*
 netrw-read	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-read*
 netrw-ref	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-ref*
+netrw-refresh	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-refresh*
 netrw-rename	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-rename*
 netrw-reverse	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-reverse*
 netrw-rexplore	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-rexplore*
@@ -7195,6 +7359,7 @@ netrw-transparent	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-transparent*
 netrw-u	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-u*
 netrw-updir	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-updir*
 netrw-urls	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-urls*
+netrw-usermaps	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-usermaps*
 netrw-userpass	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-userpass*
 netrw-v	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-v*
 netrw-var	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-var*
@@ -7296,6 +7461,7 @@ no-eval-feature	eval.txt	/*no-eval-feature*
 no_buffers_menu	gui.txt	/*no_buffers_menu*
 non-greedy	pattern.txt	/*non-greedy*
 non-zero-arg	eval.txt	/*non-zero-arg*
+none-variable	eval.txt	/*none-variable*
 normal-index	index.txt	/*normal-index*
 not-compatible	usr_01.txt	/*not-compatible*
 not-edited	editing.txt	/*not-edited*
@@ -7303,6 +7469,7 @@ notation	intro.txt	/*notation*
 notepad	gui_w32.txt	/*notepad*
 nr2char()	eval.txt	/*nr2char()*
 nroff.vim	syntax.txt	/*nroff.vim*
+null-variable	eval.txt	/*null-variable*
 number_relativenumber	options.txt	/*number_relativenumber*
 numbered-function	eval.txt	/*numbered-function*
 o	insert.txt	/*o*
@@ -7344,7 +7511,6 @@ optwin	options.txt	/*optwin*
 or()	eval.txt	/*or()*
 oracle	ft_sql.txt	/*oracle*
 os2	os_os2.txt	/*os2*
-os2ansi	os_os2.txt	/*os2ansi*
 os390	os_390.txt	/*os390*
 os_390.txt	os_390.txt	/*os_390.txt*
 os_amiga.txt	os_amiga.txt	/*os_amiga.txt*
@@ -7405,6 +7571,7 @@ perl-overview	if_perl.txt	/*perl-overview*
 perl-patterns	pattern.txt	/*perl-patterns*
 perl-using	if_perl.txt	/*perl-using*
 perl.vim	syntax.txt	/*perl.vim*
+perleval()	eval.txt	/*perleval()*
 persistent-undo	undo.txt	/*persistent-undo*
 pexpr-option	print.txt	/*pexpr-option*
 pfn-option	print.txt	/*pfn-option*
@@ -7419,6 +7586,7 @@ php3.vim	syntax.txt	/*php3.vim*
 phtml.vim	syntax.txt	/*phtml.vim*
 pi_getscript.txt	pi_getscript.txt	/*pi_getscript.txt*
 pi_gzip.txt	pi_gzip.txt	/*pi_gzip.txt*
+pi_logipat.txt	pi_logipat.txt	/*pi_logipat.txt*
 pi_netrw.txt	pi_netrw.txt	/*pi_netrw.txt*
 pi_paren.txt	pi_paren.txt	/*pi_paren.txt*
 pi_spec.txt	pi_spec.txt	/*pi_spec.txt*
@@ -7749,6 +7917,8 @@ sed.vim	syntax.txt	/*sed.vim*
 self	eval.txt	/*self*
 send-money	sponsor.txt	/*send-money*
 send-to-menu	gui_w32.txt	/*send-to-menu*
+sendexpr()	eval.txt	/*sendexpr()*
+sendraw()	eval.txt	/*sendraw()*
 sendto	gui_w32.txt	/*sendto*
 sentence	motion.txt	/*sentence*
 server-functions	usr_41.txt	/*server-functions*
@@ -7759,6 +7929,7 @@ session-file	starting.txt	/*session-file*
 set-option	options.txt	/*set-option*
 set-spc-auto	spell.txt	/*set-spc-auto*
 setbufvar()	eval.txt	/*setbufvar()*
+setcharsearch()	eval.txt	/*setcharsearch()*
 setcmdpos()	eval.txt	/*setcmdpos()*
 setline()	eval.txt	/*setline()*
 setloclist()	eval.txt	/*setloclist()*
@@ -7808,7 +7979,7 @@ sniff	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff*
 sniff-commands	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff-commands*
 sniff-compiling	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff-compiling*
 sniff-intro	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff-intro*
-socket-interface	netbeans.txt	/*socket-interface*
+socket-interface	channel.txt	/*socket-interface*
 sort()	eval.txt	/*sort()*
 sorting	change.txt	/*sorting*
 soundfold()	eval.txt	/*soundfold()*
@@ -7867,6 +8038,7 @@ spell-NAME	spell.txt	/*spell-NAME*
 spell-NEEDAFFIX	spell.txt	/*spell-NEEDAFFIX*
 spell-NEEDCOMPOUND	spell.txt	/*spell-NEEDCOMPOUND*
 spell-NOBREAK	spell.txt	/*spell-NOBREAK*
+spell-NOCOMPOUNDSUGS	spell.txt	/*spell-NOCOMPOUNDSUGS*
 spell-NOSPLITSUGS	spell.txt	/*spell-NOSPLITSUGS*
 spell-NOSUGFILE	spell.txt	/*spell-NOSUGFILE*
 spell-NOSUGGEST	spell.txt	/*spell-NOSUGGEST*
@@ -7997,6 +8169,7 @@ strstr()	eval.txt	/*strstr()*
 strtrans()	eval.txt	/*strtrans()*
 strwidth()	eval.txt	/*strwidth()*
 style-changes	develop.txt	/*style-changes*
+style-compiler	develop.txt	/*style-compiler*
 style-examples	develop.txt	/*style-examples*
 style-functions	develop.txt	/*style-functions*
 style-names	develop.txt	/*style-names*
@@ -8100,9 +8273,11 @@ t_KI	term.txt	/*t_KI*
 t_KJ	term.txt	/*t_KJ*
 t_KK	term.txt	/*t_KK*
 t_KL	term.txt	/*t_KL*
+t_RB	term.txt	/*t_RB*
 t_RI	term.txt	/*t_RI*
 t_RV	term.txt	/*t_RV*
 t_SI	term.txt	/*t_SI*
+t_SR	term.txt	/*t_SR*
 t_Sb	term.txt	/*t_Sb*
 t_Sf	term.txt	/*t_Sf*
 t_WP	term.txt	/*t_WP*
@@ -8321,6 +8496,7 @@ terminal-info	term.txt	/*terminal-info*
 terminal-options	term.txt	/*terminal-options*
 terminfo	term.txt	/*terminfo*
 termresponse-variable	eval.txt	/*termresponse-variable*
+test-functions	usr_41.txt	/*test-functions*
 tex-cchar	syntax.txt	/*tex-cchar*
 tex-cole	syntax.txt	/*tex-cole*
 tex-conceal	syntax.txt	/*tex-conceal*
@@ -8363,6 +8539,7 @@ toolbar-icon	gui.txt	/*toolbar-icon*
 toupper()	eval.txt	/*toupper()*
 tr()	eval.txt	/*tr()*
 trojan-horse	starting.txt	/*trojan-horse*
+true-variable	eval.txt	/*true-variable*
 trunc()	eval.txt	/*trunc()*
 try-conditionals	eval.txt	/*try-conditionals*
 try-echoerr	eval.txt	/*try-echoerr*
@@ -8464,12 +8641,15 @@ v:charconvert_from	eval.txt	/*v:charconvert_from*
 v:charconvert_to	eval.txt	/*v:charconvert_to*
 v:cmdarg	eval.txt	/*v:cmdarg*
 v:cmdbang	eval.txt	/*v:cmdbang*
+v:completed_item	eval.txt	/*v:completed_item*
 v:count	eval.txt	/*v:count*
 v:count1	eval.txt	/*v:count1*
 v:ctype	eval.txt	/*v:ctype*
 v:dying	eval.txt	/*v:dying*
 v:errmsg	eval.txt	/*v:errmsg*
+v:errors	eval.txt	/*v:errors*
 v:exception	eval.txt	/*v:exception*
+v:false	eval.txt	/*v:false*
 v:fcs_choice	eval.txt	/*v:fcs_choice*
 v:fcs_reason	eval.txt	/*v:fcs_reason*
 v:fname_diff	eval.txt	/*v:fname_diff*
@@ -8489,8 +8669,13 @@ v:lnum	eval.txt	/*v:lnum*
 v:mouse_col	eval.txt	/*v:mouse_col*
 v:mouse_lnum	eval.txt	/*v:mouse_lnum*
 v:mouse_win	eval.txt	/*v:mouse_win*
+v:none	eval.txt	/*v:none*
+v:null	eval.txt	/*v:null*
 v:oldfiles	eval.txt	/*v:oldfiles*
 v:operator	eval.txt	/*v:operator*
+v:option_new	eval.txt	/*v:option_new*
+v:option_old	eval.txt	/*v:option_old*
+v:option_type	eval.txt	/*v:option_type*
 v:prevcount	eval.txt	/*v:prevcount*
 v:profiling	eval.txt	/*v:profiling*
 v:progname	eval.txt	/*v:progname*
@@ -8507,6 +8692,7 @@ v:swapname	eval.txt	/*v:swapname*
 v:termresponse	eval.txt	/*v:termresponse*
 v:this_session	eval.txt	/*v:this_session*
 v:throwpoint	eval.txt	/*v:throwpoint*
+v:true	eval.txt	/*v:true*
 v:val	eval.txt	/*v:val*
 v:var	eval.txt	/*v:var*
 v:version	eval.txt	/*v:version*
@@ -8522,11 +8708,13 @@ v_<Esc>	visual.txt	/*v_<Esc>*
 v_=	change.txt	/*v_=*
 v_>	change.txt	/*v_>*
 v_C	change.txt	/*v_C*
+v_CTRL-A	change.txt	/*v_CTRL-A*
 v_CTRL-C	visual.txt	/*v_CTRL-C*
 v_CTRL-G	visual.txt	/*v_CTRL-G*
 v_CTRL-H	change.txt	/*v_CTRL-H*
 v_CTRL-O	visual.txt	/*v_CTRL-O*
 v_CTRL-V	visual.txt	/*v_CTRL-V*
+v_CTRL-X	change.txt	/*v_CTRL-X*
 v_CTRL-Z	starting.txt	/*v_CTRL-Z*
 v_CTRL-\_CTRL-G	intro.txt	/*v_CTRL-\\_CTRL-G*
 v_CTRL-\_CTRL-N	intro.txt	/*v_CTRL-\\_CTRL-N*
@@ -8582,7 +8770,9 @@ v_gJ	change.txt	/*v_gJ*
 v_gN	visual.txt	/*v_gN*
 v_gV	visual.txt	/*v_gV*
 v_g]	tagsrch.txt	/*v_g]*
+v_g_CTRL-A	change.txt	/*v_g_CTRL-A*
 v_g_CTRL-G	editing.txt	/*v_g_CTRL-G*
+v_g_CTRL-X	change.txt	/*v_g_CTRL-X*
 v_g_CTRL-]	tagsrch.txt	/*v_g_CTRL-]*
 v_gf	editing.txt	/*v_gf*
 v_gn	visual.txt	/*v_gn*
@@ -8825,6 +9015,7 @@ winwidth()	eval.txt	/*winwidth()*
 word	motion.txt	/*word*
 word-count	editing.txt	/*word-count*
 word-motions	motion.txt	/*word-motions*
+wordcount()	eval.txt	/*wordcount()*
 workbench	starting.txt	/*workbench*
 workshop	workshop.txt	/*workshop*
 workshop-commands	workshop.txt	/*workshop-commands*
@@ -8887,6 +9078,7 @@ xterm-screens	tips.txt	/*xterm-screens*
 xterm-scroll-region	term.txt	/*xterm-scroll-region*
 xterm-shifted-keys	term.txt	/*xterm-shifted-keys*
 y	change.txt	/*y*
+yaml.vim	syntax.txt	/*yaml.vim*
 yank	change.txt	/*yank*
 ye-option-gone	version4.txt	/*ye-option-gone*
 year-2000	intro.txt	/*year-2000*

runtime/doc/tagsrch.txt

@@ -85,11 +85,13 @@ changed, to avoid confusion when using ":tnext".  It is changed when using
 ":tag {ident}".
 
 The ignore-case matches are not found for a ":tag" command when the
-'ignorecase' option is off.  They are found when a pattern is used (starting
-with a "/") and for ":tselect", also when 'ignorecase' is off.  Note that
-using ignore-case tag searching disables binary searching in the tags file,
-which causes a slowdown.  This can be avoided by fold-case sorting the tag
-file.  See the 'tagbsearch' option for an explanation.
+'ignorecase' option is off and 'tagcase' is "followic" or when 'tagcase' is
+"match".  They are found when a pattern is used (starting with a "/") and for
+":tselect", also when 'ignorecase' is off and 'tagcase' is "followic" or when
+'tagcase' is "match".  Note that using ignore-case tag searching disables
+binary searching in the tags file, which causes a slowdown.  This can be
+avoided by fold-case sorting the tag file.  See the 'tagbsearch' option for an
+explanation.
 
 ==============================================================================
 2. Tag stack				*tag-stack* *tagstack* *E425*
@@ -440,12 +442,13 @@ file "tags".  It can also be used to access a common tags file.
 The next file in the list is not used when:
 - A matching static tag for the current buffer has been found.
 - A matching global tag has been found.
-This also depends on the 'ignorecase' option.  If it is off, and the tags file
-only has a match without matching case, the next tags file is searched for a
-match with matching case.  If no tag with matching case is found, the first
-match without matching case is used.  If 'ignorecase' is on, and a matching
-global tag with or without matching case is found, this one is used, no
-further tags files are searched.
+This also depends on whether case is ignored.  Case is ignored when
+'ignorecase' is set and 'tagcase' is "followic", or when 'tagcase' is
+"ignore".  If case is not ignored, and the tags file only has a match without
+matching case, the next tags file is searched for a match with matching case.
+If no tag with matching case is found, the first match without matching case
+is used.  If case is ignored, and a matching global tag with or without
+matching case is found, this one is used, no further tags files are searched.
 
 When a tag file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path of
 the current file.  This makes it possible to use a tags file in the directory
@@ -579,8 +582,10 @@ that indicates if the file was sorted.  When this line is found, Vim uses
 binary searching for the tags file:
 	!_TAG_FILE_SORTED<Tab>1<Tab>{anything} ~
 
-A tag file may be case-fold sorted to avoid a linear search when 'ignorecase'
-is on.  See 'tagbsearch' for details.  The value '2' should be used then:
+A tag file may be case-fold sorted to avoid a linear search when case is
+ignored.  (Case is ignored when 'ignorecase' is set and 'tagcase' is
+"followic", or when 'tagcase' is "ignore".)  See 'tagbsearch' for details.
+The value '2' should be used then:
 	!_TAG_FILE_SORTED<Tab>2<Tab>{anything} ~
 
 The other tag that Vim recognizes, but only when compiled with the

runtime/doc/term.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*term.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Feb 23
+*term.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Nov 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -294,12 +294,15 @@ Added by Vim (there are no standard codes for these):
 	t_WP	set window position (Y, X) in pixels		*t_WP* *'t_WP'*
 	t_WS	set window size (height, width) in characters	*t_WS* *'t_WS'*
 	t_SI	start insert mode (bar cursor shape)		*t_SI* *'t_SI'*
-	t_EI	end insert mode (block cursor shape)		*t_EI* *'t_EI'*
+	t_SR	start replace mode (underline cursor shape)	*t_SR* *'t_SR'*
+	t_EI	end insert or replace mode (block cursor shape)	*t_EI* *'t_EI'*
 		|termcap-cursor-shape|
 	t_RV	request terminal version string (for xterm)	*t_RV* *'t_RV'*
 		|xterm-8bit| |v:termresponse| |'ttymouse'| |xterm-codes|
 	t_u7	request cursor position (for xterm)		*t_u7* *'t_u7'*
 		see |'ambiwidth'|
+	t_RB	request terminal background color		*t_RB* *'t_RB'*
+		see |'ambiwidth'|
 
 KEY CODES
 Note: Use the <> form if possible
@@ -438,13 +441,16 @@ If one of these is not available, 't_Sb' and 't_Sf' are used.  't_me' is used
 to reset to the default colors.
 
 				*termcap-cursor-shape* *termcap-cursor-color*
-When Vim enters Insert mode the 't_SI' escape sequence is sent.  When leaving
-Insert mode 't_EI' is used.  But only if both are defined.  This can be used
-to change the shape or color of the cursor in Insert mode.  These are not
-standard termcap/terminfo entries, you need to set them yourself.
+When Vim enters Insert mode the 't_SI' escape sequence is sent.  When Vim
+enters Replace mode the 't_SR' escape sequence is sent if it is set, otherwise
+'t_SI' is sent.  When leaving Insert mode or Replace mode 't_EI' is used. This
+can be used to change the shape or color of the cursor in Insert or Replace
+mode. These are not standard termcap/terminfo entries, you need to set them
+yourself.
 Example for an xterm, this changes the color of the cursor: >
     if &term =~ "xterm"
 	let &t_SI = "\<Esc>]12;purple\x7"
+	let &t_SR = "\<Esc>]12;red\x7"
 	let &t_EI = "\<Esc>]12;blue\x7"
     endif
 NOTE: When Vim exits the shape for Normal mode will remain.  The shape from
@@ -846,7 +852,7 @@ Mouse clicks can be mapped.  The codes for mouse clicks are:
 
 The X1 and X2 buttons refer to the extra buttons found on some mice.  The
 'Microsoft Explorer' mouse has these buttons available to the right thumb.
-Currently X1 and X2 only work on Win32 environments.
+Currently X1 and X2 only work on Win32 and X11 environments.
 
 Examples: >
 	:noremap <MiddleMouse> <LeftMouse><MiddleMouse>

runtime/doc/todo.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Mar 20
+*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Feb 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -35,6 +35,9 @@ not be repeated below, unless there is extra information.
 -------------------- Known bugs and current work -----------------------
 
 Regexp problems:
+- The regexp engines are not reentrant, causing havoc when interrupted by a
+  remote expression or something else.  Move global variables onto the stack
+  or into an allocated struct.
 - The old engine does not find a match for "/\%#=1\(\)\{80}", the new engine
   matches everywhere.
 - Using win_linetabsize() can still be slow. Cache the result, store col and
@@ -58,6 +61,8 @@ Regexp problems:
 - Using back reference before the capturing group sometimes works with the old
   engine, can we do this with the new engine?  E.g. with
   "/\%(<\1>\)\@<=.*\%(<\/\(\w\+\)>\)\@=" matching text inside HTML tags.
+  This problem is probably the same: "\%(^\1.*$\n\)\@<=\(\d\+\).*$".
+  (guotuofeng, 2015 Jun 22)
 - Strange matching with "\(Hello\n\)\@<=A". (Anas Syed, 2015 Feb 12)
 - Problem with \v(A)@<=b+\1c. (Issue 334)
 - Diff highlighting can be very slow. (Issue 309)
@@ -67,142 +72,313 @@ Regexp problems:
   col and vcol when moving to another line.
 - this doesn't work: "syntax match ErrorMsg /.\%9l\%>20c\&\%<28c/".  Leaving
   out the \& works.  Seems any column check after \& fails.
+- The pattern "\1" with the old engine gives E65, with the new engine it
+  matches the empty string. (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Oct 2, Nov 24)
+- Search for \\~ causes error E874.
 
-Check out neovim bug reports that apply to Vim:
-https://github.com/neovim/neovim/issues?q=label%3Abug-vim
-Specifically:
-https://github.com/neovim/neovim/commit/cf8e175cf54281bcad5e704308e92ebb3e6381d3
-https://github.com/neovim/neovim/commit/d7038127ca6b356ad33fdec08aa3b23ac6a817af
-https://github.com/neovim/neovim/commit/77ace65bdce379f2d9b13ee81ab3fc01951f92dc
-And also:
-https://github.com/neovim/neovim/pull/2157/commits
+- "\%1l^#.*" does not match on a line starting with "#".  The zero-width match
+  clears the start-of-line flag.
+  Patch by Christian, 2016 Jan 29.
+
++channel:
+- implement wait for receiving end of Json.
+- implement only reading up to end of Json.
+- cleanup on exit?  in mch_getout() and getout().
+- Add more contents to channel.txt
+- implement debug log
+- implement job control
+- Add a test with a server that can send canned responses.
+- make sure errors lead to a useful error msg. ["ex","foobar"]
+- use a timeout for connect()  Patch from Yasuhiro Matsumoto, Feb 1
+- set timeout for channel.
+- implement check for ID in response.
+- json: implement UTF-16 surrogate pair.
+
+This difference is unexpected:
+    echo v:true == 1
+    1
+    echo [v:true] == [1]
+    0
+It's because tv_equal() works different.
+
+Allow for an empty dictionary key.
+
+Patch to put undo options together in undo window.
+(Gary Johnson, 2016 Jan 28)
+
+Patch for clearing history. (Yegappan Lakshmanan, 2016 Jan 31, second message
+has tests)
+
+Need to try out instructions in INSSTALLpc.txt about how to install all
+interfaces and how to build Vim with them.
+Appveyor build with self-installing executable, includes getting most
+interfaces: https://github.com/k-takata/vim/tree/chrisbra-appveyor-build
+result: https://ci.appveyor.com/project/k-takata/vim/history
 
 Still using freed memory after using setloclist(). (lcd, 2014 Jul 23)
 More info Jul 24.  Not clear why.
 
-Updated Irish translation. (Kevin Scannell, 2015 Mar 13)
-
-Better .ico file for Windows. (Pat Suwalski, 2015 Feb 13)
-Waiting for response on remark from Edward Fox.
-
-Patch to make getregtype() return the right size for non-linux systems.
-(Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Jul 8)
-Breaks test_eval.  Inefficient, can we only compute y_width when needed?
-
+Duplication of completion suggestions for ":!hom".  Issue 539.
+Patch by Christian, 2016 Jan 29
+>
 Problem that a previous silent ":throw" causes a following try/catch not to
-work. (ZyX, 2013 Sep 28)
+work. (ZyX, 2013 Sep 28) With examples: (Malcolm Rowe, 2015 Dec 24)
 
 Problem using ":try" inside ":execute". (ZyX, 2013 Sep 15)
 
+jsonencode(): should convert to utf-8. (Nikolai Pavlov, 2016 Jan 23)
+What if there is an invalid character?
+
+Should jsonencode()/jsondecode() restrict recursiveness?
+Or avoid recursiveness.
+
+Use vim.vim syntax highlighting for help file examples, but without ":" in
+'iskeyword' for syntax.
+
+Patch to make "%:h:h" return "." instead of the full path.
+(Coot, 2016 Jan 24, #592)
+
+Remove SPACE_IN_FILENAME ? What could possibly go wrong?
+
+Installation of .desktop files does not work everywhere.
+It's now fixed, but the target directory probably isn't right.
+Add configure check?
+Should use /usr/local/share/applications or /usr/share/applications.
+Or use $XDG_DATA_DIRS.
+Also need to run update-desktop-database (Kuriyama Kazunobu, 2015 Nov 4)
+
+Move the README files that are for including in archives to a subdirectory.
+"readmedir/" ?
+
+Access to uninitialized memory in match_backref() regexp_nda.c:4882
+(Dominique Pelle, 2015 Nov 6)
+
 ":cd C:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc*" does not work, even though the
 directory exists. (Sergio Gallelli, 2013 Dec 29)
 
-C indent: should recognize C11 raw strings. (Mark Lodato, 2015 Mar 1)
-Need to recognize R"string".
+Patch to avoid redrawing tabline when the popup menu is visible.
+(Christian Brabandt, 2016 Jan 28)
 
-Suggested patch to MingW makefiles. (Michael Soyka, 2015 Mar 11)
-Feedback from others?
+Win32: patch to use 64 bit stat() if possible. (Ken Takata, 2014 May 12)
+More tests May 14. Update May 29.  Update Aug 10.
+Now part of large file patches. (Ken Takata, 2016 Jan 19, second one)
+Updated patches with ordering: Jan 20.
+And another update: Jan 24, then Jan 29, 30, Feb 1.
 
-Patch for :tabmove not working as documented. (Hirohito Higashi, 2015 Mar 10)
-https://gist.github.com/h-east/ffabb0cdd589a5f9acd2
-Updated patch emailed. (Mar 17)  Awaiting comments.
+7   Add a watchpoint in the debug mode: An expression that breaks execution
+    when evaluating to non-zero.  Add the "watchadd expr" command, stop when
+    the value of the expression changes.  ":watchdel" deletes an item,
+    ":watchlist" lists the items. (Charles Campbell)
+Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2016 Jan 27.
 
-Crash when changing the 'tags' option from a remote command.
-(Benjamin Fritz, 2015 Mar 18)
+Patch to be able to use hex numbers with :digraph. (Lcd, 2015 Sep 6)
+Update Sep 7.  Update by Christian Brabandt, 2015 Sep 8, 2016 Feb 1.
+
+Using ":windo" to set options in all windows has the side effect that it
+changes the window layout and the current window.  Make a variant that saves
+and restores.  Use in the matchparen plugin.
+Perhaps we can use ":windo <restore> {cmd}"?
+Patch to add <restore> to :windo, :bufdo, etc. (Christian Brabandt, 2015 Jan
+6, 2nd message)
+Alternative: ":keeppos" command modifier: ":keeppos windo {cmd}".
+
+Patch to fix display of listchars on the cursorline. (Nayuri Aohime, 2013)
+Update suggested by Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Nov 25:
+https://gist.github.com/presuku/d3d6b230b9b6dcfc0477
+
+Illegal memory access, requires ASAN to see. (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Jul 28)
 
 Gvim: when both Tab and CTRL-I are mapped, use CTRL-I not for Tab.
 
+Unexpected delay when using CTRL-O u.  It's not timeoutlen.
+(Gary Johnson, 2015 Aug 28)
+
+Patch to support 64 bit ints for Number. (Ken Takata, 2016 Jan 21)
+
+Instead of separately uploading patches to the ftp site, we can get them from
+github with a URL like this:
+   https://github.com/vim/vim/compare/v7.4.920%5E...v7.4.920.diff
+Diff for version.c contains more context, can't skip a patch.
+
+When t_Co is changed from termresponse, the OptionSet autocmmand event isn't
+triggered.  Use the code from the end of set_num_option() in
+set_color_count().
+
 Python: ":py raw_input('prompt')" doesn't work. (Manu Hack)
 
+Comparing nested structures with "==" uses a different comperator than when
+comparing individual items.
+Also, "'' == 0" evaluates to true, which isn't nice.
+Add "===" to have a strict comparison (type and value match).
+Add "==*" (?) to have a value match, but no automatic conversion, and v:true
+equals 1 and 1.0, v:false equals 0 and 0.0.?
+
+Plugin to use Vim in MANPAGER.  Konfekt, PR #491
+
+Using uninitialized memory. (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Nov 4)
+
 MS-Windows: When editing a file with a leading space, writing it uses the
 wrong name. (Aram, 2014 Nov 7)  Vim 7.4.
 
 Can't recognize the $ProgramFiles(x86) environment variable.  Recognize it
 specifically?  First try with the parens, then without.
 
+Half-finished patch to fix the Problem using cgn to change a search hit when
+replacement includes hit. Reported by John Beckett, fix by Christian Brabandt,
+2016 Jan 11.
+
 Value returned by virtcol() changes depending on how lines wrap.  This is
 inconsistent with the documentation.
 
-Better greek spell checking.  Issue 299.
+Can we cache the syntax attributes, so that updates for 'relativenumber' and
+'cursorline'/'cursorcolumn' are a lot faster?
+
+Build with Python on Mac does not always use the right library.
+(Kazunobu Kuriyama, 2015 Mar 28)
+
+Need a Vim equivalent of Python's None and a way to test for it.
+Use v:none.  var == v:none
+
+Patch to add arguments to argc() and argv(). (Yegappan Lakshmanan, 2016 Jan
+24)  Also need a way to get the global arg list?  Update later on Jan 24
+
+To support Thai (and other languages) word boundaries, include the ICU
+library:  http://userguide.icu-project.org/boundaryanalysis
 
 When complete() first argument is before where insert started and 'backspace'
 is Vi compatible, the completion fails. (Hirohito Higashi, 2015 Feb 19)
 
+Test 44 fails when [[=A=]] is changed to [[=À=]].  Caused by getcmdline() not
+handling the 0x80 as a second byte correctly?  (Dominique Pelle, 2015 Jun 10)
+
+Patch to use two highlight groups for relative numbers. (Shaun Brady, 2016 Jan
+30)
+
 Weird encryption problems on Windows. (Ben Fritz, 2015 Feb 13)
 Goes away when disabling the swap file. (might1, Feb 16)
 
-Problem caused by patch 7.3.638: window->open does not update window
-correctly. Issue 91.  With patch.
-
 MS-Windows: Crash opening very long file name starting with "\\".
 (Christian Brock, 2012 Jun 29)
 
-Patch to handle directories better for --remote. (xaizek, 2015 Mar 1)
+Using an external diff is inefficient.  Not all systems have a good diff
+program available (esp. MS-Windows).  Would be nice to have in internal diff
+implementation.  Can then also use this for displaying changes within a line.
+Olaf Dabrunz is working on this.
 
-Cursorline background color not mixed with character highlight.
-Patch by Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Dec 3.
+The OptionSet autocommand event is not always triggered. (Rick Howe, 2015 Sep
+24): :diffthis, :diffoff.
+
+":set all&" still does not handle all side effects.  Centralize handling side
+effects for when set by the user, on init and when reset to default.
+
+":tag" does not jump to the right entry of a :tselect. (James Speros, 2015 Oct
+9)
 
 The argument for "-S" is not taken literally, the ":so" command expands
 wildcards.  Add a ":nowild" command modifier?  (ZyX, 2015 March 4)
 
-Problem using diff syntax with cp932 encoding.  Idea from Yasuhiro Matsumoto,
-patch from Ken Takata (2014 Nov 6)
+Proposal to make options.txt easier to read. (Arnaud Decara, 2015 Aug 5)
+Update Aug 14.
+
+Crash in :cnext on MS-Windows. (Ben Fritz, 2015 Oct 27)
+
+When using --remote-tab on MS-Windows 'encoding' hasn't been initialized yet,
+the file name ends up encoded wrong. (Raul Coronado, 2015 Dec 21)
+
+Patch to add GUI colors to the terminal, when it supports it. (ZyX, 2013 Jan
+26, update 2013 Dec 14, another 2014 Nov 22)
+
+Patch for problem with restoring screen on Windows. (Nobuhiro Takasaki, 2015
+Sep 10)
+
+Patch to improve I/O for Perl. (Damien, 2015 Jan 9, update Jan 22 2nd one)
+
+Patch to set antialiasing style on Windows. (Ondrej Balaz, 2013 Mar 14)
+Needs a different check for CLEARTYPE_QUALITY.
+Problem mentioned by Christian Brabandt, 2016 Jan 4.
+
+Example in editing.txt uses $HOME with the expectating that it ends in a
+slash.  For me it does, but perhaps not for everybody.  Add a function that
+inserts a slash when needed?  pathconcat(dir, path) (Thilo Six, 2015 Aug 12)
 
 ml_updatechunk() is slow when retrying for another encoding. (John Little,
 2014 Sep 11)
 
-Patch to add counts to zr and zm. (Marcin Szamotulski, 2015 Jan 28)
+Patch to fix checking global option value when not using it.
+(Arnaud Decara, 2015 Jul 23)
 
-Patch to add a different escape sequence for replace mode.
-(Omar Sandoval, 2014 Nov 30)
+When 'showbreak' is set repeating a Visual operation counts the size of the
+'showbreak' text as part of the operation. (Axel Bender, 2015 Jul 20)
 
-Patch on Issue 166, popup drawing with '$' in 'cpo'.
+Patch to apply 'fileformats' when starting Vim. (Mike Williams, 2015 Jul 22)
+
+Patch for matchit plugin related to multibyte chars. (Ken Takata, 2015 Jul 22)
+
+Patch for multi-byte characters in langmap and applying a mapping on them.
+(Christian Brabandt, 2015 Jun 12, update July 25)
+Is this the right solution?  Need to cleanup langmap behavior:
+- in vgetorpeek() apply langmap to the typeahead buffer and put the result in
+  a copy-buffer, only when langmap is appropriate for the current mode. Then
+  check for mapping and let gotchars() work on the copy-buffer.
+- Remove LANGMAP_ADJUST() in other parts of the code.  Make sure the mode is
+  covered by the above change.
+So that replaying the register doesn't use keymap/langmap and still does the
+same thing.  Remarks on issue 543 (Roland Puntaier).
+
+Patch to add grepfile(). (Scott Prager, 2015 May 26)
+Work in progress.
+
+Would be useful to have a treemap() or deepmap() function.  Like map() but
+when an item is a list or dict would recurse into it.
+
+Patch for global-local options consistency. (Arnaud Decara, 2015 Jul 22)
+Is this right?
+
+Patch to make getregtype() return the right size for non-linux systems.
+(Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Jul 8)
+Breaks test_eval.  Inefficient, can we only compute y_width when needed?
+
+Patch to use different terminal mode settings for system(). (Hayaki Saito)
+Does this work for everybody?
+
+Patch to fix that wide characters do not work properly after exiting.
+(Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2015 May 24) Better patch to come.
+
+Patch to add wordcount().  Same info as g CTRL-G. (Christian Brabandt, 2015
+Nov 17)
+
+Patch for man.vim. (SungHyun Nam, 2015 May 20)
+Doesn't work completely (Dominique Orban)
+
+Patch to add a "literal" argument to bufnr().  (Olaf Dabrunz, 2015 Aug 4)
+
+Cannot execute the shell when it's in a directory with a space.
+Issue #459.
 
 When a session file is created and there are "nofile" buffers, these are not
 filled.  Need to trigger BufReadCmd autocommands.  Also handle deleting the
 initial empty buffer better. (ZyX, 2015 March 8)
 
-Calling setreg() with an empty list doesn't work.
-Patch by Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Dec 14.
-
 Extended file attributes lost on write (backupcopy=no).  Issue 306.
 
-Patch to add an argument to ":ls" for specific kinds of buffers.
-(Marcin Szamotulski, 2015 Jan 31)
-
-Crash when using R syntax. (Jakson Alves de Aquino, 2015 Jan 30)
-Memory freed by ":syn clear" but still referenced, syntax items referenced
-from two windows?  Stopped happening (Feb 5).
-
-Window height computed incorrectly when Vim is minimized.
-Patch to fix this. (Ingo Karkat, 2014 Dec 19)
-
-Patch to fix CTRL-W handling in Insert mode for multi-byte characters.
-(Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2015 Jan 29, update with test)
-
-Patch to allow values greater than 255 for ctermfg/ctermbg on Windows.
-(Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Dec 5)
-
-Patch for an extra argument to matchadd() for conceal. (Christian Brabandt,
-2015 Feb 17, update Feb 19)
+Patch to add :lockjumps. (Carlo Baldassi, 2015 May 25)
+OK to not block marks?
 
 Mixup of highlighting when there is a match and SpellBad. (ZyX, 2015 Jan 1)
 
-Patch to add 'belloff' option. (Christian Brabandt, 2015 Jan 31)
-Update Feb 6.
-
 Patch for drag&drop reordering of GUI tab pages reordering.
 (Ken Takata, 2013 Nov 22, second one, also by Masamichi Abe)
+Now on Git: https://gist.github.com/nocd5/165286495c782b815b94
 
 Patch on Issue 72: 'autochdir' causes problems for :vimgrep.
 
 When 'balloonexpr' returns a list the result has a trailing newline.
 Just remove one trailing newline. (lcd, 2014 Oct 17)
 
-Make comments in the test Makefile silent. (Kartik Agaram, 2014 Sep 24)
+When two SIGWINCH arrive very quickly, the second one may be lost.
+(Josh Triplett, 2015 Sep 17)
 
-Patch to add GUI colors to the terminal, when it supports it. (ZyX, 2013 Jan
-26, update 2013 Dec 14, another 2014 Nov 22)
+Make comments in the test Makefile silent. (Kartik Agaram, 2014 Sep 24)
 
 Result of systemlist() does not show whether text ended in line break.
 (Bjorn Linse, 2014 Nov 27)
@@ -220,28 +396,33 @@ Adding "~" to 'cdpath' doesn't work for completion?  (Davido, 2013 Aug 19)
 Should be easy to highlight all matches with 'incsearch'.  Idea by Itchyny,
 2015 Feb 6.
 
-Plugins need to make a lot of effort, lots of mappings, to know what happened
-before pressing the key that triggers a plugin action.  How about keeping the
-last N pressed keys, so that they do not need to be mapped?
-
-":q!" should reset modified flag for current buffer, if another buffer is
-modified no need to abandon it again.
-Patch from Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Nov 21.
-Update from Hirohito Higashi, 2014 Nov 21.
-With test, Nov 23.
-
 Wrong scrolling when using incsearch.  Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2014 Dec 4.
 Is this a good solution?
 
+Patch to add /pattern/ to :oldfiles.  Pull #575.
+
+Patch to allow setting w:quickfix_title via setqflist() and setloclist()
+functions. (Christian Brabandt, 2013 May 8, update May 21)
+Patch to add getlocstack() / setlocstack(). (Christian Brabandt, 2013 May 14)
+Second one. Update May 22.
+Update by Daniel Hahler, 2014 Jul 4, Aug 14, Oct 14, Oct 15.
+
+Patch: Let rare word highlighting overrule good word highlighting.
+(Jakson A. Aquino, 2010 Jul 30, again 2011 Jul 2)
+
+Patch to add digits argument to round(). (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2015 Apr 26)
+
 Can assign to s:type when a function s:type has been defined.
 Also the other way around: define a function while a variable with that name
 was already defined.
 (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Nov 3)
 
+Patch for ordered dict. (Ozaki Kiichi, 2015 May 7)
+
 Patch to make closed folds line up. (Charles Campbell, 2014 Sep 12)
 Remark from Roland Eggner: does it cause crashes? (2014 Dec 12)
 Updated patch by Roland Eggner, Dec 16
-Updated patch from Charles, Dec 29.
+Updated patch from Charles, 2016 Jan 4.
 
 Patch to open folds for 'incsearch'. (Christian Brabandt, 2015 Jan 6)
 
@@ -253,12 +434,19 @@ Delete old code in os_msdos.c, mch_FullName().
 Patch: On MS-Windows shellescape() may have to triple double quotes.
 (Ingo Karkat, 2015 Jan 16)
 
+Patch for variable tabstops.  On github (Christian Brabandt, 2014 May 15)
+Update 2016 Jan 31 (email).
+
 Redo only remembers the last change.  Could use "{count}g." to redo an older
 change.  How does the user know which change?  At least have a way to list
 them: ":repeats".
 
 Patch for glob(), adding slash to normal files. (Ingo Karkat, 2014 Dec 22)
 
+When entering and leaving the preview window autocommands are triggered, but
+these may not work well.  Perhaps set a flag to indicate that the preview
+window is involved? (John Otter, 2015 Oct 27)
+
 Using "." to repeat an Ex command puts that command in history.  Probably
 should not happen.  If the command is the result of a mapping it's not put in
 history either. (Jacob Niehus, 2014 Nov 2)
@@ -277,13 +465,15 @@ Patch to add argument to :cquit. (Thinca, 2014 Oct 12)
 
 No error for missing endwhile. (ZyX, 2014 Mar 20)
 
-The entries added by matchaddpos() are returned by getmatches() but can't be
-set with setmatches(). (lcd47, 2014 Jun 29)
+Patch to make extend() fail early when it might fail at some point.
+(Olaf Dabrunz, 2015 May 2)  Makes extend() slower, do we still want it?
+Perhaps only the checks that can be done without looping over the dict or
+arguments.
+
+Problem with transparent and matchgroup.  Issue #475
 
 Patch to add :arglocal and :arglists. (Marcin Szamotulski, 2014 Aug 6)
 
-PHP syntax is extremely slow. (Anhad Jai Singh, 2014 Jan 19)
-
 Spell files use a latin single quote. Unicode also has another single quote:
 0x2019.  (Ron Aaron, 2014 Apr 4)
 New OpenOffice spell files support this with ICONV.  But they are not
@@ -292,9 +482,8 @@ compatible with Vim spell files.  The old files can no longer be downloaded.
 Patch to make FocusGained and FocusLost work in modern terminals. (Hayaki
 Saito, 2013 Apr 24)  Has a problem (email 2015 Jan 7).
 Update 2015 Jan 10.
-
-Win32: patch to use 64 bit stat() if possible. (Ken Takata, 2014 May 12)
-More tests May 14. Update May 29.  Update Aug 10.
+Also see issue #609.
+We could add the enable/disable sequences to t_ti/t_te or t_ks/t_ke.
 
 Idea: For a window in the middle (has window above and below it), use
 right-mouse-drag on the status line to move a window up/down without changing
@@ -320,14 +509,14 @@ from?
 Problem with upwards search on Windows (works OK on Linux). (Brett Stahlman,
 2014 Jun 8)
 
-Patch to load TCL dynamically. (Ken Takata, 2014 Sep 20)
-
 Include a plugin manager with Vim? Neobundle seems to be the best currently.
+Also Vundle: https://github.com/gmarik/vundle
 Long message about this from ZyX, 2014 Mar 23.  And following replies.
 Also see http://vim-wiki.mawercer.de/wiki/topic/vim%20plugin%20managment.html
 User view:
-- Support multiple sources, basically any http:// URL.  Be able to look into
-  the files before deciding to install.
+- Support multiple sources, basically any http:// URL. Or a central place that
+  will work for everybody (github?  redirects from vim.org?).
+  Be able to look into the files before deciding to install.
 - Be able to try out a plugin and remove it again with (almost) no traces.
 - Each plugin needs a "manifest" file that has the version, dependencies
   (including Vim version and features), conflicts, list of files, etc.
@@ -371,24 +560,17 @@ Editing an ascii file as ucs-2 or ucs-4 causes display errors.
 ":Next 1 some-arg" does not complain about trailing argument.  Also for
 various other commands.  (ZyX, 2014 Mar 30)
 
-patch to skip sort if no line matches the expression.
+Patch to skip sort if no line matches the expression.
 (Christian Brabandt, 2014 Jun 25)
 
 Patch to add sortuniq(). (Cade Forester, 2014 Mar 19)
 Or add uniq() instead?  Patch by lcd47, but it has problems.
 
-Patch to support sorting on floating point number.  (Alex Jakushev, 2010 Oct
-30)
-
 Patch to support expression argument to sort() instead of a function name.
 Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2013 May 31.
 Or should we add a more general mechanism, like a lambda() function?
 Patch by Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Sep 16.
 
-Patch to fix display of listchars on the cursorline. (Nayuri Aohime, 2013)
-Update suggested by Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Nov 25:
-https://gist.github.com/presuku/d3d6b230b9b6dcfc0477
-
 VMS: Select() doesn't work properly, typing ESC may hang Vim.  Use sys$qiow
 instead. (Samuel Ferencik, 2013 Sep 28)
 
@@ -398,16 +580,13 @@ Remark on the docs.  Should not be a compile time feature.  But then what?
 Completion of ":e" is ":earlier", should be ":edit".  Complete to the matching
 command instead of doing this alphabetically. (Mikel Jorgensen)
 
-Patch to add v:completed_item. (Shougo Matsu, 2013 Nov 29).
-
-Patch to get MSVC version in a nicer way. (Ken Takata, 2014 Jul 24)
-
 Patch to define macros for hardcoded values. (Elias Diem, 2013 Dec 14)
 
 Several syntax file match "^\s*" which may get underlined if that's in the
 highlight group.  Add a "\zs" after it?
 
-Go through more coverity reports.
+The undo file name can get too long. (Issue 346)
+For the path use a hash instead of dir%dir%dir%name  hash%name.
 
 Patch to add ":undorecover", get as much text out of the undo file as
 possible. (Christian Brabandt, 2014 Mar 12, update Aug 22)
@@ -459,9 +638,6 @@ When evaluating expression in backticks, autoload doesn't work.
 Using <nr>ifoobar<esc> can slow down Vim.  Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2013
 Dec 13.
 
-Fold can't be opened after ":move". (Ein Brown)
-Patch from Christian Brabandt doesn't fix it completely.
-
 Patch from Christian Brabandt to preserve upper case marks when wiping out a
 buffer. (2013 Dec 9)
 
@@ -531,15 +707,21 @@ optional. (2013 Jul 12)
 
 Dialog is too big on Linux too. (David Fishburn, 2013 Sep 2)
 
+Improve the installer for MS-Windows.  There are a few alternatives:
+- Installer from Cream (Steve Hall).
+- Modern UI 2.0 for the Nsis installer. (Guopeng Wen)
+    https://github.com/gpwen/vim-installer-mui2
+-  make it possible to do a silent install, see
+    http://nsis.sourceforge.net/Docs/Chapter4.html#4.12
+    Version from Guopeng Wen does this.
+- MSI installer: https://github.com/petrkle/vim-msi/
+- The one on Issue 279.
+Problem: they all work slightly different (e.g. don't install vimrun.exe).
+How to test that it works well for all Vim users?
+
 Patch to check whether a buffer is quickfix or a location list.
 (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2014 Dec 9)
 
-Patch to allow setting w:quickfix_title via setqflist() and setloclist()
-functions. (Christian Brabandt, 2013 May 8, update May 21)
-Patch to add getlocstack() / setlocstack(). (Christian Brabandt, 2013 May 14)
-Second one. Update May 22.
-Update by Daniel Hahler, 2014 Jul 4, Aug 14, Oct 14, Oct 15.
-
 Patch to make fold updates much faster. (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Dec)
 
 Issue 54: document behavior of -complete, also expands arg.
@@ -550,9 +732,6 @@ Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2013 Apr 20, unfinished.
 
 Bug: findfile("any", "file:///tmp;") does not work.
 
-Patch to set antialiasing style on Windows. (Ondrej Balaz, 2013 Mar 14)
-Needs a different check for CLEARTYPE_QUALITY.
-
 In the ATTENTION message about an existing swap file, mention the name of the
 process that is running.  It might actually be some other program, e.g. after
 a reboot.
@@ -588,10 +767,6 @@ signs?  Patch by Christian Brabandt, 2013 Aug 22.
 
 Patch to remove flicker from popup menu. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto, 2013 Aug 15)
 
-Patch to add 'completeselect' option.  Specifies how to select a candidate in
-insert completion. (Shougo, 2013 May 29)
-Update to add to existing 'completeopt'. 2013 May 30
-
 Problem with refresh:always in completion. (Tyler Wade, 2013 Mar 17)
 
 b:undo_ftplugin cannot call a script-local function. (Boris Danilov, 2013 Jan
@@ -624,9 +799,6 @@ Win32: When 'autochdir' is on and 'encoding' is changed, files on the command
 line are opened again, but from the wrong directory.  Apply 'autochdir' only
 after starting up?
 
-Patch to add ":ldo" and ":cdo", execute commands over quickfix list and
-location list. (Yegappan Lakshmanan, 2013 Jun 2)
-
 8   "stl" and "stlnc" in 'fillchars' don't work for multi-byte characters.
     Patch by Christian Wellenbrock, 2013 Jul 5.
 
@@ -637,14 +809,6 @@ MS-Windows resizing problems:
   causes the window to move unnecessarily. (William E. Skeith III, 2012 Jan
   12) Patch: 2012 Jan 13  Needs more work (2012 Feb 2)
 
-Patch to use Modern UI 2.0 for the Nsis installer. (Guopeng Wen, 2010 Jul 30)
-Latest version: 2011 May 18 
-8   Windows install with NSIS: make it possible to do a silent install, see
-    http://nsis.sourceforge.net/Docs/Chapter4.html#4.12
-    Version from Guopeng Wen that does this (2010 Dec 27)
-Alternative: MSI installer: https://github.com/petrkle/vim-msi/
-Or the one on Issue 279
-
 'iminsert' global value set when using ":setlocal iminsert"? (Wu, 2012 Jun 23)
 
 Patch to append regexp to tag commands to make it possible to select one out
@@ -731,9 +895,6 @@ Only for MS-Windows.  No documentation.  Do we want this?
 
 Patch to support cursor shape in Cygwin console. (Ben bgold, 2011 Dec 27)
 
-Patch to support UTF-8 for Hangul. (Shawn Y.H. Kim, 2011 May 1)
-Needs more work.  Pinged 2012 Jan 4.
-
 Issue 64: when 'incsearch' is on can't paste LF on command line.
 
 On MS-Windows a temp dir with a & init causes system() to fail. (Ben Fritz,
@@ -767,9 +928,9 @@ Sep 17)  Asked for feedback from others.
 Win32: Cannot cd into a directory that starts with a space. (Andy Wokula, 2012
 Jan 19)
 
-Need to escape $HOME on Windows?  (ZyX, 2011 Jul 21, discussion 2013 Jul 4)
-Can't simply use a backslash, \$HOME has a different meaning already.
-Would be possible to use $$HOME where $HOME is to be used.
+Need to escape $HOME on Windows for fnameescape()?  (ZyX, 2011 Jul 21,
+discussion 2013 Jul 4) Can't simply use a backslash, \$HOME has a different
+meaning already.  Would be possible to use $$HOME where $HOME is to be used.
 
 "2" in 'formatoptions' not working in comments. (Christian Corneliussen, 2011
 Oct 26)
@@ -810,9 +971,6 @@ Patch to make "z=" work when 'spell' is off.  Does this have nasty side
 effects?  (Christian Brabandt, 2012 Aug 5, Update 2013 Aug 12)
 Would also need to do this for spellbadword() and spellsuggest().
 
-Patch for variable tabstops.  On github (Christian Brabandt, 2014 May 15)
-Update Aug 16 (email).
-
 On 64 bit MS-Windows "long" is only 32 bits, but we sometimes need to store a
 64 bits value.  Change all number options to use nropt_T and define it to the
 right type.
@@ -1018,9 +1176,6 @@ Patch for GVimExt to show an icon. (Dominik Riebeling, 2010 Nov 7)
 When writing a file > 2Gbyte, the reported number of bytes is negative.
 (Antonio Colombo, 2010 Dec 18)
 
-Patch: Let rare word highlighting overrule good word highlighting.
-(Jakson A. Aquino, 2010 Jul 30, again 2011 Jul 2)
-
 When 'lines' is 25 and 'scrolloff' is 12, "j" scrolls zero or two lines
 instead of one. (Constantin Pan, 2010 Sep 10)
 
@@ -1028,6 +1183,12 @@ Gui menu edit/paste in block mode insert only inserts in one line (Bjorn
 Winckler, 2011 May 11)
 Requires a map mode for Insert mode started from blockwise Visual mode.
 
+Use json format for new items in .viminfo:
+    |["info","any info"]
+    |["text","text text text"
+    |"continuation line"]
+    |["hist",242342342,{"arg":"value"}]
+
 Writing nested List and Dict in viminfo gives error message and can't be read
 back. (Yukihiro Nakadaira, 2010 Nov 13)
 
@@ -1078,8 +1239,8 @@ Dominique can't reproduce it.
 ":function f(x) keepjumps" creates a function where every command is executed
 like it has ":keepjumps" before it.
 
-Coverity: ask someone to create new user: Dominique.
-Check if there are new reported defects: http://scan.coverity.com/rung2.html
+Coverity: Check if there are new reported defects:
+https://scan.coverity.com/projects/241
 
 Patch to support :undo absolute jump to file save number. (Christian Brabandt,
 2010 Nov 5)
@@ -1115,7 +1276,7 @@ string value.
 
 Invalid read error in Farsi mode. (Dominique Pelle, 2009 Aug 2)
 
-For running gvim on an USB stick: avoid the OLE registration.  Use a command
+For running gvim on a USB stick: avoid the OLE registration.  Use a command
 line argument -noregister.
 
 When using an expression in 'statusline' leading white space sometimes goes
@@ -1427,8 +1588,13 @@ Win32: A --remote command that has a directory name starting with a ( doesn't
 work, the backslash is removed, assuming that it escapes the (. (Valery
 Kondakoff, 2009 May 13)
 
+Win32: Using "gvim --remote-tab-silent elŝuti.txt" doesn't work, the
+multi-byte character isn't passed and edits elsuti.txt.
+(Raúl Núñez de Arenas Coronado, 2015 Dec 18)
+
 Problem with 'langmap' being used on the rhs of a mapping. (Nikolai Weibull,
 2008 May 14)
+Possibly related problem: Alexey Muranov, 2015 Apr 2
 
 Problem with CTRL-F. (Charles Campbell, 2008 March 21)
 Only happens with "gvim -geometry "160x26+4+27" -u NONE -U NONE prop.c".
@@ -2040,10 +2206,17 @@ Add an option for a minimal text length before inserting a line break for
 (Kartik Agaram)
 
 
-At next release:
--   Build a huge version by default.
--   Improve plugin handling: Automatic updates, handle dependencies?
-    E.g. Vundle: https://github.com/gmarik/vundle
+Better plugin support (not plugin manager, see elsewhere for that):
+- Avoid use of feedkeys, add eval functions where needed:
+  - manipulating the Visual selection?
+- Add createmark(): add a mark like mM, but return a unique ID.  Need some way
+  to clean them up again...  Use a name + the script ID.
+  Add createmark( , 'c') to track inserts/deletes before the column.
+- Plugins need to make a lot of effort, lots of mappings, to know what
+  happened before pressing the key that triggers a plugin action.  How about
+  keeping the last N pressed keys, so that they do not need to be mapped?
+- equivalent of netbeans_beval_cb().  With an autocommand?
+- Add something to enable debugging when a remote message is received.
 
 
 More patches:
@@ -2643,8 +2816,7 @@ Macintosh:
 8   On MS-Windows ":make" doesn't show output while it is working.  Use the
     tee.exe from  http://unxutils.sourceforge.net/ ?  About 16 Kbyte in the
     UnxUtils.zip archive.
-    Alternate one: http://www.pramodx.20m.com/tee_for_win32.htm, but Walter
-    Briscoe says it's not as good.
+    Is it better than what we have in src/tee?
 8   When doing Insert mode completion a mapping cannot recursively call
     edit(), because the completion information is global.  Put everything in
     an allocated structure?
@@ -3393,10 +3565,7 @@ Syntax highlighting:
     one is contained in.  Like "keepend" but specified on the contained item,
     instead of the containing item.
 8   cpp.vim: In C++ it's allowed to use {} inside ().
-8   Some syntax files set 'iskeyword'.  When switching to another filetype
-    this isn't reset.  Add a special keyword definition for the syntax rules?
-    When this is done, use vim.vim syntax highlighting for help file examples,
-    but without ":" in 'iskeyword' for syntax.
+8   Some syntax files set 'iskeyword', they should use "syn iskeyword".
     Also need a separate 'iskeyword' for the command line, e.g., in a help
     window ":e /asdf/asdf/" CTRL-W works different.
 8   Add specific syntax item to match with parens/braces that don't have a
@@ -4067,8 +4236,6 @@ Autocommands:
 8   Autocommand for when modified files have been found, when getting input
     focus again (e.g., FileChangedFocus).
     Check when: getting focus, jumping to another buffer, ...
-7   Autocommand for when an option is changed.  Match buffer name or option
-    name?
 8   Autocommands should not change registers.  And marks?  And the jumplist?
     And anything else?  Add a command to save and restore these things.
 8   Add autocommands, user functions and user commands to ":mkvimrc".
@@ -4531,7 +4698,6 @@ Visual mode:
 6   ":left" and ":right" should work in Visual block mode.
 7   CTRL-I and CTRL-O should work in Visual mode, but only jump to marks in the
     current buffer.
-7   CTRL-A and CTRL-X should increase/decrease all numbers in the Visual area.
 6   In non-Block mode, "I" should insert the same text in front of each line,
     before the first non-blank, "gI" in column 1.
 6   In non-Block mode, "A" should append the same text after each line.
@@ -5127,13 +5293,8 @@ Registers:
 
 
 Debug mode:
-7   Add something to enable debugging when a remote message is received.
 8   Add breakpoints for setting an option
 8   Add breakpoints for assigning to a variable.
-7   Add a watchpoint in the debug mode: An expression that breaks execution
-    when evaluating to non-zero.  Add the "watchadd expr" command, stop when
-    the value of the expression changes.  ":watchdel" deletes an item,
-    ":watchlist" lists the items. (Charles Campbell)
 7   Store the history from debug mode in viminfo.
 7   Make the debug mode history available with histget() et al.
 

runtime/doc/usr_02.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_02.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2010 Jul 20
+*usr_02.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 16
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -408,7 +408,15 @@ original version of the file.
 
 Everything you always wanted to know can be found in the Vim help files.
 Don't be afraid to ask!
-   To get generic help use this command: >
+
+If you know what you are looking for, it is usually easier to search for it
+using the help system, instead of using Google.  Because the subjects follow
+a certain style guide.
+
+Also the help has the advantage of belonging to your particular Vim version.
+You won't see help for commands added later.  These would not work for you.
+
+To get generic help use this command: >
 
 	:help
 
@@ -482,7 +490,7 @@ example, use the following command: >
 
 	:help 'number'
 
-The table with all mode prefixes can be found here: |help-context|.
+The table with all mode prefixes can be found below: |help-summary|.
 
 Special keys are enclosed in angle brackets.  To find help on the up-arrow key
 in Insert mode, for instance, use this command: >
@@ -499,62 +507,191 @@ You can use the error ID at the start to find help about it: >
 
 
 Summary: 					*help-summary*  >
-	:help
-<		Gives you very general help.  Scroll down to see a list of all
-		helpfiles, including those added locally (i.e. not distributed
-		with Vim). >
-	:help user-toc.txt
-<		Table of contents of the User Manual. >
-	:help :subject
-<		Ex-command "subject", for instance the following: >
-	:help :help
-<		Help on getting help. >
-	:help abc
-<		normal-mode command "abc". >
-	:help CTRL-B
-<		Control key <C-B> in Normal mode. >
-	:help i_abc
-	:help i_CTRL-B
-<		The same in Insert mode. >
-	:help v_abc
-	:help v_CTRL-B
-<		The same in Visual mode. >
-	:help c_abc
-	:help c_CTRL-B
-<		The same in Command-line mode. >
-	:help 'subject'
-<		Option 'subject'. >
-	:help subject()
-<		Function "subject". >
-	:help -subject
-<		Command-line option "-subject". >
-	:help +subject
-<		Compile-time feature "+subject". >
-	:help EventName
-<		Autocommand event "EventName". >
-	:help digraphs.txt
-<		The top of the helpfile "digraph.txt".
-		Similarly for any other helpfile. >
-	:help pattern<Tab>
-<		Find a help tag starting with "pattern".  Repeat <Tab> for
-		others. >
-	:help pattern<Ctrl-D>
-<		See all possible help tag matches "pattern" at once. >
-	:helpgrep pattern
-<		Search the whole text of all help files for pattern "pattern".
-		Jumps to the first match.  Jump to other matches with: >
-	    :cn
-<			next match >
-	    :cprev
-	    :cN
-<			previous match >
-	    :cfirst
-	    :clast
-<			first or last match >
-	    :copen
-	    :cclose
-<			open/close the quickfix window; press <Enter> to jump
-			to the item under the cursor
+
+1) Use Ctrl-D after typing a topic and let Vim show all available topics.
+   Or press Tab to complete: >
+    	:help some<Tab>
+<   More information on how to use the help: >
+	:help helphelp
+
+2) Follow the links in bars to related help.  You can go from the detailed
+   help to the user documentation, which describes certain commands more from
+   a user perspective and less detailed.  E.g. after: >
+   	:help pattern.txt
+<   You can see the user guide topics |03.9| and |usr_27.txt| in the
+   introduction.
+
+3) Options are enclosed in single apostrophes.  To go to the help topic for the
+   list option: >
+	:help 'list'
+<   If you only know you are looking for a certain option, you can also do: >
+	:help options.txt
+<   to open the help page which describes all option handling and then search
+   using regular expressions, e.g. textwidth.
+   Certain options have their own namespace, e.g.: >
+   	:help cpo-<letter>
+<   for the corresponding flag of the 'cpoptions' settings, substitute <letter>
+   by a specific flag, e.g.: >
+  	:help cpo-;
+<   And for the guioption flags: >
+  	:help go-<letter>
+
+4) Normal mode commands do not have a prefix. To go to the help page for the
+   "gt" command: >
+   	:help gt
+
+5) Insert mode commands start with i_.  Help for deleting a word: >
+   	:help i_CTRL-W
+
+6) Visual mode commands start with v_.  Help for jumping to the other side of
+   the Visual area: >
+   	:help v_o
+
+7) Command line editing and arguments start with c_.  Help for using the
+   command argument %: >
+   	:help c_%
+
+8) Ex-commands always start with ":", so to go to the :s command help: >
+	:help :s
+
+9) Commands specifically for debugging start with ">".  To go to to the help
+   for the "cont" debug command: >
+	:help >cont
+
+10) Key combinations.  They usually start with a single letter indicating
+    the mode for which they can be used.  E.g.: >
+   	:help i_CTRL-X
+<    takes you to the family of Ctrl-X commands for insert mode which can be
+    used to auto complete different things.  Note, that certain keys will
+    always be written the same, e.g. Control will always be CTRL.
+    For normal mode commands there is no prefix and the topic is available at
+    :h CTRL-<Letter>. E.g.  >
+   	:help CTRL-W
+<    In contrast >
+	:help c_CTRL-R
+<    will describe what the Ctrl-R does when entering commands in the Command
+    line and >
+   	:help v_Ctrl-A
+<    talks about incrementing numbers in visual mode and >
+	:help g_CTRL-A
+<    talks about the g<C-A> command (e.g. you have to press "g" then <Ctrl-A>).
+    Here the "g" stand for the normal command "g" which always expects a second
+    key before doing something similar to the commands starting with "z"
+
+11) Regexp items always start with /.  So to get help for the "\+" quantifier
+    in Vim regexes: >
+   	:help /\+
+<    If you need to know everything about regular expressions, start reading
+    at: >
+   	:help pattern.txt
+
+12) Registers always start with "quote". To find out about the special ":"
+    register: >
+   	:help quote:
+
+13) Vim Script (VimL) is available at >
+	:help eval.txt
+<   Certain aspects of the language are available at :h expr-X where "X" is a
+   single letter. E.g.  >
+   	:help expr-!
+<   will take you to the topic describing the "!" (Not) operator for
+   VimScript.
+   Also important is >
+   	:help function-list
+<   to find a short description of all functions available.  Help topics for
+   VimL functions always include the "()", so: >
+   	:help append()
+<   talks about the append VimL function rather than how to append text in the
+   current buffer.
+
+14) Mappings are talked about in the help page :h |map.txt|. Use >
+    	:help mapmode-i
+<    to find out about the |:imap| command.  Also use :map-topic
+    to find out about certain subtopics particular for mappings.  e.g: >
+    	:help :map-local
+<    for buffer-local mappings or >
+	:help map-bar
+<    for how the '|' is handled in mappings.
+
+15) Command definitions are talked about :h command-topic, so use >
+	:help command-bar
+<    to find out about the '!' argument for custom commands.
+
+16) Window management commands always start with CTRL-W, so you find the
+    corresponding help at :h CTRL-W_letter.  E.g. >
+   	:help CTRL-W_p
+<    for moving the previous accessed window.  You can also access >
+	:help windows.txt
+<    and read your way through if you are looking for window handling
+    commands.
+
+17) Use |:helpgrep| to search in all help pages (and also of any installed
+    plugins).  See |:helpgrep| for how to use it.
+    To search for a topic: >
+    	:helpgrep topic
+<    This takes you to the first match.  To go to the next one: >
+	:cnext
+<    All matches are available in the quickfix window which can be opened
+    with: >
+    	:copen
+<    Move around to the match you like and press Enter to jump to that help.
+
+18) The user manual.  This describes help topics for beginners in a rather
+    friendly way.  Start at |usr_toc.txt| to find the table of content (as you
+    might have guessed): >
+    	:help usr_toc.txt
+<    Skim over the contents to find interesting topics. The "Digraphs" and
+    "Entering special characters" items are in chapter 24, so to go to that
+    particular help page: >
+    	:help usr_24.txt
+<    Also if you want to access a certain chapter in the help, the chapter
+    number can be accessed directly like this: >
+    	:help 10.1
+<    goes to chapter 10.1 in |usr_10.txt| and talks about recording macros.
+
+19) Highlighting groups.  Always start with hl-groupname.  E.g. >
+    	:help hl-WarningMsg
+<    talks about the WarningMsg highlighting group.
+
+20) Syntax highlighting is namespaced to :syn-topic e.g. >
+	:help :syn-conceal
+<    talks about the conceal argument for the :syn command.
+
+21) Quickfix commands usually start with :c while location list commands
+    usually start with :l
+
+22) Autocommand events can be found by their name: >
+     	:help BufWinLeave
+<    To see all possible events: >
+	:help autocommands-events
+
+23) Command-line switches always start with "-".  So for the help of the -f
+    command switch of Vim use: >
+    	:help -f
+
+24) Optional features always start with "+".  To find out about the
+    conceal feature use: >
+    	:help +conceal
+
+25) Documentation for included filetype specific functionality is usually
+    available  in the form ft-<filetype>-<functionality>.  So >
+    	:help ft-c-syntax
+<    talks about the C syntax file and the option it provides.  Sometimes,
+    additional sections for omni completion >
+    	:help ft-php-omni
+<    or filetype plugins >
+	:help ft-tex-plugin
+<    are available.
+
+26) Error and Warning codes can be looked up directly in the help.  So >
+	:help E297
+<    takes you exactly to the description of the swap error message and >
+	:help W10
+<    talks about the warning "Changing a readonly file".
+    Sometimes however, those error codes are not described, but rather are
+    listed at the Vim command that usually causes this.  So: >
+    	:help E128
+<    takes you to the |:function| command
 
 
 ==============================================================================

runtime/doc/usr_03.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_03.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2006 Jun 21
+*usr_03.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 05
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -57,8 +57,11 @@ paragraph, much faster than using "l".  "b" does the same in the other
 direction.
 
 A word ends at a non-word character, such as a ".", "-" or ")".  To change
-what Vim considers to be a word, see the 'iskeyword' option.
-   It is also possible to move by white-space separated WORDs.  This is not a
+what Vim considers to be a word, see the 'iskeyword' option.  If you try this
+out in the help directly, 'iskeyword' needs to be reset for the examples to
+work: >
+	:set iskeyword&
+It is also possible to move by white-space separated WORDs.  This is not a
 word in the normal sense, that's why the uppercase is used.  The commands for
 moving by WORDs are also uppercase, as this figure shows:
 
@@ -410,8 +413,8 @@ in "the" use: >
 	/the\>
 
 The "\>" item is a special marker that only matches at the end of a word.
-Similarly "\<" only matches at the begin of a word.  Thus to search for the
-word "the" only: >
+Similarly "\<" only matches at the beginning of a word.  Thus to search for
+the word "the" only: >
 
 	/\<the\>
 

runtime/doc/usr_29.txt

@@ -255,7 +255,8 @@ function.
 
 RELATED ITEMS
 
-You can set 'ignorecase' to make case in tag names be ignored.
+To make case in tag names be ignored, you can set 'ignorecase' while leaving
+'tagcase' as "followic", or set 'tagcase' to "ignore".
 
 The 'tagbsearch' option tells if the tags file is sorted or not.  The default
 is to assume a sorted tags file, which makes a tags search a lot faster, but

runtime/doc/usr_41.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 16
+*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 28
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -888,6 +888,19 @@ Mappings:				    *mapping-functions*
 	maparg()		get rhs of a mapping
 	wildmenumode()		check if the wildmode is active
 
+Testing:				    *test-functions*
+	assert_equal()       	assert that two expressions values are equal
+	assert_false()		assert that an expression is false
+	assert_true()		assert that an expression is true
+
+Inter-process communication:
+	connect()		open a channel
+	disconnect()		close a channel
+	sendexpr()		send a JSON message over a channel
+	sendraw()		send a raw message over a channel
+	jsonencode()		encode an expression to a JSON string
+	jsondecode()		decode a JSON string to Vim types
+
 Various:					*various-functions*
 	mode()			get current editing mode
 	visualmode()		last visual mode used
@@ -916,8 +929,10 @@ Various:					*various-functions*
 
 	luaeval()		evaluate Lua expression
 	mzeval()		evaluate |MzScheme| expression
+	perleval()		evaluate Perl expression (|+perl|)
 	py3eval()		evaluate Python expression (|+python3|)
 	pyeval()		evaluate Python expression (|+python|)
+	wordcount()             get byte/word/char count of buffer
 
 ==============================================================================
 *41.7*	Defining a function

runtime/doc/usr_43.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_43.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2008 Dec 28
+*usr_43.txt*	For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Oct 23
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -46,6 +46,7 @@ three-line comment.  You do this with only two steps:
 
 	setlocal softtabstop=4
 	noremap <buffer> <LocalLeader>c o/**************<CR><CR>/<Esc>
+	let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl softtabstop< | unmap <buffer> <LocalLeader>c"
 
 Try editing a C file.  You should notice that the 'softtabstop' option is set
 to 4.  But when you edit another file it's reset to the default zero.  That is
@@ -60,6 +61,11 @@ buffer.  This works with any mapping command: ":map!", ":vmap", etc.  The
 |<LocalLeader>| in the mapping is replaced with the value of the
 "maplocalleader" variable.
 
+The line to set b:undo_ftplugin is for when the filetype is set to another
+value.  In that case you will want to undo your preferences.  The
+b:undo_ftplugin variable is executed as a command. Watch out for characters
+with a special meaning inside a string, such as a backslash.
+
 You can find examples for filetype plugins in this directory: >
 
 	$VIMRUNTIME/ftplugin/

runtime/doc/various.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2014 Aug 06
+*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 31
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -208,8 +208,6 @@ g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
 			Example: >
 				:exe "normal \<c-w>\<c-w>"
 <			{not in Vi, of course}
-			{not available when the |+ex_extra| feature was
-			disabled at compile time}
 
 :{range}norm[al][!] {commands}				*:normal-range*
 			Execute Normal mode commands {commands} for each line
@@ -218,8 +216,6 @@ g8			Print the hex values of the bytes used in the
 			for each line.  Otherwise it's the same as the
 			":normal" command without a range.
 			{not in Vi}
-			{not available when |+ex_extra| feature was disabled
-			at compile time}
 
 							*:sh* *:shell* *E371*
 :sh[ell]		This command starts a shell.  When the shell exits
@@ -319,6 +315,7 @@ N  *+builtin_terms*	some terminals builtin |builtin-terms|
 B  *++builtin_terms*	maximal terminals builtin |builtin-terms|
 N  *+byte_offset*	support for 'o' flag in 'statusline' option, "go"
 			and ":goto" commands.
+m  *+channel*		inter process communication |channel|
 N  *+cindent*		|'cindent'|, C indenting
 N  *+clientserver*	Unix and Win32: Remote invocation |clientserver|
    *+clipboard*		|clipboard| support
@@ -341,8 +338,7 @@ m  *+directx*		Win32 GUI only: DirectX and |'renderoptions'|
    *+dnd*		Support for DnD into the "~ register |quote_~|.
 B  *+emacs_tags*	|emacs-tags| files
 N  *+eval*		expression evaluation |eval.txt|
-N  *+ex_extra*		Vim's extra Ex commands: |:center|, |:left|,
-			|:normal|, |:retab| and |:right|
+N  *+ex_extra*		always on now, used to be for Vim's extra Ex commands
 N  *+extra_search*	|'hlsearch'| and |'incsearch'| options.
 B  *+farsi*		|farsi| language
 N  *+file_in_path*	|gf|, |CTRL-W_f| and |<cfile>|
@@ -647,6 +643,7 @@ K			Run a program to lookup the keyword under the
 g CTRL-A		Only when Vim was compiled with MEM_PROFILING defined
 			(which is very rare): print memory usage statistics.
 			Only useful for debugging Vim.
+			For incrementing in Visual mode see |v_g_CTRL-A|.
 
 ==============================================================================
 2. Using Vim like less or more					*less*
@@ -665,4 +662,12 @@ highlighting.
 
 The "h" key will give you a short overview of the available commands.
 
+If you want to set options differently when using less, define the
+LessInitFunc in your vimrc, for example: >
+
+	func LessInitFunc()
+	  set nocursorcolumn nocursorline
+	endfunc
+<
+
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/version5.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*version5.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2012 Aug 08
+*version5.txt*  For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2016 Jan 03
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -848,7 +848,7 @@ putting a backslash before it.  |+cmd|
 
 After recovery, BufReadPost autocommands are applied.  |:recover|
 
-Added color support for "os2ansi", OS/2 console. (Slootman) |os2ansi|
+Added color support for "os2ansi", OS/2 console. (Slootman)
 
 Allow "%:p:h" when % is empty.  |:_%|
 

runtime/doc/version7.txt

@@ -931,7 +931,7 @@ New and extended functions: ~
 |spellbadword()|	get a badly spelled word
 |spellsuggest()|	get suggestions for correct spelling
 |split()|		split a String into a List
-|str2nr()|		convert a string to a number, base 8, 10 or 16
+|str2nr()|		convert a string to a number, base 2, 8, 10 or 16
 |stridx()|		extra argument: start position
 |strridx()|		extra argument: start position
 |string()|		string representation of a List or Dictionary

runtime/doc/vi_diff.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*vi_diff.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2013 Aug 22
+*vi_diff.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Nov 01
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar

runtime/doc/vim-ja.UTF-8.1

@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Note: "+" と "\-c" は合わせて 10 個まで指定できます。
 .TP
 \-b
 バイナリモード。
-バイナリファイルを編集ためのオプションがいくつか設定されます。
+バイナリファイルを編集するためのオプションがいくつか設定されます。
 .TP
 \-C
 互換モード。'compatible' オプションがオンになります。

runtime/doc/vim.man

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-VIM(1)                                                                  VIM(1)
+VIM(1)                      General Commands Manual                     VIM(1)
 
 
 
@@ -21,13 +21,13 @@ DESCRIPTION
        to edit all kinds of plain text.  It is especially useful  for  editing
        programs.
 
-       There  are a lot of enhancements above Vi: multi level undo, multi win-
+       There  are a lot of enhancements above Vi: multi level undo, multi win‐
        dows and buffers, syntax highlighting, command line  editing,  filename
        completion,   on-line   help,   visual  selection,  etc..   See  ":help
        vi_diff.txt" for a summary of the differences between Vim and Vi.
 
        While running Vim a lot of help can be obtained from the  on-line  help
-       system,  with the ":help" command.  See the ON-LINE HELP section below.
+       system, with the ":help" command.  See the ON-LINE HELP section below.
 
        Most often Vim is started to edit a single file with the command
 
@@ -38,44 +38,44 @@ DESCRIPTION
             vim [options] [filelist]
 
        If the filelist is missing, the editor will start with an empty buffer.
-       Otherwise  exactly  one out of the following four may be used to choose
+       Otherwise exactly one out of the following four may be used  to  choose
        one or more files to be edited.
 
-       file ..     A list of filenames.  The first one  will  be  the  current
-                   file  and  read  into the buffer.  The cursor will be posi-
+       file ..     A  list  of  filenames.   The first one will be the current
+                   file and read into the buffer.  The cursor  will  be  posi‐
                    tioned on the first line of the buffer.  You can get to the
-                   other  files with the ":next" command.  To edit a file that
+                   other files with the ":next" command.  To edit a file  that
                    starts with a dash, precede the filelist with "--".
 
-       -           The file to edit is read from  stdin.   Commands  are  read
+       -           The  file  to  edit  is read from stdin.  Commands are read
                    from stderr, which should be a tty.
 
        -t {tag}    The file to edit and the initial cursor position depends on
-                   a "tag", a sort of goto label.  {tag} is looked up  in  the
+                   a  "tag",  a sort of goto label.  {tag} is looked up in the
                    tags file, the associated file becomes the current file and
-                   the associated command is executed.  Mostly  this  is  used
-                   for  C  programs,  in  which case {tag} could be a function
+                   the  associated  command  is executed.  Mostly this is used
+                   for C programs, in which case {tag}  could  be  a  function
                    name.  The effect is that the file containing that function
-                   becomes  the  current  file and the cursor is positioned on
+                   becomes the current file and the cursor  is  positioned  on
                    the start of the function.  See ":help tag-commands".
 
        -q [errorfile]
-                   Start in quickFix mode.  The file [errorfile] is  read  and
-                   the  first  error is displayed.  If [errorfile] is omitted,
+                   Start  in  quickFix mode.  The file [errorfile] is read and
+                   the first error is displayed.  If [errorfile]  is  omitted,
                    the  filename  is  obtained  from  the  'errorfile'  option
-                   (defaults  to  "AztecC.Err"  for the Amiga, "errors.err" on
-                   other systems).  Further errors can be jumped to  with  the
+                   (defaults to "AztecC.Err" for the  Amiga,  "errors.err"  on
+                   other  systems).   Further errors can be jumped to with the
                    ":cn" command.  See ":help quickfix".
 
-       Vim behaves differently, depending on the name of the command (the exe-
+       Vim behaves differently, depending on the name of the command (the exe‐
        cutable may still be the same file).
 
        vim       The "normal" way, everything is default.
 
-       ex        Start in Ex mode.  Go to Normal mode with the ":vi"  command.
+       ex        Start  in Ex mode.  Go to Normal mode with the ":vi" command.
                  Can also be done with the "-e" argument.
 
-       view      Start  in read-only mode.  You will be protected from writing
+       view      Start in read-only mode.  You will be protected from  writing
                  the files.  Can also be done with the "-R" argument.
 
        gvim gview
@@ -87,102 +87,102 @@ DESCRIPTION
                  be done with the "-y" argument.
 
        rvim rview rgvim rgview
-                 Like the above, but with restrictions.  It will not be possi-
-                 ble  to  start  shell  commands, or suspend Vim.  Can also be
+                 Like the above, but with restrictions.  It will not be possi‐
+                 ble to start shell commands, or suspend  Vim.   Can  also  be
                  done with the "-Z" argument.
 
 OPTIONS
-       The options may be given in  any  order,  before  or  after  filenames.
+       The  options  may  be  given  in  any order, before or after filenames.
        Options without an argument can be combined after a single dash.
 
-       +[num]      For  the  first  file the cursor will be positioned on line
-                   "num".  If "num" is missing, the cursor will be  positioned
+       +[num]      For the first file the cursor will be  positioned  on  line
+                   "num".   If "num" is missing, the cursor will be positioned
                    on the last line.
 
-       +/{pat}     For  the  first  file  the cursor will be positioned on the
-                   first occurrence of {pat}.  See ":help search-pattern"  for
-                   the available search patterns.
+       +/{pat}     For the first file the cursor will  be  positioned  in  the
+                   line  with  the  first  occurrence  of  {pat}.   See ":help
+                   search-pattern" for the available search patterns.
 
        +{command}
 
        -c {command}
-                   {command}  will  be  executed after the first file has been
-                   read.  {command} is interpreted as an Ex command.   If  the
-                   {command}  contains  spaces  it  must be enclosed in double
-                   quotes (this depends on the shell that is used).   Example:
+                   {command} will be executed after the first  file  has  been
+                   read.   {command}  is interpreted as an Ex command.  If the
+                   {command} contains spaces it must  be  enclosed  in  double
+                   quotes  (this depends on the shell that is used).  Example:
                    Vim "+set si" main.c
                    Note: You can use up to 10 "+" or "-c" commands.
 
-       -S {file}   {file}  will be sourced after the first file has been read.
-                   This is equivalent to -c "source  {file}".   {file}  cannot
+       -S {file}   {file} will be sourced after the first file has been  read.
+                   This  is  equivalent  to -c "source {file}".  {file} cannot
                    start with '-'.  If {file} is omitted "Session.vim" is used
                    (only works when -S is the last argument).
 
        --cmd {command}
-                   Like using "-c", but the command is  executed  just  before
-                   processing  any  vimrc file.  You can use up to 10 of these
+                   Like  using  "-c",  but the command is executed just before
+                   processing any vimrc file.  You can use up to 10  of  these
                    commands, independently from "-c" commands.
 
-       -A          If Vim has been compiled with ARABIC  support  for  editing
-                   right-to-left  oriented  files and Arabic keyboard mapping,
-                   this option starts Vim in Arabic  mode,  i.e.  'arabic'  is
+       -A          If  Vim  has  been compiled with ARABIC support for editing
+                   right-to-left oriented files and Arabic  keyboard  mapping,
+                   this  option  starts  Vim  in Arabic mode, i.e. 'arabic' is
                    set.  Otherwise an error message is given and Vim aborts.
 
-       -b          Binary  mode.  A few options will be set that makes it pos-
+       -b          Binary mode.  A few options will be set that makes it  pos‐
                    sible to edit a binary or executable file.
 
-       -C          Compatible.  Set the 'compatible' option.  This  will  make
-                   Vim  behave  mostly  like  Vi,  even  though  a .vimrc file
+       -C          Compatible.   Set  the 'compatible' option.  This will make
+                   Vim behave mostly  like  Vi,  even  though  a  .vimrc  file
                    exists.
 
-       -d          Start in diff mode.  There should be  two,  three  or  four
-                   file  name arguments.  Vim will open all the files and show
+       -d          Start  in  diff  mode.   There should be two, three or four
+                   file name arguments.  Vim will open all the files and  show
                    differences between them.  Works like vimdiff(1).
 
-       -d {device} Open {device} for use as a terminal.  Only  on  the  Amiga.
+       -d {device} Open  {device}  for  use as a terminal.  Only on the Amiga.
                    Example: "-d con:20/30/600/150".
 
-       -D          Debugging.   Go  to debugging mode when executing the first
+       -D          Debugging.  Go to debugging mode when executing  the  first
                    command from a script.
 
-       -e          Start Vim in Ex mode, just like the executable  was  called
+       -e          Start  Vim  in Ex mode, just like the executable was called
                    "ex".
 
        -E          Start Vim in improved Ex mode, just like the executable was
                    called "exim".
 
-       -f          Foreground.  For the GUI version, Vim  will  not  fork  and
+       -f          Foreground.   For  the  GUI  version, Vim will not fork and
                    detach from the shell it was started in.  On the Amiga, Vim
-                   is not restarted to open a new window.  This option  should
-                   be  used  when  Vim is executed by a program that will wait
-                   for the edit session to finish (e.g. mail).  On  the  Amiga
+                   is  not restarted to open a new window.  This option should
+                   be used when Vim is executed by a program  that  will  wait
+                   for  the  edit session to finish (e.g. mail).  On the Amiga
                    the ":sh" and ":!" commands will not work.
 
-       --nofork    Foreground.   For  the  GUI  version, Vim will not fork and
+       --nofork    Foreground.  For the GUI version, Vim  will  not  fork  and
                    detach from the shell it was started in.
 
-       -F          If Vim has been compiled with  FKMAP  support  for  editing
-                   right-to-left  oriented  files  and Farsi keyboard mapping,
-                   this option starts Vim in  Farsi  mode,  i.e.  'fkmap'  and
-                   'rightleft'  are  set.  Otherwise an error message is given
-                   and Vim aborts.
-
-       -g          If Vim has been compiled  with  GUI  support,  this  option
-                   enables  the  GUI.   If  no GUI support was compiled in, an
-                   error message is given and Vim aborts.
-
-       -h          Give a bit of help about the  command  line  arguments  and
-                   options.  After this Vim exits.
-
-       -H          If Vim has been compiled with RIGHTLEFT support for editing
-                   right-to-left oriented files and Hebrew  keyboard  mapping,
-                   this  option  starts  Vim  in Hebrew mode, i.e. 'hkmap' and
+       -F          If  Vim  has  been  compiled with FKMAP support for editing
+                   right-to-left oriented files and  Farsi  keyboard  mapping,
+                   this  option  starts  Vim  in  Farsi mode, i.e. 'fkmap' and
                    'rightleft' are set.  Otherwise an error message  is  given
                    and Vim aborts.
 
+       -g          If  Vim  has  been  compiled  with GUI support, this option
+                   enables the GUI.  If no GUI support  was  compiled  in,  an
+                   error message is given and Vim aborts.
+
+       -h          Give  a  bit  of  help about the command line arguments and
+                   options.  After this Vim exits.
+
+       -H          If Vim has been compiled with RIGHTLEFT support for editing
+                   right-to-left  oriented  files and Hebrew keyboard mapping,
+                   this option starts Vim in Hebrew  mode,  i.e.  'hkmap'  and
+                   'rightleft'  are  set.  Otherwise an error message is given
+                   and Vim aborts.
+
        -i {viminfo}
-                   When  using  the  viminfo file is enabled, this option sets
-                   the filename to use, instead of the  default  "~/.viminfo".
+                   When using the viminfo file is enabled,  this  option  sets
+                   the  filename  to use, instead of the default "~/.viminfo".
                    This can also be used to skip the use of the .viminfo file,
                    by giving the name "NONE".
 
@@ -190,92 +190,92 @@ OPTIONS
 
        -l          Lisp mode.  Sets the 'lisp' and 'showmatch' options on.
 
-       -m          Modifying files is disabled.  Resets  the  'write'  option.
-                   You  can still modify the buffer, but writing a file is not
+       -m          Modifying  files  is  disabled.  Resets the 'write' option.
+                   You can still modify the buffer, but writing a file is  not
                    possible.
 
-       -M          Modifications not allowed.  The  'modifiable'  and  'write'
-                   options  will be unset, so that changes are not allowed and
-                   files can not be written.  Note that these options  can  be
+       -M          Modifications  not  allowed.   The 'modifiable' and 'write'
+                   options will be unset, so that changes are not allowed  and
+                   files  can  not be written.  Note that these options can be
                    set to enable making modifications.
 
-       -N          No-compatible  mode.   Reset the 'compatible' option.  This
-                   will make Vim behave a bit better, but less Vi  compatible,
+       -N          No-compatible mode.  Reset the 'compatible'  option.   This
+                   will  make Vim behave a bit better, but less Vi compatible,
                    even though a .vimrc file does not exist.
 
-       -n          No  swap file will be used.  Recovery after a crash will be
-                   impossible.  Handy if you want to edit a  file  on  a  very
-                   slow  medium  (e.g.  floppy).   Can also be done with ":set
+       -n          No swap file will be used.  Recovery after a crash will  be
+                   impossible.   Handy  if  you  want to edit a file on a very
+                   slow medium (e.g. floppy).  Can also  be  done  with  ":set
                    uc=0".  Can be undone with ":set uc=200".
 
-       -nb         Become an editor server for NetBeans.   See  the  docs  for
+       -nb         Become  an  editor  server  for NetBeans.  See the docs for
                    details.
 
        -o[N]       Open N windows stacked.  When N is omitted, open one window
                    for each file.
 
-       -O[N]       Open N windows side by side.  When N is omitted,  open  one
+       -O[N]       Open  N  windows side by side.  When N is omitted, open one
                    window for each file.
 
        -p[N]       Open N tab pages.  When N is omitted, open one tab page for
                    each file.
 
-       -R          Read-only mode.  The 'readonly' option will  be  set.   You
-                   can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from acci-
-                   dently overwriting a file.  If you do want to  overwrite  a
-                   file,  add  an  exclamation  mark  to the Ex command, as in
-                   ":w!".  The -R option  also  implies  the  -n  option  (see
-                   below).   The  'readonly'  option  can  be reset with ":set
+       -R          Read-only  mode.   The  'readonly' option will be set.  You
+                   can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from acci‐
+                   dently  overwriting  a file.  If you do want to overwrite a
+                   file, add an exclamation mark to  the  Ex  command,  as  in
+                   ":w!".   The  -R  option  also  implies  the -n option (see
+                   below).  The 'readonly' option  can  be  reset  with  ":set
                    noro".  See ":help 'readonly'".
 
-       -r          List swap files, with  information  about  using  them  for
+       -r          List  swap  files,  with  information  about using them for
                    recovery.
 
-       -r {file}   Recovery  mode.  The swap file is used to recover a crashed
-                   editing session.  The swap file is a  file  with  the  same
+       -r {file}   Recovery mode.  The swap file is used to recover a  crashed
+                   editing  session.   The  swap  file is a file with the same
                    filename as the text file with ".swp" appended.  See ":help
                    recovery".
 
-       -s          Silent mode.  Only when started as "Ex" or  when  the  "-e"
+       -s          Silent  mode.   Only  when started as "Ex" or when the "-e"
                    option was given before the "-s" option.
 
        -s {scriptin}
-                   The  script file {scriptin} is read.  The characters in the
-                   file are interpreted as if you had typed  them.   The  same
+                   The script file {scriptin} is read.  The characters in  the
+                   file  are  interpreted  as if you had typed them.  The same
                    can be done with the command ":source! {scriptin}".  If the
                    end of the file is reached before the editor exits, further
                    characters are read from the keyboard.
 
        -T {terminal}
-                   Tells  Vim  the  name  of the terminal you are using.  Only
-                   required when the automatic way doesn't work.  Should be  a
-                   terminal  known  to Vim (builtin) or defined in the termcap
+                   Tells Vim the name of the terminal  you  are  using.   Only
+                   required  when the automatic way doesn't work.  Should be a
+                   terminal known to Vim (builtin) or defined in  the  termcap
                    or terminfo file.
 
-       -u {vimrc}  Use the commands in the file {vimrc}  for  initializations.
-                   All  the  other  initializations  are skipped.  Use this to
-                   edit a special kind of files.  It can also be used to  skip
-                   all  initializations by giving the name "NONE".  See ":help
+       -u {vimrc}  Use  the  commands in the file {vimrc} for initializations.
+                   All the other initializations are  skipped.   Use  this  to
+                   edit  a special kind of files.  It can also be used to skip
+                   all initializations by giving the name "NONE".  See  ":help
                    initialization" within vim for more details.
 
-       -U {gvimrc} Use the commands in the file {gvimrc} for  GUI  initializa-
-                   tions.   All the other GUI initializations are skipped.  It
-                   can also be used to skip all GUI initializations by  giving
-                   the  name "NONE".  See ":help gui-init" within vim for more
+       -U {gvimrc} Use  the  commands in the file {gvimrc} for GUI initializa‐
+                   tions.  All the other GUI initializations are skipped.   It
+                   can  also be used to skip all GUI initializations by giving
+                   the name "NONE".  See ":help gui-init" within vim for  more
                    details.
 
-       -V[N]       Verbose.  Give messages about which files are  sourced  and
-                   for  reading and writing a viminfo file.  The optional num-
+       -V[N]       Verbose.   Give  messages about which files are sourced and
+                   for reading and writing a viminfo file.  The optional  num‐
                    ber N is the value for 'verbose'.  Default is 10.
 
-       -v          Start Vim in Vi mode, just like the executable  was  called
-                   "vi".   This  only has effect when the executable is called
+       -v          Start  Vim  in Vi mode, just like the executable was called
+                   "vi".  This only has effect when the executable  is  called
                    "ex".
 
        -w {scriptout}
-                   All the characters that you type are recorded in  the  file
-                   {scriptout},  until  you  exit  Vim.  This is useful if you
-                   want to create a script file to be used with  "vim  -s"  or
+                   All  the  characters that you type are recorded in the file
+                   {scriptout}, until you exit Vim.  This  is  useful  if  you
+                   want  to  create  a script file to be used with "vim -s" or
                    ":source!".  If the {scriptout} file exists, characters are
                    appended.
 
@@ -285,27 +285,27 @@ OPTIONS
        -x          Use encryption when writing files.  Will prompt for a crypt
                    key.
 
-       -X          Don't  connect to the X server.  Shortens startup time in a
-                   terminal, but the window title and clipboard  will  not  be
+       -X          Don't connect to the X server.  Shortens startup time in  a
+                   terminal,  but  the  window title and clipboard will not be
                    used.
 
        -y          Start Vim in easy mode, just like the executable was called
-                   "evim" or "eview".  Makes Vim behave like a  click-and-type
+                   "evim"  or "eview".  Makes Vim behave like a click-and-type
                    editor.
 
-       -Z          Restricted  mode.   Works  like  the executable starts with
+       -Z          Restricted mode.  Works like  the  executable  starts  with
                    "r".
 
-       --          Denotes the end of the options.  Arguments after this  will
-                   be  handled  as  a  file  name.  This can be used to edit a
+       --          Denotes  the end of the options.  Arguments after this will
+                   be handled as a file name.  This can  be  used  to  edit  a
                    filename that starts with a '-'.
 
        --echo-wid  GTK GUI only: Echo the Window ID on stdout.
 
        --help      Give a help message and exit, just like "-h".
 
-       --literal   Take file name arguments literally,  do  not  expand  wild-
-                   cards.   This has no effect on Unix where the shell expands
+       --literal   Take  file  name  arguments  literally, do not expand wild‐
+                   cards.  This has no effect on Unix where the shell  expands
                    wildcards.
 
        --noplugin  Skip loading plugins.  Implied by -u NONE.
@@ -315,18 +315,18 @@ OPTIONS
                    is given and the files are edited in the current Vim.
 
        --remote-expr {expr}
-                   Connect to a Vim server, evaluate {expr} in  it  and  print
+                   Connect  to  a  Vim server, evaluate {expr} in it and print
                    the result on stdout.
 
        --remote-send {keys}
                    Connect to a Vim server and send {keys} to it.
 
        --remote-silent
-                   As  --remote,  but  without  the  warning when no server is
+                   As --remote, but without the  warning  when  no  server  is
                    found.
 
        --remote-wait
-                   As --remote, but Vim does not exit  until  the  files  have
+                   As  --remote,  but  Vim  does not exit until the files have
                    been edited.
 
        --remote-wait-silent
@@ -337,31 +337,31 @@ OPTIONS
                    List the names of all Vim servers that can be found.
 
        --servername {name}
-                   Use {name} as the server name.  Used for the  current  Vim,
+                   Use  {name}  as the server name.  Used for the current Vim,
                    unless used with a --remote argument, then it's the name of
                    the server to connect to.
 
        --socketid {id}
-                   GTK GUI only: Use the GtkPlug  mechanism  to  run  gvim  in
+                   GTK  GUI  only:  Use  the  GtkPlug mechanism to run gvim in
                    another window.
 
        --version   Print version information and exit.
 
 ON-LINE HELP
-       Type  ":help"  in Vim to get started.  Type ":help subject" to get help
-       on a specific subject.  For example: ":help ZZ" to  get  help  for  the
-       "ZZ"  command.   Use <Tab> and CTRL-D to complete subjects (":help cmd-
-       line-completion").  Tags are present to jump from one place to  another
+       Type ":help" in Vim to get started.  Type ":help subject" to  get  help
+       on  a  specific  subject.   For example: ":help ZZ" to get help for the
+       "ZZ" command.  Use <Tab> and CTRL-D to complete subjects  (":help  cmd‐
+       line-completion").   Tags are present to jump from one place to another
        (sort of hypertext links, see ":help").  All documentation files can be
        viewed in this way, for example ":help syntax.txt".
 
 FILES
        /usr/local/lib/vim/doc/*.txt
-                      The Vim documentation files.  Use ":help  doc-file-list"
+                      The  Vim documentation files.  Use ":help doc-file-list"
                       to get the complete list.
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/doc/tags
-                      The  tags file used for finding information in the docu-
+                      The tags file used for finding information in the  docu‐
                       mentation files.
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/syntax.vim
@@ -381,7 +381,7 @@ FILES
        ~/.gvimrc      Your personal gvim initializations.
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/optwin.vim
-                      Script used for the ":options" command, a  nice  way  to
+                      Script  used  for  the ":options" command, a nice way to
                       view and set options.
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/menu.vim
@@ -391,11 +391,11 @@ FILES
                       Script to generate a bug report.  See ":help bugs".
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/filetype.vim
-                      Script  to  detect  the type of a file by its name.  See
+                      Script to detect the type of a file by  its  name.   See
                       ":help 'filetype'".
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/scripts.vim
-                      Script to detect the type of a  file  by  its  contents.
+                      Script  to  detect  the  type of a file by its contents.
                       See ":help 'filetype'".
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/print/*.ps
@@ -410,8 +410,8 @@ SEE ALSO
 AUTHOR
        Most of Vim was made by Bram Moolenaar, with a lot of help from others.
        See ":help credits" in Vim.
-       Vim is based on Stevie, worked on by: Tim Thompson,  Tony  Andrews  and
-       G.R.  (Fred) Walter.  Although hardly any of the original code remains.
+       Vim  is  based  on Stevie, worked on by: Tim Thompson, Tony Andrews and
+       G.R. (Fred) Walter.  Although hardly any of the original code remains.
 
 BUGS
        Probably.  See ":help todo" for a list of known problems.

runtime/doc/windows.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*windows.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Jan 31
+*windows.txt*   For Vim version 7.4.  Last change: 2015 Nov 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -715,7 +715,8 @@ can also get to them with the buffer list commands, like ":bnext".
 			{cmd} must not open or close windows or reorder them.
 			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
 			|+listcmds| feature}
-			Also see |:tabdo|, |:argdo| and |:bufdo|.
+			Also see |:tabdo|, |:argdo|, |:bufdo|, |:cdo|, |:ldo|,
+			|:cfdo| and |:lfdo|
 
 							*:bufdo*
 :[range]bufdo[!] {cmd}	Execute {cmd} in each buffer in the buffer list or if
@@ -743,7 +744,8 @@ can also get to them with the buffer list commands, like ":bnext".
 			each buffer.
 			{not in Vi} {not available when compiled without the
 			|+listcmds| feature}
-			Also see |:tabdo|, |:argdo| and |:windo|.
+			Also see |:tabdo|, |:argdo|, |:windo|, |:cdo|, |:ldo|,
+			|:cfdo| and |:lfdo|
 
 Examples: >
 
@@ -986,9 +988,10 @@ A buffer can also be unlisted.  This means it exists, but it is not in the
 list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 
 
-:files[!]					*:files*
-:buffers[!]					*:buffers* *:ls*
-:ls[!]		Show all buffers.  Example:
+:files[!] [flags]				*:files*
+:buffers[!] [flags]				*:buffers* *:ls*
+:ls[!] [flags]
+		Show all buffers.  Example:
 
 			1 #h   "/test/text"		line 1 ~
 			2u     "asdf"			line 0 ~
@@ -1014,6 +1017,21 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 		    +	a modified buffer
 		    x   a buffer with read errors
 
+		[flags] can be a combination of the following characters,
+		which restrict the buffers to be listed:
+		     +   modified buffers
+		     -   buffers with 'modifiable' off
+		     =   readonly buffers
+		     a   active buffers
+		     u   unlisted buffers (overrides the "!")
+		     h   hidden buffers
+		     x   buffers with a read error
+		     %   current buffer
+		     #   alternate buffer
+		Combining flags means they are "and"ed together, e.g.:
+		     h+   hidden buffers which are modified
+		     a+   active buffers which are modified
+
 						*:bad* *:badd*
 :bad[d]	[+lnum] {fname}
 		Add file name {fname} to the buffer list, without loading it.
@@ -1099,13 +1117,13 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 		the current buffer remains being edited.  See |:buffer-!| for
 		[!].  This will also edit a buffer that is not in the buffer
 		list, without setting the 'buflisted' flag.
-		Also see ||+cmd|.
+		Also see |+cmd|.
 
 :[N]b[uffer][!] [+cmd] {bufname}
 		Edit buffer for {bufname} from the buffer list.  See
 		|:buffer-!| for [!].  This will also edit a buffer that is not
 		in the buffer list, without setting the 'buflisted' flag.
-		Also see ||+cmd|.
+		Also see |+cmd|.
 
 :[N]sb[uffer] [+cmd] [N]				*:sb* *:sbuffer*
 		Split window and edit buffer [N] from the buffer list.  If [N]
@@ -1113,7 +1131,7 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 		"useopen" setting of 'switchbuf' when splitting.  This will
 		also edit a buffer that is not in the buffer list, without
 		setting the 'buflisted' flag.
-		Also see ||+cmd|.
+		Also see |+cmd|.
 
 :[N]sb[uffer] [+cmd] {bufname}
 		Split window and edit buffer for {bufname} from the buffer
@@ -1122,13 +1140,13 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 		Note: If what you want to do is split the buffer, make a copy
 		under another name, you can do it this way: >
 			:w foobar | sp #
-<		Also see ||+cmd|.
+<		Also see |+cmd|.
 
 :[N]bn[ext][!] [+cmd] [N]				*:bn* *:bnext* *E87*
 		Go to [N]th next buffer in buffer list.  [N] defaults to one.
 		Wraps around the end of the buffer list.
 		See |:buffer-!| for [!].
-		Also see ||+cmd|.
+		Also see |+cmd|.
 		If you are in a help buffer, this takes you to the next help
 		buffer (if there is one).  Similarly, if you are in a normal
 		(non-help) buffer, this takes you to the next normal buffer.
@@ -1141,21 +1159,21 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 :[N]sbn[ext] [+cmd] [N]
 		Split window and go to [N]th next buffer in buffer list.
 		Wraps around the end of the buffer list.  Uses 'switchbuf'
-		Also see ||+cmd|.
+		Also see |+cmd|.
 
 :[N]bN[ext][!] [+cmd] [N]		*:bN* *:bNext* *:bp* *:bprevious* *E88*
 :[N]bp[revious][!] [+cmd] [N]
 		Go to [N]th previous buffer in buffer list.  [N] defaults to
 		one.  Wraps around the start of the buffer list.
 		See |:buffer-!| for [!] and 'switchbuf'.
-		Also see ||+cmd|.
+		Also see |+cmd|.
 
 :[N]sbN[ext] [+cmd] [N]			*:sbN* *:sbNext* *:sbp* *:sbprevious*
 :[N]sbp[revious] [+cmd] [N]
 		Split window and go to [N]th previous buffer in buffer list.
 		Wraps around the start of the buffer list.
 		Uses 'switchbuf'.
-		Also see ||+cmd|.
+		Also see |+cmd|.
 
 :br[ewind][!] [+cmd]					*:br* *:brewind*
 		Go to first buffer in buffer list.  If the buffer list is

runtime/doc/xxd-ja.UTF-8.1

@@ -61,6 +61,16 @@
 行末には ascii (または ebcdic) で表した場合の文字が表示されます。
 このモードでは \-r、\-p、\-i は機能しません。
 .TP
+.IR \-e
+リトルエンディアンの 16 進ダンプに切り替える。
+このオプションは、バイトのグループをリトルエンディアンのバイト順のワードとして
+扱います。標準のグルーピングは 4 バイトですが、
+.RI "" \-g
+を使うことで変更可能です。
+このオプションは 16 進ダンプのみに適用され、ASCII (あるいは EBCDIC) 表示は
+変更されません。
+このモードでは \-r、\-p、\-i は機能しません。
+.TP
 .IR "\-c cols " | " \-cols cols"
 一行
 .RI < cols >
@@ -80,7 +90,8 @@
 .I \-g 0
 を指定してください。
 .RI < Bytes >
-の標準設定は \fI2\fP です。2 進ダンプの場合は \fI1\fP です。
+の標準設定は \fI2\fP で、リトルエンディアンモードの場合は \fI4\fP 、
+2 進ダンプの場合は \fI1\fP です。
 ポストスクリプト形式やインクルード形式で出力するときは、このオプションは使わ
 れません。
 .TP
@@ -95,6 +106,11 @@ C インクルードファイル形式で出力します。入力ファイルの
 .RI  < len >
 オクテットだけ出力する。
 .TP
+.I \-o offset
+表示されるファイル位置に
+.RI < offset >
+を加算する。
+.TP
 .IR \-p " | " \-ps " | " \-postscript " | " \-plain
 ポストスクリプト形式の 16 進ダンプを出力する。別名 プレーン 16 進ダンプ。
 .TP

runtime/doc/xxd.man

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-XXD(1)                                                                  XXD(1)
+XXD(1)                      General Commands Manual                     XXD(1)
 
 
 
@@ -14,30 +14,29 @@ DESCRIPTION
        xxd  creates a hex dump of a given file or standard input.  It can also
        convert a hex dump back to its original binary form.  Like  uuencode(1)
        and  uudecode(1)  it allows the transmission of binary data in a `mail-
-       safe' ASCII representation, but has the advantage of decoding to  stan-
+       safe' ASCII representation, but has the advantage of decoding to  stan‐
        dard output.  Moreover, it can be used to perform binary file patching.
 
 OPTIONS
-       If no infile is given, standard input is read.  If infile is  specified
-       as  a  `-'  character,  then input is taken from standard input.  If no
+       If  no infile is given, standard input is read.  If infile is specified
+       as a `-' character, then input is taken from  standard  input.   If  no
        outfile is given (or a `-' character is in its place), results are sent
        to standard output.
 
-       Note  that  a  "lazy" parser is used which does not check for more than
-       the first option letter, unless the option is followed by a  parameter.
-       Spaces  between  a single option letter and its parameter are optional.
+       Note that a "lazy" parser is used which does not check  for  more  than
+       the  first option letter, unless the option is followed by a parameter.
+       Spaces between a single option letter and its parameter  are  optional.
        Parameters to options can be specified in decimal, hexadecimal or octal
        notation.  Thus -c8, -c 8, -c 010 and -cols 8 are all equivalent.
 
-
        -a | -autoskip
-              toggle  autoskip: A single '*' replaces nul-lines.  Default off.
+              toggle autoskip: A single '*' replaces nul-lines.  Default off.
 
        -b | -bits
               Switch to bits (binary digits) dump, rather than hexdump.   This
               option  writes octets as eight digits "1"s and "0"s instead of a
               normal hexadecimal dump. Each line is preceded by a line  number
-              in  hexadecimal and followed by an ascii (or ebcdic) representa-
+              in  hexadecimal and followed by an ascii (or ebcdic) representa‐
               tion. The command line switches -r, -p, -i do not work with this
               mode.
 
@@ -50,25 +49,34 @@ OPTIONS
               to EBCDIC.  This does not change the hexadecimal representation.
               The option is meaningless in combinations with -r, -p or -i.
 
+       -e     Switch to little-endian hexdump.  This option treats byte groups
+              as words in little-endian byte order.  The default grouping of 4
+              bytes may be changed using -g.  This option only applies to hex‐
+              dump,  leaving  the  ASCII (or EBCDIC) representation unchanged.
+              The command line switches -r, -p, -i do not work with this mode.
+
        -g bytes | -groupsize bytes
               separate the output of every <bytes> bytes (two  hex  characters
-              or eight bit-digits each) by a whitespace.  Specify -g 0 to sup-
-              press grouping.  <Bytes> defaults to 2 in normal mode and  1  in
-              bits  mode.   Grouping  does  not apply to postscript or include
-              style.
+              or eight bit-digits each) by a whitespace.  Specify -g 0 to sup‐
+              press grouping.  <Bytes> defaults to 2 in normal mode, 4 in lit‐
+              tle-endian  mode and 1 in bits mode.  Grouping does not apply to
+              postscript or include style.
 
        -h | -help
               print a summary of available commands and exit.  No hex  dumping
               is performed.
 
        -i | -include
-              output  in C include file style. A complete static array defini-
+              output  in C include file style. A complete static array defini‐
               tion is written (named after the input file), unless  xxd  reads
               from stdin.
 
        -l len | -len len
               stop after writing <len> octets.
 
+       -o offset
+              add <offset> to the displayed file position.
+
        -p | -ps | -postscript | -plain
               output  in  postscript  continuous  hexdump style. Also known as
               plain hexdump style.
@@ -76,8 +84,8 @@ OPTIONS
        -r | -revert
               reverse operation: convert (or patch) hexdump into  binary.   If
               not  writing  to stdout, xxd writes into its output file without
-              truncating it. Use the combination -r -p to read plain hexadeci-
-              mal dumps without line number information and without a particu-
+              truncating it. Use the combination -r -p to read plain hexadeci‐
+              mal dumps without line number information and without a particu‐
               lar column layout. Additional  Whitespace  and  line-breaks  are
               allowed anywhere.
 
@@ -101,7 +109,7 @@ OPTIONS
 CAVEATS
        xxd -r has some builtin magic while evaluating line number information.
        If the output file is seekable, then the linenumbers at  the  start  of
-       each  hexdump  line may be out of order, lines may be missing, or over-
+       each  hexdump  line may be out of order, lines may be missing, or over‐
        lapping. In these cases xxd will lseek(2) to the next position. If  the
        output  file  is  not  seekable,  only  gaps are allowed, which will be
        filled by null-bytes.
@@ -112,8 +120,8 @@ CAVEATS
        input line after reading enough columns of hexadecimal data (see option
        -c). This also means, that changes to the printable ascii  (or  ebcdic)
        columns  are  always  ignored.  Reverting a plain (or postscript) style
-       hexdump with xxd -r -p does not depend on the correct  number  of  col-
-       umns.  Here  anything  that  looks  like a pair of hex-digits is inter-
+       hexdump with xxd -r -p does not depend on the correct  number  of  col‐
+       umns.  Here  anything  that  looks  like a pair of hex-digits is inter‐
        preted.
 
        Note the difference between
@@ -218,7 +226,6 @@ EXAMPLES
        % stty < /dev/term/b -echo -opost -isig -icanon min 1
        % echo -n foo > /dev/term/b
 
-
 RETURN VALUES
        The following error values are returned:
 
@@ -256,7 +263,4 @@ AUTHOR
        <tony@sctnugen.ppp.gu.edu.au> <T.Nugent@sct.gu.edu.au>
        Small changes by Bram Moolenaar.  Edited by Juergen Weigert.
 
-
-
-
 Manual page for xxd               August 1996                           XXD(1)

runtime/filetype.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim support file to detect file types
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2015 Mar 13
+" Last Change:	2015 Dec 03
 
 " Listen very carefully, I will say this only once
 if exists("did_load_filetypes")
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead .arch-inventory,=tagging-method	setf arch
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.art			setf art
 
 " AsciiDoc
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.asciidoc		setf asciidoc
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.asciidoc,*.adoc		setf asciidoc
 
 " ASN.1
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.asn,*.asn1		setf asn
@@ -308,6 +308,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.bl			setf blank
 " Blkid cache file
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/blkid.tab,*/etc/blkid.tab.old   setf xml
 
+" Bazel (http://bazel.io)
+autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.bzl,BUILD,WORKSPACE setfiletype bzl
+
 " C or lpc
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.c			call s:FTlpc()
 
@@ -499,7 +502,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.prg
 	\ endif
 
 " Clojure
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.clj,*.cljs		setf clojure
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.clj,*.cljs,*.cljx,*.cljc		setf clojure
 
 " Cmake
 au BufNewFile,BufRead CMakeLists.txt,*.cmake,*.cmake.in		setf cmake
@@ -776,10 +779,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.mo,*.gdmo		setf gdmo
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ged,lltxxxxx.txt	setf gedcom
 
 " Git
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.git/COMMIT_EDITMSG	setf gitcommit
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.git/MERGE_MSG		setf gitcommit
+au BufNewFile,BufRead COMMIT_EDITMSG		setf gitcommit
+au BufNewFile,BufRead MERGE_MSG			setf gitcommit
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.git/config,.gitconfig,.gitmodules setf gitconfig
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.git/modules/*/COMMIT_EDITMSG setf gitcommit
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.git/modules/*/config	setf gitconfig
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */.config/git/config	setf gitconfig
 if !empty($XDG_CONFIG_HOME)
@@ -827,7 +829,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.gs			setf grads
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.gretl			setf gretl
 
 " Groovy
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.groovy			setf groovy
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.gradle,*.groovy		setf groovy
 
 " GNU Server Pages
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.gsp			setf gsp
@@ -873,7 +875,7 @@ func! s:FThtml()
       setf xhtml
       return
     endif
-    if getline(n) =~ '{%\s*\(extends\|block\|load\)\>'
+    if getline(n) =~ '{%\s*\(extends\|block\|load\)\>\|{#\s\+'
       setf htmldjango
       return
     endif
@@ -1169,7 +1171,7 @@ func! s:FTm()
   let n = 1
   while n < 10
     let line = getline(n)
-    if line =~ '^\s*\(#\s*\(include\|import\)\>\|/\*\|//\)'
+    if line =~ '^\s*\(#\s*\(include\|import\)\>\|@import\>\|/\*\|//\)'
       setf objc
       return
     endif
@@ -1295,7 +1297,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.mush			setf mush
 au BufNewFile,BufRead Mutt{ng,}rc		setf muttrc
 
 " Nano
-au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/nanorc,.nanorc	setf nanorc
+au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/nanorc,*.nanorc  	setf nanorc
 
 " Nastran input/DMAP
 "au BufNewFile,BufRead *.dat			setf nastran
@@ -1337,7 +1339,7 @@ func! s:FTmm()
   let n = 1
   while n < 10
     let line = getline(n)
-    if line =~ '^\s*\(#\s*\(include\|import\)\>\|/\*\)'
+    if line =~ '^\s*\(#\s*\(include\|import\)\>\|@import\>\|/\*\)'
       setf objcpp
       return
     endif
@@ -1398,7 +1400,7 @@ else
   au BufNewFile,BufRead *.pl			call s:FTpl()
 endif
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.plx,*.al		setf perl
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.p6,*.pm6		setf perl6
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.p6,*.pm6,*.pl6		setf perl6
 
 func! s:FTpl()
   if exists("g:filetype_pl")
@@ -1427,6 +1429,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.pm
 
 " Perl POD
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.pod			setf pod
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.pod6			setf pod6
 
 " Php, php3, php4, etc.
 " Also Phtml (was used for PHP 2 in the past)
@@ -1859,7 +1862,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead sgml.catalog*		call s:StarSetf('catalog')
 
 " Shell scripts (sh, ksh, bash, bash2, csh); Allow .profile_foo etc.
 " Gentoo ebuilds are actually bash scripts
-au BufNewFile,BufRead .bashrc*,bashrc,bash.bashrc,.bash_profile*,.bash_logout*,.bash_aliases*,*.bash,*.ebuild call SetFileTypeSH("bash")
+au BufNewFile,BufRead .bashrc*,bashrc,bash.bashrc,.bash[_-]profile*,.bash[_-]logout*,.bash[_-]aliases*,*.bash,*/{,.}bash[_-]completion{,.d,.sh}{,/*},*.ebuild,*.eclass call SetFileTypeSH("bash")
 au BufNewFile,BufRead .kshrc*,*.ksh call SetFileTypeSH("ksh")
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/profile,.profile*,*.sh,*.env call SetFileTypeSH(getline(1))
 
@@ -2115,6 +2118,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.cm			setf voscm
 " Sysctl
 au BufNewFile,BufRead */etc/sysctl.conf,*/etc/sysctl.d/*.conf	setf sysctl
 
+" Systemd unit files
+au BufNewFile,BufRead */systemd/*.{automount,mount,path,service,socket,swap,target,timer}	setf systemd
+
 " Synopsys Design Constraints
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sdc			setf sdc
 
@@ -2170,6 +2176,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.tli			setf tli
 " Telix Salt
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.slt			setf tsalt
 
+" Tera Term Language
+au BufRead,BufNewFile *.ttl			setf teraterm
+
 " Terminfo
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ti			setf terminfo
 

runtime/ftplugin/bzl.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:	Bazel (http://bazel.io)
+" Maintainer:	David Barnett (https://github.com/google/vim-ft-bzl)
+" Last Change:	2015 Aug 11
+
+""
+" @section Introduction, intro
+" Core settings for the bzl filetype, used for BUILD and *.bzl files for the
+" Bazel build system (http://bazel.io/).
+
+if exists('b:did_ftplugin')
+  finish
+endif
+
+
+" Vim 7.4.051 has opinionated settings in ftplugin/python.vim that try to force
+" PEP8 conventions on every python file, but these conflict with Google's
+" indentation guidelines. As a workaround, we explicitly source the system
+" ftplugin, but save indentation settings beforehand and restore them after.
+let s:save_expandtab = &l:expandtab
+let s:save_shiftwidth = &l:shiftwidth
+let s:save_softtabstop = &l:softtabstop
+let s:save_tabstop = &l:tabstop
+
+" NOTE: Vim versions before 7.3.511 had a ftplugin/python.vim that was broken
+" for compatible mode.
+let s:save_cpo = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+" Load base python ftplugin (also defines b:did_ftplugin).
+source $VIMRUNTIME/ftplugin/python.vim
+
+" NOTE: Vim versions before 7.4.104 and later set this in ftplugin/python.vim.
+setlocal comments=b:#,fb:-
+
+" Restore pre-existing indentation settings.
+let &l:expandtab = s:save_expandtab
+let &l:shiftwidth = s:save_shiftwidth
+let &l:softtabstop = s:save_softtabstop
+let &l:tabstop = s:save_tabstop
+
+setlocal formatoptions-=t
+
+" Make gf work with imports in BUILD files.
+setlocal includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'//','','')
+
+" Enable syntax-based folding, if specified.
+if get(g:, 'ft_bzl_fold', 0)
+  setlocal foldmethod=syntax
+  setlocal foldtext=BzlFoldText()
+endif
+
+if exists('*BzlFoldText')
+  finish
+endif
+
+function BzlFoldText() abort
+  let l:start_num = nextnonblank(v:foldstart)
+  let l:end_num = prevnonblank(v:foldend)
+
+  if l:end_num <= l:start_num + 1
+    " If the fold is empty, don't print anything for the contents.
+    let l:content = ''
+  else
+    " Otherwise look for something matching the content regex.
+    " And if nothing matches, print an ellipsis.
+    let l:content = '...'
+    for l:line in getline(l:start_num + 1, l:end_num - 1)
+      let l:content_match = matchstr(l:line, '\m\C^\s*name = \zs.*\ze,$')
+      if !empty(l:content_match)
+        let l:content = l:content_match
+        break
+      endif
+    endfor
+  endif
+
+  " Enclose content with start and end
+  let l:start_text = getline(l:start_num)
+  let l:end_text = substitute(getline(l:end_num), '^\s*', '', '')
+  let l:text = l:start_text . ' ' . l:content . ' ' . l:end_text
+
+  " Compute the available width for the displayed text.
+  let l:width = winwidth(0) - &foldcolumn - (&number ? &numberwidth : 0)
+  let l:lines_folded = ' ' . string(1 + v:foldend - v:foldstart) . ' lines'
+
+  " Expand tabs, truncate, pad, and concatenate
+  let l:text = substitute(l:text, '\t', repeat(' ', &tabstop), 'g')
+  let l:text = strpart(l:text, 0, l:width - len(l:lines_folded))
+  let l:padding = repeat(' ', l:width - len(l:lines_folded) - len(l:text))
+  return l:text . l:padding . l:lines_folded
+endfunction
+
+let &cpo = s:save_cpo
+unlet s:save_cpo

runtime/ftplugin/changelog.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,8 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
-" Language:         generic Changelog file
-" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
-" Latest Revision:  2014-01-10
+" Language:             generic Changelog file
+" Maintainer:           Martin Florian <marfl@posteo.de>
+" Previous Maintainer:  Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:      2015-10-25
 " Variables:
 "   g:changelog_timeformat (deprecated: use g:changelog_dateformat instead) -
 "       description: the timeformat used in ChangeLog entries.
@@ -167,7 +168,7 @@ if &filetype == 'changelog'
       let cursor = stridx(line, '{cursor}')
       call setline(lnum, substitute(line, '{cursor}', '', ''))
     endif
-    startinsert!
+    startinsert
   endfunction
 
   " Internal function to create a new entry in the ChangeLog.
@@ -223,7 +224,8 @@ if &filetype == 'changelog'
   endfunction
 
   if exists(":NewChangelogEntry") != 2
-    noremap <buffer> <silent> <Leader>o <Esc>:call <SID>new_changelog_entry('')<CR>
+    nnoremap <buffer> <silent> <Leader>o :<C-u>call <SID>new_changelog_entry('')<CR>
+    xnoremap <buffer> <silent> <Leader>o :<C-u>call <SID>new_changelog_entry('')<CR>
     command! -nargs=0 NewChangelogEntry call s:new_changelog_entry('')
   endif
 

runtime/ftplugin/fortran.vim

@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
 " Vim settings file
 " Language:	Fortran 2008 (and older: Fortran 2003, 95, 90, 77, 66)
-" Version:	0.49
-" Last Change:	2013 Oct. 01
+" Version:	0.50
+" Last Change:	2015 Nov. 30
 " Maintainer:	Ajit J. Thakkar <ajit@unb.ca>; <http://www2.unb.ca/~ajit/>
-" Usage:	Do :help fortran-plugin from Vim
+" Usage:	For instructions, do :help fortran-plugin from Vim
 " Credits:
 " Useful suggestions were made by Stefano Zacchiroli, Hendrik Merx, Ben
 " Fritz, and David Barnett.
@@ -20,7 +20,10 @@ set cpoptions&vim
 let b:did_ftplugin = 1
 
 " Determine whether this is a fixed or free format source file
-" if this hasn't been done yet
+" if this hasn't been done yet using the priority:
+" buffer-local value
+" > global value
+" > file extension as in Intel ifort, gcc (gfortran), NAG, Pathscale, and Cray compilers
 if !exists("b:fortran_fixed_source")
   if exists("fortran_free_source")
     " User guarantees free source form
@@ -28,13 +31,19 @@ if !exists("b:fortran_fixed_source")
   elseif exists("fortran_fixed_source")
     " User guarantees fixed source form
     let b:fortran_fixed_source = 1
+  elseif expand("%:e") ==? "f\<90\|95\|03\|08\>"
+    " Free-form file extension defaults as in Intel ifort, gcc(gfortran), NAG, Pathscale, and Cray compilers
+    let b:fortran_fixed_source = 0
+  elseif expand("%:e") ==? "f\|f77\|for"
+    " Fixed-form file extension defaults
+    let b:fortran_fixed_source = 1
   else
-    " Modern Fortran allows both fixed and free source form
-    " assume fixed source form unless signs of free source form
-    " are detected in the first five columns of the first s:lmax lines
+    " Modern fortran still allows both fixed and free source form
+    " Assume fixed source form unless signs of free source form
+    " are detected in the first five columns of the first s:lmax lines.
     " Detection becomes more accurate and time-consuming if more lines
     " are checked. Increase the limit below if you keep lots of comments at
-    " the very top of each file and you have a fast computer
+    " the very top of each file and you have a fast computer.
     let s:lmax = 500
     if ( s:lmax > line("$") )
       let s:lmax = line("$")

runtime/ftplugin/hgcommit.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:	hg (Mercurial) commit file
+" Maintainer:	Ken Takata <kentkt at csc dot jp>
+" Last Change:	2016 Jan 6
+" Filenames:	hg-editor-*.txt
+" License:	VIM License
+" URL:		https://github.com/k-takata/hg-vim
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+  finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+setlocal nomodeline
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setl modeline<'

runtime/ftplugin/hog.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin
+" Language:     hog (snort.conf)
+" Maintainer: . Victor Roemer, <vroemer@badsec.org>.
+" Last Change:  Mar 1, 2013
+
+if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
+    finish
+endif
+let b:did_ftplugin = 1
+
+let s:undo_ftplugin = "setl fo< com< cms< def< inc<"
+
+let s:cpo_save = &cpo
+set cpo&vim
+
+setlocal formatoptions=croq
+setlocal comments=:#
+setlocal commentstring=\c#\ %s
+setlocal define=\c^\s\{-}var
+setlocal include=\c^\s\{-}include
+
+" Move around configurations 
+let s:hog_keyword_match = '\c^\s*\<\(preprocessor\\|config\\|output\\|include\\|ipvar\\|portvar\\|var\\|dynamicpreprocessor\\|' . 
+                        \ 'dynamicengine\\|dynamicdetection\\|activate\\|alert\\|drop\\|block\\|dynamic\\|log\\|pass\\|reject\\|sdrop\\|sblock\)\>'
+
+exec "nnoremap <buffer><silent> ]] :call search('" . s:hog_keyword_match . "', 'W' )<CR>"
+exec "nnoremap <buffer><silent> [[ :call search('" . s:hog_keyword_match . "', 'bW' )<CR>"
+
+if exists("loaded_matchit")
+    let b:match_words =
+                  \ '^\s*\<\%(preprocessor\|config\|output\|include\|ipvar\|portvar' . 
+                  \ '\|var\|dynamicpreprocessor\|dynamicengine\|dynamicdetection' . 
+                  \ '\|activate\|alert\|drop\|block\|dynamic\|log\|pass\|reject' . 
+                  \ '\|sdrop\|sblock\>\):$,\::\,:;'
+    let b:match_skip = 'r:\\.\{-}$\|^\s*#.\{-}$\|^\s*$'
+endif
+
+let &cpo = s:cpo_save
+unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/ftplugin/j.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Language:	J
 " Maintainer:	David Bürgin <676c7473@gmail.com>
 " URL:		https://github.com/glts/vim-j
-" Last Change:	2015-01-11
+" Last Change:	2015-09-27
 
 if exists('b:did_ftplugin')
   finish
@@ -12,16 +12,20 @@ let b:did_ftplugin = 1
 let s:save_cpo = &cpo
 set cpo&vim
 
-setlocal iskeyword=48-57,A-Z,_,a-z
+setlocal iskeyword=48-57,A-Z,a-z,_
 setlocal comments=:NB.
 setlocal commentstring=NB.\ %s
 setlocal formatoptions-=t
-setlocal shiftwidth=2
-setlocal softtabstop=2
-setlocal expandtab
 setlocal matchpairs=(:)
+setlocal path-=/usr/include
 
-let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setlocal matchpairs< expandtab< softtabstop< shiftwidth< formatoptions< commentstring< comments< iskeyword<'
+" Includes. To make the shorthand form "require 'web/cgi'" work, double the
+" last path component. Also strip off leading folder names like "~addons/".
+setlocal include=\\v^\\s*(load\|require)\\s*'\\zs\\f+\\ze'
+setlocal includeexpr=substitute(substitute(tr(v:fname,'\\','/'),'\\v^[^~][^/.]*(/[^/.]+)$','&\\1',''),'\\v^\\~[^/]+/','','')
+setlocal suffixesadd=.ijs
+
+let b:undo_ftplugin = 'setlocal matchpairs< formatoptions< commentstring< comments< iskeyword< path< include< includeexpr< suffixesadd<'
 
 " Section movement with ]] ][ [[ []. The start/end patterns below are amended
 " inside the function in order to avoid matching on the current cursor line.

runtime/ftplugin/kconfig.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,10 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
-" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
-" Latest Revision:  2008-07-09
+" Vim syntax file
+" Maintainer:           Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
+" Previous Maintainer:  Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:      2015-05-29
+" License:              Vim (see :h license)
+" Repository:		https://github.com/chrisbra/vim-kconfig
 
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
   finish
@@ -14,5 +18,10 @@ let b:undo_ftplugin = "setl com< cms< fo<"
 
 setlocal comments=:# commentstring=#\ %s formatoptions-=t formatoptions+=croql
 
+" For matchit.vim
+if exists("loaded_matchit")
+  let b:match_words = '^\<menu\>:\<endmenu\>,^\<if\>:\<endif\>,^\<choice\>:\<endchoice\>'
+endif
+
 let &cpo = s:cpo_save
 unlet s:cpo_save

runtime/ftplugin/man.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:	man
 " Maintainer:	SungHyun Nam <goweol@gmail.com>
-" Last Change:	2014 Dec 29
+" Last Change: 	2015 Nov 24
 
 " To make the ":Man" command available before editing a manual page, source
 " this script from your startup vimrc file.
@@ -33,6 +33,11 @@ if &filetype == "man"
 
     nnoremap <buffer> <c-]> :call <SID>PreGetPage(v:count)<CR>
     nnoremap <buffer> <c-t> :call <SID>PopPage()<CR>
+    nnoremap <buffer> <silent> q :q<CR>
+  endif
+
+  if exists('g:ft_man_folding_enable') && (g:ft_man_folding_enable == 1)
+    setlocal foldmethod=indent foldnestmax=1 foldenable
   endif
 
   let b:undo_ftplugin = "setlocal iskeyword<"

runtime/ftplugin/spec.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " Filename: spec.vim
 " Maintainer: Igor Gnatenko i.gnatenko.brain@gmail.com
 " Former Maintainer: Gustavo Niemeyer <niemeyer@conectiva.com> (until March 2014)
-" Last Change: Fri Feb 20 16:01 MSK 2014 Igor Gnatenko
+" Last Change: Mon Jun 01 21:15 MSK 2015 Igor Gnatenko
 
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
 	finish
@@ -22,11 +22,36 @@ if !hasmapto("call <SID>SpecChangelog(\"\")<CR>")
        noremap <buffer> <unique> <script> <Plug>SpecChangelog :call <SID>SpecChangelog("")<CR>
 endif
 
+if !exists("*s:GetRelVer")
+	function! s:GetRelVer()
+		if has('python')
+python << PYEND
+import sys, datetime, shutil, tempfile
+import vim
+
+try:
+    import rpm
+except ImportError:
+    pass
+else:
+    specfile = vim.current.buffer.name
+    if specfile:
+        spec = rpm.spec(specfile)
+        headers = spec.packages[0].header
+        version = headers['Version']
+        release = ".".join(headers['Release'].split(".")[:-1])
+        vim.command("let ver = " + version)
+        vim.command("let rel = " + release)
+PYEND
+		endif
+	endfunction
+endif
+
 if !exists("*s:SpecChangelog")
 	function s:SpecChangelog(format)
 		if strlen(a:format) == 0
 			if !exists("g:spec_chglog_format")
-				let email = input("Email address: ")
+				let email = input("Name <email address>: ")
 				let g:spec_chglog_format = "%a %b %d %Y " . l:email
 				echo "\r"
 			endif
@@ -71,6 +96,9 @@ if !exists("*s:SpecChangelog")
 		else
 			let include_release_info = 0
 		endif
+
+		call s:GetRelVer()
+
 		if (chgline == -1)
 			let option = confirm("Can't find %changelog. Create one? ","&End of file\n&Here\n&Cancel",3)
 			if (option == 1)
@@ -85,7 +113,7 @@ if !exists("*s:SpecChangelog")
 			endif
 		endif
 		if (chgline != -1)
-			let parsed_format = "* ".strftime(format)
+			let parsed_format = "* ".strftime(format)." - ".ver."-".rel
 			let release_info = "+ ".name."-".ver."-".rel
 			let wrong_format = 0
 			let wrong_release = 0

runtime/ftplugin/systemd.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+" Vim filetype plugin file
+" Language:  systemd.unit(5)
+
+if !exists('b:did_ftplugin')
+  " Looks a lot like dosini files.
+  runtime! ftplugin/dosini.vim
+endif

runtime/ftplugin/zsh.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
-" Language:         Zsh shell script
-" Maintainer:       Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
-" Latest Revision:  2011-01-23
+" Language:		Zsh shell script
+" Maintainer:		Christian Brabandt <cb@256bit.org>
+" Previous Maintainer:	Nikolai Weibull <now@bitwi.se>
+" Latest Revision:	2015-05-29
+" License:		Vim (see :h license)
+" Repository:		https://github.com/chrisbra/vim-zsh
 
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
   finish

runtime/gvim.desktop

@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+[Desktop Entry]
+Name=GVim
+GenericName=Text Editor
+GenericName[de]=Texteditor
+Comment=Edit text files
+Comment[af]=Redigeer tekslêers
+Comment[am]=የጽሑፍ ፋይሎች ያስተካክሉ
+Comment[ar]=حرّر ملفات نصية
+Comment[az]=Mətn fayllarını redaktə edin
+Comment[be]=Рэдагаваньне тэкставых файлаў
+Comment[bg]=Редактиране на текстови файлове
+Comment[bn]=টেক্স্ট ফাইল এডিট করুন
+Comment[bs]=Izmijeni tekstualne datoteke
+Comment[ca]=Edita fitxers de text
+Comment[cs]=Úprava textových souborů
+Comment[cy]=Golygu ffeiliau testun
+Comment[da]=Redigér tekstfiler
+Comment[de]=Textdateien bearbeiten
+Comment[el]=Επεξεργασία αρχείων κειμένου
+Comment[en_CA]=Edit text files
+Comment[en_GB]=Edit text files
+Comment[es]=Edita archivos de texto
+Comment[et]=Redigeeri tekstifaile
+Comment[eu]=Editatu testu-fitxategiak
+Comment[fa]=ویرایش پرونده‌های متنی
+Comment[fi]=Muokkaa tekstitiedostoja
+Comment[fr]=Édite des fichiers texte
+Comment[ga]=Eagar comhad Téacs
+Comment[gu]=લખાણ ફાઇલોમાં ફેરફાર કરો
+Comment[he]=ערוך קבצי טקסט
+Comment[hi]=पाठ फ़ाइलें संपादित करें
+Comment[hr]=Uređivanje tekstualne datoteke
+Comment[hu]=Szövegfájlok szerkesztése
+Comment[id]=Edit file teks
+Comment[it]=Modifica file di testo
+Comment[ja]=テキストファイルを編集します
+Comment[kn]=ಪಠ್ಯ ಕಡತಗಳನ್ನು ಸಂಪಾದಿಸು
+Comment[ko]=텍스트 파일을 편집합니다
+Comment[lt]=Redaguoti tekstines bylas
+Comment[lv]=Rediģēt teksta failus
+Comment[mk]=Уреди текстуални фајлови
+Comment[ml]=വാചക രചനകള് തിരുത്തുക
+Comment[mn]=Текст файл боловсруулах
+Comment[mr]=गद्य फाइल संपादित करा
+Comment[ms]=Edit fail teks
+Comment[nb]=Rediger tekstfiler
+Comment[ne]=पाठ फाइललाई संशोधन गर्नुहोस्
+Comment[nl]=Tekstbestanden bewerken
+Comment[nn]=Rediger tekstfiler
+Comment[no]=Rediger tekstfiler
+Comment[or]=ପାଠ୍ଯ ଫାଇଲଗୁଡ଼ିକୁ ସମ୍ପାଦନ କରନ୍ତୁ
+Comment[pa]=ਪਾਠ ਫਾਇਲਾਂ ਸੰਪਾਦਨ
+Comment[pl]=Edytor plików tekstowych
+Comment[pt]=Editar ficheiros de texto
+Comment[pt_BR]=Edite arquivos de texto
+Comment[ro]=Editare fişiere text
+Comment[ru]=Редактор текстовых файлов
+Comment[sk]=Úprava textových súborov
+Comment[sl]=Urejanje datotek z besedili
+Comment[sq]=Përpuno files teksti
+Comment[sr]=Измени текстуалне датотеке
+Comment[sr@Latn]=Izmeni tekstualne datoteke
+Comment[sv]=Redigera textfiler
+Comment[ta]=உரை கோப்புகளை தொகுக்கவும்
+Comment[th]=แก้ไขแฟ้มข้อความ
+Comment[tk]=Metin faýllary editle
+Comment[tr]=Metin dosyalarını düzenle
+Comment[uk]=Редактор текстових файлів
+Comment[vi]=Soạn thảo tập tin văn bản
+Comment[wa]=Asspougnî des fitchîs tecses
+Comment[zh_CN]=编辑文本文件
+Comment[zh_TW]=編輯文字檔
+TryExec=gvim
+Exec=gvim -f %F
+Terminal=false
+Type=Application
+Icon=gvim
+Categories=Utility;TextEditor;
+StartupNotify=true
+MimeType=text/english;text/plain;text/x-makefile;text/x-c++hdr;text/x-c++src;text/x-chdr;text/x-csrc;text/x-java;text/x-moc;text/x-pascal;text/x-tcl;text/x-tex;application/x-shellscript;text/x-c;text/x-c++;